65+ Quick & Easy Salad Recipes That Are Mealthworthy - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/lunch/salads/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Wed, 14 Jan 2026 20:58:41 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 65+ Quick & Easy Salad Recipes That Are Mealthworthy - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/lunch/salads/ 32 32 Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/#respond Tue, 14 Oct 2025 19:13:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83779 Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in…]]>

Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in my early 20s? The fact is, sweet potatoes aren’t a typical ingredient in Turkish/Mediterranean cooking.

However, that doesn’t mean we can’t incorporate some of those classic Mediterranean flavors into a salad that could easily be the centerpiece of your holiday table or, really, any time you need a great fall salad. 

To me, this Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad is just that. Made by roasting sweet potatoes with shallots and chickpeas, layering them with arugula, and topping everything with candied walnuts and feta cheese, it may sound a bit unexpected, but I promise you it works wonderfully.

Ingredients You’ll Need Plus Smart Swaps:

You’ll find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here’s a closer look at what goes into this roasted sweet potato salad, and a few simple swaps, to help you make it your own:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The Core Components: Sweet Potato & Shallots

Sweet potatoes: When choosing sweet potatoes, go for ones that feel firm with smooth skin and have no soft spots. Smaller to medium-sized potatoes are ideal as they’re sweeter, creamier, and easier to manage than the larger, starchier ones. Once peeled and chop them up into even pieces so they roast evenly. 

PRO Tip: Some people incorrectly call sweet potatoes yams, but they are not the same thing. This recipe is tested only with sweet potatoes.

Shallots or Red Onion: Roasting them in large chunks turns them super sweet and caramelized, but if you are not a fan of large chunks of onion in your salad, you can slice them thinly before roasting.

However, I find that the large pieces give you more caramelized flavor compared to the sliced version. 

Alternatively, you can use a large red onion as a substitute for shallots.

Chickpeas: I am using canned chickpeas for convenience. Though it is imperative to take the time to pat them dry well after draining, as they won’t crisp up if they are still soaking wet.

Green, Cheese, and Dressing

Arugula: I usually buy triple-washed arugula from the store to save on time. 

I think the slightly bitter, peppery taste of arugula pairs beautifully with the rest of the ingredients. However, if you prefer something milder, you can use spring mix or baby spinach. For a heartier baked sweet potato salad, you can use massaged kale

Regardless of the salad greens you are using, make sure that they are rinsed and spin-dried so that the salad dressing can coat the greens well.

Maple Candied Walnuts: I use a handful of walnuts for extra crunch and some sweetness. You can also use pecans or almonds, or for a nut-free version, go for roasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. Maple syrup is my choice of sweetener, but agave or honey would also work.

Feta Cheese: This is a Mediterranean classic, but you could also add goat cheese instead. For a vegan, dairy-free option, simply omit the feta or use a plant-based feta cheese.

Optional Add-Ins and Flavor Boosters

Pomegranate molasses and arils: While this is also a Mediterranean classic and works beautifully in this salad, I know not everyone has it in their pantry. It will change the overall taste a bit, but a drizzle of balsamic reduction would be a good alternative to pomegranate molasses.

Again, optional, but I also like to add a handful of pomegranate arils for a pop of color.

Grains/seeds: If you are making this sweet potato salad as a part of your weekly meal prep and want it to be a bit more filling and satisfying, you can add a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, couscous, farro, or even bulgur wheat.

How to Make Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad

Here’s how this salad comes together: first, we roast the veggies and make the candied walnuts, and then we make a simple vinaigrette and assemble. Here’s exactly how I do it step by step:

Sweet potatoes, shallots and chickpeas on a sheet pan from the top view.

Step 1 – Roast the Vegetables: After testing this recipe multiple times, I found that roasting everything at once makes cleanup so much easier without sacrificing crispness. 

Grab a large baking sheet, as we want to make sure all the veggies have enough room to roast evenly. I like to use parchment paper for easy clean up, but it is optional.

Spread sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas on the sheet pan, drizzle them with olive oil, salt, and pepper, and give them a good toss. Roast everything in a preheated 425 °F /218°C oven for 20 minutes. Be sure to give it a toss halfway through to ensure everything browns and caramelizes evenly.

A collage of images showing how to make maple candied walnuts.

Step 2 – Make the Candied Walnuts: My version of making maple candied walnuts here is super simple. Simply mix walnuts with maple syrup, spread onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper, sprinkle with coarse salt, and roast for 5-7 minutes in the oven.

I usually roast them while the veggies are in the oven, so I don’t have to wait later on.

Whatever you do, do not (I repeat, do not) skip the parchment paper (because they will stick to the pan) and sea salt (it helps make them even more delicious).

A collage of photos showing how to make the dressing for the salad and how to dress arugula.

Step 3 – Prep the Dressing and season arugula: When the veggies are cooling, make the dressing. It is as simple as it gets: Add olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper to a small bowl and whisk to combine. 

When you’re ready to serve, place the arugula in a large bowl and drizzle with the dressing. Using your clean hands or a pair of tongs, gently toss to ensure that all the greens are coated with the dressing.

Give it a taste and make sure they are seasoned well. If necessary, add more salt and pepper. 

A collage of photos showing the assembly stages of making this roasted sweet potato salad.

Step 4 – Assemble: You can assemble the salad in the bowl with the now-well-seasoned arugula, but since we are planning to serve this as a showstopping centerpiece for Thanksgiving, I transfer it to a large oval serving platter. 

Then all we need to do is to top them off with the roasted veggies, maple candied walnuts, crumbled feta cheese, and, if using, drizzle everything with a few tablespoons of pomegranate molasses. I also add a handful of pomegranate seeds to make it even more colorful and festive, but it is optional.

Making This a Festive Holiday Centerpiece: Make-Ahead & Presentation Tips

This Mediterranean fall salad is a fantastic alternative to your usual boring roasted sweet potatoes that everyone serves on Thanksgiving.

Mediterranean sweet potato salad on a plate from the top view.

And, the good news is that you can make each component of the recipe ahead of time and assemble it right before serving. Here’s how I do it:

Presentation: Platter vs. Bowl

Serve on a Platter: I strongly recommend serving this salad on a large oval platter instead of a deep bowl, which not only makes for a much prettier presentation but also helps the delicate arugula hold its shape since it’s not weighed down by the toppings. It also ensures that every guest gets a bit of everything with each serving.

Make-Ahead Strategy (For a Crispy Salad)

  • Roast Components Ahead: You can roast the sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas, and prep the candied walnuts and salad dressing a day or two in advance.
  • Bring to room temperature: Ensure the roasted veggies and nuts are completely cooled before storing them or adding them to the arugula, as warm ingredients will melt the feta and cause the delicate greens to wilt.
  • Store Separately: Store the cooled components in airtight containers in the refrigerator, and assemble everything right before serving.

Storage of Leftovers

  • Leftovers Keep Well: Leftovers do keep well for up to 3 days in the refrigerator if kept in an airtight container.
  • Arugula will Wilt: The arugula will naturally wilt once dressed. However, a good toss before serving brings it back to life. Always taste for seasoning and add more salt or pepper as necessary before serving.

Serving Suggestions

This Mediterranean baked sweet potato salad is as versatile as it is beautiful. Serve it warm or at room temperature, making it perfect for a cozy fall dinner or your Thanksgiving spread. It is surely one of my favorite Thanksgiving vegetable sides that I make every year.

Here are a few of my favorite dishes to pair it with:

With Turkey: If you’re planning on making a complete Thanksgiving spread, serve it alongside my Herb Roasted Turkey. Or, pair it with my Baked Turkey Tenderloin for a smaller holiday meal or simple weeknight dinner.

With Chicken: For another simple weeknight option, try serving it with my Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast. Alternatively, if you want to keep the Mediterranean flavors going, serve it alongside my Harissa Honey Chicken for a feast that is guaranteed to impress.

Vegetarian: This salad makes the perfect side to my Stuffed Eggplant as a Mediterranean-inspired meatless meal.

FAQs

Can I use canned sweet potatoes?

I wouldn’t recommend it since they’re too soft and won’t caramelize properly in the oven. That said, if it’s all you have on hand, just bake for about 10 minutes to warm them through.

Can I serve it cold?

Yes, this salad tastes great warm, at room temperature, or chilled straight from the fridge.

Can I air fry the veggies?

You technically can, but it will be hard to fit them all at once. If you prefer to roast everything in the air fryer, I recommend either doing it in two batches or air frying each veggie separately to ensure even roasting.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mediterranean Salads You Might Like

I love keeping a few salads in rotation that are just as easy to make as this sweet potato salad recipe. Here are a few other Mediterranean salads I never get tired of:

  • My go-to for BBQs, picnics, and meal prep is this Mediterranean Pasta Salad. It is easy to make, and just uses a few pantry staples and fresh veggies.
  • Shepherd’s Salad (Çoban Salatası) is a refreshing Turkish tomato and cucumber salad tossed with olive oil and lemon juice. It’s a summer staple I grew up eating in Turkey.
  • If you want a quick, plant protein-packed salad that is ready in 30 minutes, try my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad. It can also be served cold or warm and it is another salad recipe that you can make ahead.
Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad from the top view on a serving platter.
Print

Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad Recipe

Sweet Potatoes are not common in the Mediterranean, but that doesn’t mean we cannot use them in a salad that embodies the flavors of the region. Made by roasting sweet potatoes tossed with chickpeas, feta, and candied walnuts and serving them on a bed of arugula, this make-ahead salad is worthy of your holiday table as a colorful centerpiece or a humble yet filling lunch to take to work with you on a Tuesday.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Cooling time 10 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 250kcal

Ingredients

For The Veggies

  • 2 large sweet potatoes 1 ½ lbs peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 3 shallots medium size – peeled and sliced/quartered (or 1 large red onion, cut into wedges)
  • 1 can chickpeas 15-ounce- drained, rinsed, and patted dry
  • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Candied Walnuts

  • ½ cup halved walnuts
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1/8 teaspoon flaky sea salt

For The Dressing

  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 3 cups arugula leaves loosely packed, rinsed and spin dried
  • ¼ cup crumbled feta cheese 2 oz.
  • 2 tablespoons Pomegranate molasses* optional

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 425°F (220°C). Line a sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Place cubed sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas onto the baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to ensure they are evenly coated with the seasonings.
    Roasted veggies on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • Roast for 20 minutes, tossing halfway through, until the potatoes are golden, the shallots are caramelized, and the chickpeas are lightly crispy.
  • To make the candied walnuts, in a small bowl, mix together the walnuts with maple syrup.
    Candied walnuts in the making.
  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and spread the walnuts evenly. Sprinkle them with a pinch of flaky sea salt and roast them in the oven for 5-7 minutes or until lightly toasted and golden. It is okay to roast them while the veggies are roasting.
  • When roasted, remove the veggies and walnuts from the oven and let them cool for 10-15 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, make the salad dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper in a bowl.
    Dressing for the salad and tossing the arugula with it by hand.
  • To assemble the salad, place the arugula in a large salad bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing and toss to coat.
  • Pile the veggies on top and give it another big toss.
    A collage of images showing the stages of the assembly of the recipe.
  • Garnish with candied walnuts, crumbled feta, and drizzle with pomegranate molasses (if using) right before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 (loose) cups of salad that is ideal for serving 6 people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • *A good substitute for pomegranate molasses is balsamic reduction. The flavor will change slightly, but it will still be delicious. Alternatively, if you do not have either of them, you can omit using them entirely.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare all components of the recipe in advance, let them reach room temperature, store them in an airtight container in the fridge, and assemble the salad right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 748mg | Potassium: 362mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 10953IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 84mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/feed/ 0
Kale Apple Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/#comments Tue, 16 Sep 2025 23:25:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49034 Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them…]]>

Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them with something as sturdy and earthy as kale. A good dressing is key, especially when kale is involved, because let’s be honest, on its own, it’s not everyone’s favorite (my husband would agree). 

For me, the magic is in the balance of textures and tastes. Sweet, crisp apples meet earthy kale, all tied together with a dreamy maple Dijon dressing. Then comes the crunch from sunflower seeds, which makes every bite a little more exciting.

I call it a slaw because I was inspired by the Kale Apple Slaw at Tropical Smoothie Café, a cult-favorite dish that I loved so much that I had to recreate it in my own kitchen. It’s the kind of salad I make as part of my weekly meal prep because it holds up so well in the fridge. 

One bite and I think you’ll agree, let’s make it together.

Kale and Apple Slaw Ingredients 

You only need a handful of produce and a few basic pantry staples to make this fresh kale apple coleslaw. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing on ingredients and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Dressing

It is no secret that the dressing is the most important part of any kale salad, as sturdy kale leaves can use a ton of help when it comes to flavoring. I decided to use my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette as it offers the perfect balance of sweet and tangy flavors that complements the rest of the ingredients.

Below are a couple of notes from my recipe testing:

Maple syrup: I love the caramel-like sweetness it brings with the Dijon. For a lighter, citrusy twist, swap it with orange juice. Honey also works if you prefer a richer sweetness. I tested this slaw with all three, and while each works, they give the salad a slightly different character.

Apple cider vinegar: A key ingredient. It adds acidity to the dressing and also ties the apples into the overall flavor. If you don’t have it, red wine vinegar works too, but the taste is a little sharper.

For The Slaw

Apple: Crisp, firm apples hold up best. Fuji, Pink Lady, and Honeycrisp are my top picks, though tart Granny Smith is also great. Whatever you choose, slice or cube them just before serving to avoid browning.

Kale: I usually go with curly kale, but lacinato kale (aka Tuscan kale) works just as well. Each type has a different flavor and texture. If you’re not sure which to use, my Types of Kale guide can help you decide.

Seeds and nuts: I often use sunflower seeds, especially when I want to keep the recipe nut-free. When I do use nuts, I prefer raw almonds, pecans, or walnuts. Their mild taste lets the kale and apples stand out.

Cabbage: Red cabbage adds color and a subtle earthy note, but green cabbage works if that’s what you have. The thinner you slice it, the better it absorbs the dressing. I usually shred it with this insert I keep in my food processor, which I’ve found safer and quicker than a traditional mandoline. If you’re pressed for time, a bagged coleslaw mix is a fine shortcut.

Red Onion: Even though red onion has a stronger taste, I like using it here because it stands up well against hearty kale and crisp cabbage. If you prefer something milder, green onions are a good alternative.

How to Make Kale Apple Slaw

One of my favorite things about this kale apple salad, besides how fresh and crunchy it is, is how easily it fits into any meal. It lasts for days in the fridge and pairs with just about anything. Here’s how I put it together:

Step 1 – Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper. 

Then, add the sliced red onion to the dressing mixture and let it steep in the mixture while you prepare the rest of the ingredients. The vinegar takes away the sharp edge of raw onion, making it softer and slightly sweeter.

person showing how to make maple dijon vinaigrette

Step 2 – Prepare the salad: In a large mixing bowl, add the shredded kale, shredded carrots, and sliced red cabbage. Drizzle with the dressing and red onion, then use your hands to lightly massage the kale to break down the tougher parts of the leaves, making them more tender, less bitter, and better at soaking up the dressing. 

Pro Tip: Massaging kale might seem like an unusual practice, but I believe it is the secret to making kale tender, which is a common complaint among many people. Once massaged, it transforms into something much softer and easier to enjoy.

Person showing how to make kale apple slaw with step by step photos.

Step 3 – Serve: Top it off with the sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Toss the mixture one more time to evenly distribute the toppings, and serve immediately for the best crunch and freshest flavor.

Tropical smoothie kale apple slaw recipe in a bowl.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

This easy slaw recipe is meal-prep friendly, holding up beautifully in the fridge for days, so you can enjoy a crisp side dish all week long. Here are the best ways to ensure it stays fresh:

Make ahead: The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette can be prepared up to 2 days in advance and stored in a mason jar in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, simply toss it with the kale, cabbage, and carrots, then add the apples just before serving. Assembly takes only about 5 minutes.

Storage: Once assembled, the slaw will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. For the best texture and color, slice the apples right before eating to prevent browning.

Kale and Apple Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side

What to Serve with Apple Kale Slaw

This kale and apple slaw is one of those salads that just works with almost anything. It’s crisp, colorful, and adds a fresh bite that makes any meal feel a little brighter. Here are a few of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • Pair it with grains: For a more filling meal, consider adding a cooked grain like quinoa, bulgur wheat, or wild rice. They will soak up the maple dijon dressing and turn it into a quick lunch you can grab from the fridge.
  • With turkey: If you need a light but satisfying dinner in under an hour, pair this slaw with my Turkey Tenderloin. The turkey is juicy, tender, and quick to cook, so you can have a balanced meal even on a weeknight. 
  • With chicken: My Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast is one of my favorite proteins to serve on top. The crispy skin and juicy meat add just enough richness.
  • With meatloaf: Serve the slaw with my Turkey Meatloaf to lighten up a classic comfort food dinner. The fresh crunch balances the comfort of the meatloaf without feeling heavy.

Expert Tips

While the recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, here are a few pro tips for making the best kale apple coleslaw:

  • Using red onion: Raw red onion can be sharp, even when thinly sliced. I like to soak it in water or massage it with salt to mellow the bite. In this recipe, I let it sit in the dressing instead, which softens the flavor while adding depth. If you enjoy raw onion as-is, you can skip this step.
  • Slice everything thinly: Large pieces of kale are tough to chew. Removing the stems and slicing the leaves into thin ribbons helps them absorb the dressing, making the salad easier to eat. 
  • Massage the kale: This is the step that turns tough kale into something tender and delicious. A quick massage not only softens the leaves but also helps the dressing cling to every bite. 
  • Blanch for a milder taste: If you find kale too bitter, you can blanch it. Just boil for a minute or two, then plunge into ice water. This quick step softens the leaves and tones down their bitterness.
  • Optional Add-Ins: You can easily make this salad your own with a few simple additions or swaps. Try dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds instead of apples for a sweet-tart twist, or add a handful of shaved parmesan to bring a savory, umami note that makes it even more delicious.

FAQs

What part of the kale do you cut off?

Remove the tough center stem (also called the rib) that runs down the middle of each leaf. It’s hard and chewy when raw, so strip the leafy greens away and chop them into bite-sized pieces for the best texture.

How can I make the kale less bitter?

The best way to reduce kale’s bitterness is to massage it with the dressing for 2-3 minutes to soften the leaves. This breaks down the tough fibers and makes the kale more tender and easier to chew. If you’re sensitive to bitterness, blanch the kale for 1-2 minutes before adding it to the salad.

How can I tell if I’m choosing good kale?

Look for kale with firm, crisp leaves that have a rich green color. Skip any that are starting to yellow, feel limp, or have wilted spots.

What’s the best apple to use in kale apple coleslaw?

Firm, crisp apples such as Honeycrisp, Fuji, Pink Lady, or Granny Smith work best.

Can I use a different dressing to make this kale and apple slaw recipe?

Yes. For a lighter, more citrusy flavor, try it with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. For a creamy variation, use my Yogurt Salad Dressing.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Like:

If this recipe convinced you to give kale a chance, I am confident that you’ll be looking for more. So, here are a few other fresh kale salad recipes that I know you’ll enjoy:

  • If you’re in the mood for something cozy and seasonal, my Fall Harvest Salad is packed with all the fall flavors we love and is drizzled with a sweet dressing that ties it all together.
  • For a crunchy, make-ahead option, my Brussels Sprout Kale Salad includes shaved Brussels sprouts and kale with a bright vinaigrette.
  • And when you’re craving something simple and satisfying, my Kale and Avocado Salad comes together in minutes with a sweet-sour dressing you’ll want to drizzle on everything.
Kale Apple Carrot Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side
Print

Kale Apple Slaw Recipe

15 minute Kale Apple Slaw recipe that is perfect for a satisfying and filling meal. Also gluten free and vegan, you can make a batch as a part of your weekly meal prep and enjoy it throughout the week.
Course Salad
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 407kcal

Ingredients

For The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ small red onion sliced thinly

For The Kale Apple Slaw

  • 6 cups curly kale (1 bunch destemmed and cut into ribbons)
  • 2 carrots shredded
  • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
  • 1 apple sliced thinly
  • 1 cup sunflower seeds or any other nuts

Instructions

  • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together maple syrup, dijon mustard, garlic, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt and pepper in a small bowl or in a mason jar. Add in the sliced red onion and let it steep in it as you work on the rest of the ingredients.
    A collage of images showing the making of the dressing.
  • To make the Apple Kale Slaw: Place kale, shredded carrots and sliced red cabbage in a bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing. Using clean hands, give them a light massage making sure to distribute the dressing evenly throughout the salad. As you massage, the tough kale leaves will soften.
    Person showing how to massage kale for the slaw.
  • Top it off with sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Give it a toss and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7 to 8 cups of salad and is ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Steep the red onion: This is an optional step but letting your red onion slices soak in the dressing will give them a great texture and make them less bitter and overpowering.
  • Slice everything thinly: To make sure every bite of this recipe bursts with flavor, make sure you thinly slice all of your ingredients. Small pieces make it easier for your veggies to soak up the tangy dressing.
  • Massage the kale: Though it may seem like an odd step, massaging the kale is crucial to giving your leaves the perfect, tender texture. The massaging process infuses the kale with the acidic dressing, which helps break down the parts of fresh kale that are hard to digest.
  • Storage: Once prepared, kale and apple coleslaw will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Be sure to store it in an airtight container in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 407kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Sodium: 381mg | Potassium: 585mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 8535IU | Vitamin C: 48mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/feed/ 2
Turkish Shepherd Salad https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83027 What is Shepherd Salad? If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would…]]>

What is Shepherd Salad?

If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would probably top the list. 

The name may sound a little unusual, but it comes from humble origins. In the countryside of Turkey, shepherds carried simple, inexpensive ingredients like tomatoes, cucumbers, onions, and peppers. Out in the fields, they would quickly chop everything and dress it with olive oil and lemon juice for a fresh, no-cook meal.

Shepherd salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

Because these were the kinds of ingredients that were affordable and easy to find, Shepherd Salad has always been considered a simple, everyday dish rather than a luxury.

Today, Çoban Salatası remains a staple across Turkey and the Eastern Mediterranean. While it shares some similarities with Greek Salad, Shepherd Salad does not usually include cheese or olives, keeping it lighter and more refreshing. 

I left Turkey over 20 years ago, but to this day, I still make this salad almost daily when summer produce is at its peak. It’s one of those recipes that instantly brings me back home.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need 

You’ll only need a handful of fresh vegetables and pantry staples to make this easy summer salad. You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my experience and from how it is traditionally made in Turkey:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Tomatoes: Use the ripest, juiciest tomatoes you can find. Heirloom, Roma, cherry, or even steak tomatoes all work well.

Cucumbers: The authentic Turkish shepherd salad recipe uses Persian cucumbers, which are crunchy and with fewer seeds compared to English cucumbers. However, both types can be used in this recipe. If your cucumbers are freshly picked, it is not necessary to peel them, but I recommend tasting them, as older cucumbers may have bitter skin.

Scallions: I opted for scallions (also known as green onions) for their mild flavor, but finely chopped red onion or white onion can be used if you prefer a sharper bite. If you’re using green onions, you can use both the white parts and the green parts.

Green peppers: Traditionally, this salad is made with a Turkish pepper called sivri biber, a long, slender pepper that can range from mild to hot. Since I can’t find it here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. For a milder option, a green bell pepper works as well.

Lemon juice: For the best taste, use freshly squeezed lemon juice, but in a pinch, bottled juice would also work. You can also swap it with white wine vinegar, apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar for a slightly different tang.

Olive oil: I recommend using a mild-flavored extra virgin olive oil.

Sumac powder: Sumac is usually available in the Middle Eastern or Mediterranean section of most grocery stores, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. I often buy mine online, and if you are new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul Sumac Spice.

Just be sure to check the best-by date, as sumac has a shorter shelf life than many other spices (usually around 6 months).

Fresh herbs: I use fresh flat-leaf parsley in this recipe, but you can easily switch it up with whatever herbs you have on hand. In Turkey, it is very common to add fresh mint, fresh dill, or even a mix of the two.

Optional Add-Ins (Modern Variations):

The traditional Shepherd’s Salad is made with just the basics, but you can easily make it your own with a few optional add-ins. Some of my favorites are:

Olives: A handful of olives is a delicious way to make this salad more substantial and filling. In Turkey, we often use briny, firm varieties like Gemlik olives, but Kalamata and black olives work as well. Any olives you enjoy, even simple green olives, will do the trick.

Feta cheese: For the best taste and creamy texture, choose a good-quality feta made from sheep’s or cow’s milk and stored in brine. 

Dried mint: In some parts of Turkey, a small pinch of dried mint is sprinkled over the salad for more of an earthy flavor. It is not used in every version, but it is a traditional touch that pairs well with the sumac.

Urfa Chile or Aleppo Pepper: For a little heat, you can also sprinkle in some Urfa Chile pepper, Aleppo pepper, or any red pepper flakes you have on hand. For the most authentic result, aim for a variety that isn’t too spicy so the fresh flavors of the salad can really shine.

How to Make Turkish Shepherd Salad (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Shepherd’s Salad couldn’t be simpler. You don’t need any special equipment; just a sharp knife, a cutting board, and a bowl. Here’s how to prepare it:

A collage of images showing the assembling of shepherd's salad.

Step 1 – Chop the vegetables: One of the hallmarks of this salad is that everything is cut into small, even pieces. This way, every bite has a little bit of everything. Dice the tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and peppers, then transfer them to a large bowl.

Step 2 – Add the dressing: Drizzle the vegetables with lemon juice and olive oil. Sprinkle with sumac, salt, and black pepper.

A collage of images showing the mixing of Turkish tomato and cucumber salad.

Step 3 – Finish with herbs: Add the chopped parsley on top. Using salad tongs (or clean hands), gently toss until the vegetables are evenly coated. Tossing gently is key, as it helps keep the tomatoes from getting mushy.

Step 4 – Serve: Enjoy right away while the vegetables are crisp and fresh. Shepherd’s Salad is best served immediately, since the salt and lemon juice draw water out of the vegetables, and the salad can become watery if it sits too long.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: You can chop the vegetables a few hours in advance and store them covered in the refrigerator. For the best texture, wait to add the dressing until just before serving to keep the vegetables crisp and prevent too much liquid from collecting in the bowl.

Storing Leftovers: Place any leftovers in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 2 days. Keep in mind that the vegetables will naturally release some liquid as they sit, which will make the salad softer the next day. If that happens, just give it a quick toss and, if needed, add a squeeze of fresh lemon juice to brighten it back up.

Freezing: Freezing is not recommended since the vegetables lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the freshest taste and crunch, enjoy this salad right away.

Expert Tips:

While Shepherd’s Salad is simple to make, a few small details can take it from good to truly authentic. Here are my best tips:

  • Use fresh ingredients: This salad depends on peak-season produce. Ripe, juicy tomatoes and crisp cucumbers make all the difference. If your vegetables aren’t in season, sprinkle them with a pinch of salt and let them sit for a few minutes to bring out their natural juices.
  • Finely chop the vegetables: The traditional way in Turkey is to cut everything into small, even pieces. This will give you a mix of everything in each bite, and it will also ensure the lemon and olive oil coat everything evenly.
  • Season just before serving: Salt and lemon juice draw liquid out of the vegetables, especially tomatoes. So to keep the salad crisp, add the dressing and seasonings right before you bring it to the table.
  • Mix gently: Toss the salad lightly with your hands or salad tongs so the tomatoes don’t break down and become mushy.
  • Keep it chilled: Shepherd’s Salad is especially refreshing when served slightly cold. If you prep the vegetables ahead, store them in the fridge and dress just before serving.

Delicious Ways to Serve Turkish Shepherd Salad:

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish tomato and cucumber salad. While you can enjoy it with nearly any meal, here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish shepherd salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Turkish Shepherd Salad Recipe

An authentic Turkish Shepherd Salad (Çoban Salatası) made with juicy tomatoes, crisp cucumbers, peppers, onions, and parsley. Light, refreshing, and ready in just 15 minutes.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 119kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium-sized tomatoes diced into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 3 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick
  • 2 scallions both green and white parts, thinly sliced
  • 2 green peppers Aneheim peppers, jalapenos, or serrano peppers – seeds removed and sliced thinly
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon sumac
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Place tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and green peppers in a large bowl or a large platter.
    Side by side images showing the ingredients of Turkish shepherd's salad.
  • Drizzle it with lemon juice, olive oil, and season with salt, pepper, and sumac.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and toss to combine.
    Side by side photos showing the making of coban salad.
  • Serve it right away.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 cups of salad (depending on the size of your vegetables), and it is ideal for 4 (large) servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge for up to 2 days. It is normal for the vegetables to release their juices as they sit. Just give it a stir before serving.
  • Optional add-ins: As I was writing this recipe, I wanted to stay true to the traditional recipe. However, some modern-day versions of this recipe add other ingredients like a handful of crumbled feta cheese, chopped black olives, and a sprinkle of red pepper flakes (or Urfa chile if you can get your hands on.) All of these would be great addition to the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 119kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 247mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 748IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

What’s the difference between Turkish Shepherd Salad and Greek Salad?

Both salads feature tomatoes and cucumbers as their base, but they are prepared and served differently. In Turkish Shepherd Salad, the vegetables are finely chopped so every bite has a mix of everything. It’s dressed simply with olive oil, lemon juice, and sometimes a sprinkle of sumac, and traditionally does not include cheese or olives (though you can add them if you like).

Greek Salad (Horiatiki), on the other hand, is made with larger chunks of vegetables and usually includes feta cheese, olives, and oregano, giving it a heartier and more briny flavor.

Can I add cheese to Turkish Shepherd Salad?

While it is not traditional, you can sprinkle it with a handful of crumbled feta cheese.

What does Çoban mean in Turkish?

Çoban, pronounced as Chough-bahn, means Shepherd.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

Turkish cuisine is known for similar, easy-to-make salads like this one that you can make during the peak tomato season. A few of my favorites are:

  • Summer tomatoes mixed in with white beans and red onions, Piyaz (Turkish White Bean Salad) is yet another simple salad 
  • At every kebab restaurant in Turkey, you’ll find a side of ezme, and my version shows you how to make this authentic “Turkish salsa” at home with just a few simple ingredients.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/feed/ 0
Grilled Flank Steak Salad https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/#respond Tue, 12 Aug 2025 20:16:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82744 During the summer months, I try to avoid turning on the stove or oven. If I can make it on…]]>

During the summer months, I try to avoid turning on the stove or oven. If I can make it on the grill, that is where you will find me, especially when peak summer produce is at its best. This marinated flank steak salad is the perfect way to celebrate the season in one big fresh bowl. 

Grilled marinated flank steak salad from the top view.

For years, I grilled flank steak with just salt and pepper, but lately, I have been marinating it for a few hours, which really amps up the flavor. The rest is simple: toss in whatever summer produce you have on hand, such as tomatoes, corn, or radishes, and make it your own. But really, take my recipe as a place to start and make it your own. 

It is a fantastic summer salad recipe you will want to make again and again.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes you need to bring this grilled steak salad to life: 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Flank Steak: 

I usually use about 1½ pounds of flank steak. When buying flank steak to use in this salad, ask your butcher to give you a piece that is well marbled for the best flavor. 

You can certainly keep it simple with a little salt, pepper, and olive oil, but I opted to use my Flank Steak Marinade, which only takes about an hour to work its magic. 

Salad Dressing: 

I’m using my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette for this recipe because it pairs beautifully with the grilled steak and vegetables. If you’re in the mood for something lighter, my Lemon Vinaigrette is a great option too. You can even make the dressing a day ahead and keep it in the fridge until you’re ready to serve.

For the Salad:

Lettuce: I like using romaine for the crunch, but any salad greens you have on hand will work. Arugula or a simple spring mix are great options, too. Just make sure they’re thoroughly washed, dried, and chopped into bite-sized pieces. 

Corn: I grill my corn on the cob right before grilling the flank steak, but any corn, whether it is thawed frozen corn or drained and rinsed canned corn, would work in this recipe.

Tomatoes: I like using cherry tomatoes, but any tomato will work. Roma, heirloom, or any ripe summer tomato is a good option. If you’re using cherry tomatoes, slice them in half or into quarters if they’re too big. For other tomatoes, cut them into bite-sized pieces so they’re easy to mix into the salad.

Radishes:  I use regular red radishes, but any variety works. Just slice them thinly so the acid in the dressing can cut through their bitterness and give them a lightly pickled taste.

Scallions: I opted for thinly sliced green onions (including both the white and green parts) for their milder flavor. But if you’re after something with more bite, thinly sliced red onions are a great option.

Avocado: Choose a ripe avocado. I recommend adding it just before serving so it stays fresh and does not turn brown. You can slice or cube it depending on your preference.

Cheese: I used fresh mozzarella for its mild flavors. If you can get your hands on them, fresh mozzarella pearls are ideal, but you can also buy a whole mozzarella and cut it into bite-sized cubes. 

Alternatively, for a bolder cheese option, crumbled goat cheese or blue cheese can also be used.

How To Make Grilled Flank Steak Salad?

This marinated flank steak salad recipe consists of two main parts: first, we marinate the flank steak, then we grill it and assemble the salad. I usually marinate the steak the night before so it’s ready to go, making this a perfect weeknight summer dinner. 

Below are the step-by-step instructions, along with helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Person making a flank steak salad and adding it into a bowl with the steak.

Step 1 – Make the Marinade: In a mixing bowl, combine all the marinade ingredients and whisk until smooth. I like to start with the wet ingredients first, then add the seasonings so everything blends evenly. Place the flank steak in a shallow glass dish or a resealable plastic bag. 

Pour the marinade over the surface, ensuring it’s evenly coated, then gently press or massage it in to allow the marinade to soak in. Cover and let it rest for at least 1 hour, or refrigerate up to overnight. Avoid marinating for more than 24 hours, as the acidity can break the meat down quite a bit and affect the texture.

Person making salad dressing and grilling the meat.

Step 2 – Make the Salad Dressing: In a small bowl, combine the balsamic vinegar, lemon juice, minced garlic, kosher salt, and pepper. Whisk to combine. Then, while whisking, slowly drizzle in the extra virgin olive oil until the dressing looks smooth and emulsified. Doing so helps the oil and vinegar come together without separating too quickly.

During my recipe testing, I’ve found that using a combination of balsamic vinegar and lemon juice gives the dressing a nice balance of depth and brightness, complementing the balsamic flavors in the steak marinade.

Step 3 – Grill the Steak: Preheat your grill to 500°F. High heat is key here because it sears the steak, creating those beautiful grill marks. Scrape the grates clean to remove any leftover bits so the meat can get even contact with the heat, then coat them generously with olive oil. Place the steak directly on the grill and cook for about 4 to 5 minutes per side for medium-rare. Use an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link) to check doneness and avoid overcooking, especially with lean cuts like flank steak.

If you’re not sure what temperature to aim for, here’s a quick guide to help you cook your steak just the way you like it:

  • Medium-rare: 130 to 135°F (3 to 4 minutes per side)
  • Medium: 140 to 145°F (4 to 5 minutes per side)
  • Medium-well: 150 to 155°F (5 to 6 minutes per side)

I usually aim for medium-rare to keep the steak juicy and tender. Going much past medium can cause it to dry out.

Step 4 – Rest the Steak: Transfer the steak to a platter and cover with foil. Let it rest for at least 10 minutes while you prepare the salad. This allows the juices to redistribute so they stay in the meat when sliced, keeping every bite juicy and tender.

A collage of images showing the dressing of the salad and the slicing of the grilled steak.

Step 5 – Assemble the Salad: In a large salad bowl, combine the chopped romaine lettuce, grilled corn, cherry tomatoes, thinly sliced radishes, thinly sliced green onions, avocado (sliced or cubed), and cubed mozzarella. 

That being said, if you are assembling this salad a few hours in advance, it is best to add the avocado at the last minute to prevent it from browning. The same goes for the dressing; it is best to drizzle it right before serving to keep the salad crispy and fresh.

Taste and adjust the seasoning as needed. Sometimes all it needs is a pinch of salt or a touch more acidity to bring everything together.

Step 6 – Slice the Steak: Slice the steak thinly (about ½ inch thick) against the grain. This means cutting across the natural lines you see running through the meat. Those lines are muscle fibers, and cutting across them makes each bite softer and easier to chew. 

The steak salad on a large plate from the top view.

Step 7 – Arrange and serve: Arrange the meat on top of the salad and serve while still warm.

Expert Tips for the Best Results

  • Plan ahead for grilled corn: If you’re planning to grill your corn, be prepared to set aside a bit more time, as it takes longer to grill corn than flank steak. Corn usually needs 10-15 minutes on the grill (depending on size), while flank steak takes about 5-7 minutes. I recommend starting with the corn first, so everything finishes around the same time.
  • Dressing and greens: The beauty of this salad is that it can be made with whatever salad greens you have on hand. I use romaine lettuce because I find that it gives a nice bite and crunch to the overall salad. It is also able to withstand the salad dressing for a longer time. 
    If you choose to use more delicate salad greens like arugula or spring mix, it is best to drizzle the salad with the dressing right before serving to prevent soggy greens.
  • Avocado: Add avocado just before serving to keep it fresh and prevent it from browning.
  • Best Timing for Serving: I recommend making the salad (without the dressing) while the steak is resting. Dress the salad, give it a quick toss, and then slice the steak and place it right on top so it’s ready to serve.

How to Store Leftovers?

Storage: I always recommend storing the steak separately from the salad because once the greens sit with the dressing, they start to get soggy pretty quickly. 

If you know you’ll have leftovers, let everything come to room temperature first, then place the steak and the salad in separate airtight containers before popping them in the fridge. Both will keep well for up to 3 days.

Reheating (optional): You can enjoy this straight from the fridge, but if you’d rather have it warm, just reheat the steak on its own before adding it back to the salad. Right before serving, give the salad a good toss to redistribute everything, and if needed, add a pinch more seasoning since the juices tend to settle at the bottom and the greens can lose a bit of their seasoning as they sit.

FAQs

Can I use a different cut of steak?

Yes. Skirt steak is the closest substitute and works really well with this marinade. Sirloin is another great option if you prefer something a little thicker and more tender. Just keep in mind that cooking times will vary depending on the cut and thickness, so use an instant-read thermometer to get it just right.

Can I make this salad ahead of time?

You can prepare the components ahead of time, such as making the dressing and cooking the steak. I recommend storing everything separately and assembling the salad just before serving so the greens stay crisp and fresh.

What if I don’t have a grill for the steak?

You can cook flank steak in a hot cast-iron skillet on the stovetop or under the broiler in your oven. For the stovetop, sear it in a lightly oiled skillet for 3-5 minutes per side for medium-rare. For the oven, broil it on a rack set over a baking sheet for about 5-6 minutes per side, depending on your preferred doneness. Always let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing against the grain.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Flank Steak Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you’re a fan of this grilled flank steak salad, you’ll want to try these other flank steak recipes:

  • Switch up your usual taco night with my Flank Steak Tacos, pairing them with your favorite toppings and enjoying them on warm tortillas.
  • For a satisfying and comforting meal, my Chimichurri Steak Sandwich has juicy grilled steak with fresh chimichurri on soft bread for a lunch or dinner you’ll want to make on repeat.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled flank steak salad with utensils on the side.
Print

Grilled Flank Steak Salad Recipe

This grilled flank steak salad is packed with tender marinated steak, crisp romaine, sweet grilled corn, creamy avocado, and fresh mozzarella. Tossed in a tangy balsamic dressing, it's a fresh, meal-worthy summer salad perfect for weeknights or backyard gatherings.
Course Dinner, Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinating Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 551kcal

Ingredients

For the flank steak marinade:

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more to oil the grill grates
  • cup soy sauce
  • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs flank steak

For The Salad Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 garlic clove peeled and minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

For The Salad:

  • 2 heads romaine lettuce rinsed, dried, and roughly chopped (about 6 cups)
  • 2 cups corn kernels grilled, or frozen, and thawed or canned and rinsed
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 3 small radishes sliced thinly
  • 3 scallions chopped (both white and green parts)
  • 1 ripe avocado sliced
  • 1 cup fresh mozzarella cheese cubed or crumbled goat cheese or blue cheese

Instructions

  • To make the marinade, grab a large enough container that can accommodate your flank steak and place ¼ cup of olive oil, ⅓ cup of soy sauce, ¼ cup of apple cider vinegar, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice, 2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon of honey, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper in it. Whisk until smooth.
    Flank steak marinade being poured into a bowl.
  • Cover and let it marinate in the fridge for at least an hour or overnight (no more than 24 hours.)
  • While the meat is marinating, make the salad dressing. In a small bowl, place 3 tablespoons of balsamic vinegar, 2 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, 1 clove garlic, peeled and minced, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and 1/2 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper. Give it a whisk. While still whisking, slowly add the 1/4 cup of extra-virgin olive oil. Whisk until fully incorporated and smooth. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the dressing being made and the meat grilled.
  • To grill the steak, preheat a gas grill to 500 degrees °F. Scrape the grill grates and coat them generously with the oil.
  • Place the flank steak on the grill and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side for rare (internal temperature is 130 to 135 °F), 4-5 minutes on each side for medium (internal temperature is 136 to 145 °F), or 5-6 minutes on each side for medium-well (internal temperature is 146 to 155 °F).
  • When it reaches your desired doneness, transfer the grilled flank steak to a platter and cover it with foil. Let it rest while you prepare the salad.
  • To make the salad, place 6 cups of roughly chopped romaine lettuce, 2 cups of corn, 1 cup of chopped cherry tomatoes, 3 small sliced radishes, 3 thinly sliced green onions, 1 sliced avocado, and a cup of mozzarella pearls in a large salad bowl.
    Person adding the dressing over the salad and the steak is sliced.
  • Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss to ensure that all of the ingredients are evenly coated. Add more seasoning to taste and adjust as needed.
  • Slice the steak against the grain (1/2-inch thick slices) and layer it over the salad just before serving.
    Grilled marinated flank steak salad from the top view.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 10 cups of salad that is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: If you know you’ll have leftovers, I recommend storing the salad and the meat separately. If not, place the leftovers in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Corn: You can use any corn you have on hand. Frozen (and thawed), Canned (and drained) or grilled fresh corn would all work. If you are planning to grill your corn, I recommend setting aside a bit more time as it takes longer for corn to grill (compared to the flank steak).

Nutrition

Calories: 551kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Cholesterol: 83mg | Sodium: 1721mg | Potassium: 1358mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 18731IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 224mg | Iron: 6mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/feed/ 0
Watermelon Cucumber Salad with Feta and Mint https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/#comments Wed, 16 Jul 2025 21:24:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9222 Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in…]]>

Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in your back pocket. Summers get so hot that refreshing, no-cook dishes like this are a staple on every table.

Versions of this salad show up all across the Mediterranean, from Italy to Greece and beyond. The ingredients may vary slightly, but the combination of juicy watermelon, crisp cucumbers, briny feta cheese, and fresh herbs is a classic in many Mediterranean kitchens.

Every year, as soon as watermelons showed up at the market, my mom would start making it on repeat. With the sweet juiciness of watermelon, the crunch of cold cucumbers, and the creamy-salty bite of feta, it’s the kind of dish that doesn’t need much fuss to shine.

This is what summer tastes like where I’m from: easy, filling, and somehow always the first thing to disappear from the table.

Watermelon Feta Mint Salad Ingredients

This summer watermelon salad with feta and cucumber starts with an easy honey-lime dressing and a short list of ingredients. You can find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes to consider when shopping for this refreshing salad.

The ingredients for watermelon cucumber salad from the top view.

For the Salad Dressing:

I use my honey-lime dressing in this watermelon mint feta salad because the sweet, floral brightness of lime and honey pairs beautifully with the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Olive Oil: Choose a light and balanced extra virgin olive oil that isn’t overly peppery or grassy. You want something that supports the salad without overpowering the other ingredients. My current favorite single-source olive oil brand is Garcia de la Cruz (affiliate link.)

Lime Juice: Freshly squeezed lime juice is best, but bottled works in a pinch. If you don’t have lime, freshly squeezed lemon juice is an acceptable substitute. It will taste slightly different but still refreshing. You can also add a little lime zest (about ¼ teaspoon) to enhance the citrus notes. Just be sure to zest the lime before juicing it.

Honey: A floral local honey works especially well here, but maple syrup or agave are good alternatives if that’s what you have. Just know they’ll shift the flavor slightly.

For the Salad:

Watermelon: You’ll need 8 cups of watermelon cut into small 1-inch cubes. Seedless watermelon is the easiest option, but if you’re using regular watermelon, try cutting along the natural lines of the seeds to remove them more easily.

Cucumbers: Persian cucumbers offer great crunch, but regular English cucumbers also work well. I usually peel mine, especially if the skin tastes bitter, which can happen if the fruit has been sitting for a while. Removing the seeds is optional.

Fresh Herbs: The classic combo is watermelon, feta, and mint, but I like to add a little torn fresh basil for even more freshness. I don’t recommend using dried herbs here, as their flavors tend to overpower the dish.

Feta Cheese: I recommend buying a block of feta and crumbling it yourself. It’s creamier, fresher, and gives you more control over the size and texture of the crumbles. If you’re looking for alternatives, mild cheeses like goat cheese or queso fresco would also work well.

How to Make Watermelon Cucumber Salad (Easy Step-by-Step Instructions)

This watermelon and cucumber salad recipe comes together in just 15 minutes from start to finish. Here’s how I make it, step by step:

A collage of images shwowing the dressing for watermelon cucumber salad and the ingredients in a bowl.

Step 1- Make the Dressing: In a mason jar or small bowl, combine the olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey. Shake or whisk well until the mixture is fully emulsified and appears creamy and cohesive, with no oil separation. If you’d like to save even more time, you can make the dressing in advance and store it in an airtight jar in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Step 2 – Assemble the Salad: Grab a large bowl (one that gives you plenty of room to toss later without squishing anything) and add the diced watermelon, sliced cucumber, and fresh mint and basil. I recommend tearing the herbs by hand instead of chopping them with a knife. This helps preserve the delicate texture of the basil and prevents it from bruising or darkening.

A collage of images showing Mediterranean watermelon salad being drizzled with the dressing.

Step 3 – Add the Dressing: Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Gently toss with a large spoon (or two spoons, for an even gentler touch), taking care not to mash/bruise the watermelon cubes.

Step 4 – Finish with Feta: Top the salad with crumbled feta cheese just before serving. If you’d like, finish with a pinch of flaky sea salt to bring out the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Variations & Easy Add-Ins

Looking to truly make this watermelon cucumber mint salad recipe your own? Below are a few easy ways to switch things up using ingredients you may already have at home. These are optional, but they’re great if you want to build on the base recipe.

Change up the dressing: When I want a different twist, I swap the honey-lime dressing with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. Watermelon cucumber salad with balsamic vinaigrette is just as bright and tangy. You can also finish the salad with a drizzle of balsamic reduction right before serving for a deeper, more concentrated flavor.

Make it heartier: If you’re making this watermelon feta salad as part of your meal prep, stir in a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, bulgur, or wild rice to make it more filling. For a more traditional green salad base, add a handful of salad greens or baby spinach.

Add Summer tomatoes:  Juicy sliced summer tomatoes (I like heirlooms for salads like these) add another layer of flavor and make the salad even more seasonal and vibrant.

Add Onion: A little onion can bring a nice savory bite. You can use thinly sliced red onions, Pickled Red Onions, or Roasted Red Onions. For a milder option, chopped scallions work well too.

Make it vegan: To make this a vegan-friendly salad, simply omit the cheese or use a store-bought or homemade vegan feta. And don’t forget to swap the honey in the dressing for maple syrup or agave.

Foolproof Tips for the Best Watermelon Cucumber Salad

Making this watermelon feta cucumber salad is simple, but here are a few tips to help you get the best results on your first try:

Be gentle when mixing: Use a light hand when tossing the salad to keep the delicate ingredients from breaking apart. A large spoon or your hands work best for gently combining everything.

Choose a good watermelon: Look for a ripe watermelon that feels heavy for its size and has a large yellow field spot. That spot means it had time to ripen on the vine, which usually means better taste and juiciness.

Cut your watermelon and cucumber evenlyDice the watermelon into bite-sized pieces, or use a melon baller for a more decorative look. For the cucumber, peeling is optional, but I recommend slicing it thinly or cutting it into evenly sized cubes so you get both watermelon and cucumber in every bite.

Do not skip the salt: It may sound unusual, but adding a bit of salt to sweet watermelon makes a big difference. It brings out the natural sweetness and enhances the flavors of both the watermelon and cucumber.

Serve it chilled: This watermelon salad tastes best when it is nice and cold. I like to refrigerate the watermelon, cucumber, and feta before prepping so that everything is cool and refreshing when it is time to serve.

Assemble at the last minute: For the best texture, combine the watermelon, cucumber, herbs, and dressing just before serving. This keeps the watermelon and cucumber from getting soggy.

How to Make Ahead and Store?

If you are planning to make this watermelon cucumber feta salad recipe ahead of time, here are my best tips:

Make Ahead: To save valuable time when you’re ready to serve, you can prep the components ahead: Cut the watermelon, slice the cucumbers, crumble the feta, and make the dressing. Store each component in a separate container with a tight-fitting lid. Assemble your feta watermelon cucumber salad right before serving to ensure the best texture and prevent sogginess.

Storage: Leftover salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Simply drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and mix with a touch more dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

A close up of watermelon salad with feta and mint in a bowl.

What to Serve with Watermelon Cucumber Salad?

There are so many options when it comes to serving this watermelon salad with feta and mint. While I usually make it for lunch and serve it by itself, you can easily pair it with meats and vegetables for your summer meals. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Grilled Protein: Enjoy it as a light lunch or dinner, and serve it as a side dish to hearty grilled meat and seafood like Grilled Pork Chops, Shrimp Kebobs, Grilled Shrimp, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Shish Tawook, or Greek Yogurt Chicken.

Vegetarian Dinners: Keep the entire meal plant-forward and serve it as a wonderful addition to vegetarian main meals like Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant, Baked Eggplant Ziti or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.

Picnic & Potluck Dishes: This salad is always a hit at summer BBQs, picnics, and potlucks. Pair it with other crowd-pleasers like my No Mayo Coleslaw or Greek Yogurt Coleslaw, or Caper Potato Salad.

Quick Answers to Common Questions (FAQs)

Does watermelon and cucumber taste good together?

Yes, watermelon and cucumber are exceptionally delicious when paired together. The juicy watermelon is the perfect balance to the crisp cucumber.

What is watermelon salad made of?

Watermelon salad consists of watermelon, cucumber, fresh mint, fresh basil, and feta cheese tossed in a lime or balsamic vinegar-based dressing.

How do I pick a ripe watermelon quickly?

Look for one with a creamy yellow field spot, a dull rind (not shiny), and that feels heavy for its size. When you give it a gentle tap, it should sound deep and hollow.

What if I don’t have fresh mint?

Fresh mint adds a lot to this recipe, but if you do not have any on hand, you can simply leave it out. The salad will still be delicious, just a little less aromatic.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Savory Fruit Salads You Might Also Like:

If you love sweet and savory salads, you are in the right place. Here are a few other fruit-forward recipes you might want to try:

Watermelon and cucumber salad in a bowl with two spoons in the bowl.
Print

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Recipe

This Watermelon cucumber salad is an incredibly refreshing savory fruit salad that is flavored with honey lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect summer salad you can serve for lunch or take with you to summer potlucks, picnics, and BBQ parties.
Course Lunch
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 290kcal

Ingredients

For the Honey Lime Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons fresh lime juice from 1 lime
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon honey

For The Salad:

  • 8 cups fresh watermelon ~ 5 to 6 lbs – cut into 1-inch cubes (preferably seedless)
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick, or English cucumbers
  • 3 tablespoons fresh mint roughly torn
  • 2 tablespoons fresh basil roughly torn
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled (or goat cheese)
  • Pinch sea salt optional

Instructions

  • Mix olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey in a mason jar and shake vigorously. Set aside.
    Watermelon salad dressing and the ingredients in a bowl.
  • Place watermelon cubes, sliced cucumber, fresh mint, and basil in a large salad bowl.
  • Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a gentle toss being careful not to bruise or break the watermelon chunks.
  • Sprinkle the feta cheese on top, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary. Alternatively, you can sprinkle it with a pinch of sea salt. Serve cold.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8 cups of cucumber watermelon salad ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Serve it chilled. This salad is best when served cold. I like to keep each ingredient in the refrigerator before and after prepping. This way, all the salad is perfectly chill (and super refreshing) before serving.
  • Assemble at the last minute: Toss all the ingredients with the dressing just before serving. This keeps the integrity and texture of the watermelon and cucumber intact.
  • Be gentle while tossing: Use gentle hands to keep the delicate ingredients’ shape and structure.
  • Make Ahead: Prepare all the ingredients and store them in separate containers. You can also make the dressing 3 days in advance and keep it in a mason jar in the fridge. Toss it all together just before serving.
  • Storage: Leftover salad will keep fresh in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and toss with a touch more of the honey lime dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 290kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 365mg | Potassium: 434mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 2056IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/feed/ 6
Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/#comments Tue, 01 Jul 2025 16:52:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15923 What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce) You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would…]]>

What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce)

You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would be mine. 

At its core, tzatziki is a yogurt-based dip made with strained yogurt (also known as Greek yogurt), cucumber, garlic, lemon juice, and herbs (typically dill or mint).

Referred to by many names, such as Greek Tzatziki sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Cucumber Yogurt Sauce, it can be served as a dip, a sauce, or even as a dressing. 

It pairs well with just about anything, from meat to gyros, to Turkish kebabs, to grilled or roasted vegetables.

While many people in the U.S. know it as the white sauce that comes with a gyro, that version is often heavier, sometimes made with mayonnaise or sour cream, and doesn’t always include cucumber. 

My homemade tzatziki sauce recipe is different here. It’s the real thing. The kind of tzatziki you’ll find on tables in homes across Turkiye, Greece, and beyond.

Essential Ingredients for Authentic Tzatziki (And Why They Matter)

The good news is that this easy tzatziki recipe requires only a few simple ingredients and comes together in minutes. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful tips to keep in mind when shopping:

Tzatziki sauce ingredients from the top view with text on the image.

Full-fat Greek Yogurt (also known as Strained Yogurt): I think the best yogurt for tzatziki is a whole-milk, plain Greek yogurt. It yields a rich and creamy tzatziki dip, a main characteristic of this Mediterranean sauce.  If your container has any liquid sitting on top, be sure to strain that out before using.

You can also use plain, unsweetened yogurt or even low-fat or fat-free yogurt, but the texture will be a bit looser compared to Greek yogurt.

Fresh Cucumber: Either Persian or English cucumbers work well. I like to peel them first, as some cucumber skin can be bitter. Still, it is a personal preference.

I grate them using the large holes on a box grater and then drain them in a mesh sieve. It might seem like an extra step, but thoroughly draining the grated cucumber helps eliminate excess liquid, giving you the thick, creamy consistency that this cucumber tzatziki sauce is known for.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: The traditional version of this Mediterranean yogurt sauce calls for fresh, finely minced garlic. I usually add two cloves per 1 ½ cups of yogurt, but feel free to adjust the amount based on your preferences. 

If you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder is a fine substitute. Since it’s more concentrated, I recommend using about 1 teaspoon per 1 ½ cups of yogurt.

Fresh Herbs: I like using fresh dill, but fresh mint is another classic option. In Turkiye, it’s also common to use dried dill or mint if fresh isn’t available. That said, I think fresh herbs bring a brighter, more vibrant taste.

Fresh Lemon Juice: Just a squeeze is enough to brighten the flavors and balance the richness of the yogurt.

Kosher Salt and Black Pepper: You won’t need anything beyond basic seasoning here. Start with the amounts listed in the recipe and adjust to taste.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil (Optional): You won’t see olive oil listed in my recipe because my mom never used it. I find that thick, whole-milk yogurt gives the sauce all the richness it needs. However, if you’d like to add it, a tablespoon of olive oil per 1 ½ cups of yogurt is a good starting point.

How to Make Easy Homemade Tzatziki: A Step-by-Step Guide

Making a delicious tzatziki with yogurt, shredded cucumber, and lemon juice doesn’t require any special cooking techniques, so anyone can do it.

A collage of images showing how to strain grated cucumber and make the yogurt mixture.

Step 1 – Grate and drain the cucumber: Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the peeled cucumber and transfer it to a fine-mesh strainer. Press down with a spatula to release the excess moisture. I usually let it sit for a few minutes to help the juices drain completely.

Once drained, you should have about 1 cup of grated cucumber.

Alternatively, you can wrap the shredded cucumber in a clean tea towel and squeeze it by hand to remove as much liquid as possible.

Step 2 – Whisk the yogurt base: In a medium bowl, combine the Greek yogurt, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and black pepper.

Whisk until smooth and creamy. This is also a good time to give it a quick taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

A collage of photos showing how to make tzatziki from scratch.

Step 3 – Add cucumber and herbs: Fold in the drained cucumber and fresh dill or mint. Mix until everything is evenly combined.

Step 4 – Cover and chill:
You can serve it right away, but if you have the time, cover and let it rest in the fridge for at least 30 minutes. This allows the flavors to meld and deepen.

A bowl of tzatziki surrounded with vegetables.
Print

Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe

An easy tzatziki sauce recipe that you can make in minutes and serve with all your savory Mediterranean/Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 61kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 English Cucumber peeled (or 2 Persian cucumbers)
  • 1 ½ cups Whole Milk Greek Yogurt unsweetened and unflavored
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic peeled and minced finely
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • cup fresh dill or fresh mint

Instructions

  • Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the cucumber. Transfer it into a fine-mesh strainer and strain all of its juices, pressing it with a rubber spatula. Set aside.
    A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  • In a medium-size mixing bowl, whisk together yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper.
  • Using a spatula, fold in the cucumber and dill. Transfer to a bowl.
    Person making the tzatziki in a bowl.
  • If you have time, cover with plastic, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ¼ to 1 ½ cups of tzatziki sauce which is ideal for 4 servings as a condiment. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as written up to 2 days before serving. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. Be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
  • Storage: This sauce will stay fresh for about 3-4 days. Simply place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge. If you notice any liquid separation, just give your Tzatziki a good stir before serving.
  • A word on olive oil: My recipe relies on rich yogurt for creaminess and does not require adding any olive oil, unlike some other tzatziki recipes. However, for extra depth, drizzle 1 tbsp extra virgin olive oil on top before serving.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 61kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 31mg | Potassium: 245mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 381IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 105mg | Iron: 1mg

Expert Tips from a Lifelong Tzatziki Maker

This recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a few things I want to point out so you can end up with the best tzatziki on your first try:

  • Don’t skip draining the shredded cucumber: This is the single most important step when it comes to achieving that creamy texture tzatziki is known for. Yes, it’s an extra step, but it makes all the difference.
  • DIY Greek Yogurt: If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can strain plain yogurt at home. Just place a fine-mesh sieve over a bowl and line it with cheesecloth (a paper towel will also work in a pinch). Add the yogurt, cover it, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours. The longer it sits, the thicker it becomes.
    Since plain yogurt has more liquid, I recommend using about half a cup more than the recipe calls for to account for the liquid that will drain.
  • Avoid overmixing: Once you have folded in the cucumber and herbs, mix only until the ingredients are just combined. Overmixing can cause the cucumber to release more liquid, which may water down the sauce.
  • Do not skip the chilling: To me, the secret to the best tzatziki sauce is letting it rest in the fridge. This time allows the flavors (especially the garlic and fresh herbs) to develop and deepen. Even just 30 minutes makes a difference, but planning for an hour or two can yield even better results.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Make Ahead: You can make this Greek tzatziki sauce recipe a day or two ahead. Just be sure to transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge.

Storage: Leftovers will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Give it a good stir before serving, and if any liquid has collected on top, simply pour it off or drain it before mixing.

Delicious Ways to Serve Tzatziki Sauce in Your Daily Cooking

Images showing food that uses tzatziki.

I may or may not have been caught eating this Mediterranean classic with a spoon. All jokes aside, tzatziki is a staple for a reason. It pairs beautifully with just about any meat or vegetable dish that could use a cooling, creamy contrast. Here are a few of my favorite ways to use it:

Kabobs and Gyros: Simply drizzle it right on top! If you want to try something different, try drizzling this sauce over my Karniyarik recipe (aka Turkish Stuffed Eggplant), Greek Yogurt Chicken, Shish Taouk, or Baked Chicken Kabobs, Chicken Shawarma, or serve it with Turkish Kofte

Sauce for Burgers and Sandwiches: I love using it as a spread for Greek Lamb Burgers (pictured above) or my Chicken Pita Wraps. It adds a creamy contrast and brings everything together.

Vegetables and Vegetable Dishes: A dollop of tzatziki can turn simple roasted eggplant into a delicious appetizer. It’s also a great match for baked zucchini fritters, crispy falafel, or just about any veggie-forward dish you’d serve at a gathering.

With Salads: Tzatziki isn’t just a dip; it makes a fantastic, creamy addition to various salads. I particularly love a dollop alongside or even mixed into my easy Greek salad for an extra layer of freshness.

Grain Bowls: Drizzle it over shawarma chicken bowls (pictured above) or make it part of a DIY Cava bowl. It adds creaminess and brightens the rest of the toppings.

Part of a Meze Platter: Serve it in a bowl as a dip on a large platter along with cheese and crackers, olives, hummus, muhammara, pita bread (or pita chips), and fresh raw vegetables.

Tzatziki Sauce Variations & Substitutions:

  • Dairy-Free/Vegan Options: To make this vegan or dairy-free, use a neutral-flavored plant-based yogurt. I prefer unflavored cashew yogurt, but coconut or almond milk yogurt can also work. Just make sure it’s unsweetened and as thick as possible for the best consistency.
  • Herb Variations: You can easily make this creamy tzatziki sauce your own by switching up the herbs. Fresh dill and mint are classic options, but parsley or chives are also great alternatives. No fresh herbs on hand? You can leave them out and still have a delicious dip.
  • Making it Thinner (like Turkish Cacık): If you have ever been to Turkiye, you’ve probably had cacik, a thinner version of tzatziki. To achieve that texture, simply use plain yogurt instead of Greek yogurt, or stir in about ½ cup of cold water (or more, depending on your preference) until you reach the desired consistency.

FAQs:

How Do You Spell Tzatziki?

The phonetic spelling is /tsaˈtsiːki/. The word for this Greek yogurt cucumber sauce is spelled T-Z-A-T-Z-I-K-I. It is a loanword from Modern Greek, which actually comes from the Turkish word cacık, of unknown origin.

How Do You Pronounce Tzatziki?

So, how do you say Tzatziki? The correct way to pronounce Tzatziki is “tsah-see-key.” Think of the tsah part as how you say “pizza,” without the first two letters.

Can Tzatziki sauce be frozen?

Technically, you can freeze yogurt, but after thawing, it loses its creamy consistency. This is generally true for most savory yogurt-based dressings or sauces. Therefore, I wouldn’t recommend freezing Tzatziki sauce.

Can I use non-fat yogurt?

Yes, you can use any plain yogurt you like. However, I recommend sticking to Greek Yogurt as it is thicker than other yogurt types. The higher the fat content, the more delicious and creamy it would be, but non-fat or low-fat plain yogurt would still do the job.

Do I have to strain the juice of the cucumber?

The correct answer is yes. Some people even go as far as straining yogurt and cucumber in a colander lined with cheesecloth overnight in the fridge. I guess it is because they prefer a thicker consistency. However, in my opinion, the thickness of Tzatziki is a personal preference. If you like yours runny then no need to strain the juices and vice versa.

Do I have to peel the cucumber?

It is a personal preference. I prefer to peel mine as some cucumber skin can be bitter.

Can I substitute sour cream for yogurt?

I don’t usually recommend it, as the flavor and texture are quite different. Sour cream is richer and tangier than yogurt, and it has a higher fat content, which can make the sauce feel heavier than intended.

What can i substitute for greek yogurt in tzatziki sauce?

If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can use plain (unsweetened) yogurt to make tzatziki. Since it is not as thick as Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), I recommend straining its liquid before use. Simply place it in a fine-mesh strainer lined with cheesecloth and set it in a bowl.

Other Yogurt Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

  • My Yogurt Dill Sauce is bright, herby, and perfect for serving with salmon, baked potatoes, or simple roasted vegetables.
  • A drizzle of my Greek yogurt salad dressing instantly turns any salad greens into a refreshing, creamy side that goes with just about any meal.
  • A spoonful of my Yogurt Tahini Sauce adds a creamy, nutty layer to grain bowls, roasted veggies, or just about anything that needs a little something extra.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/feed/ 25
Texas Caviar Recipe (Cowboy Caviar) https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/ https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/#comments Wed, 25 Jun 2025 18:24:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22788 For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re…]]>

For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re like me and didn’t grow up eating it, you might agree that some versions can be overly sweet.

Then I came across Dorie Greenspan’s version in her cookbook Everyday Dorie (affiliate link) and decided to give it another shot. To my surprise, it was nothing like what I had tasted before. Her cowboy caviar dressing was perfectly tangy with just a touch of sweetness, balancing out the earthy beans in the best way.

Cowboy caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.

This recipe, sometimes called Texas Caviar, Cowboy Caviar, Cowboy Salad, or even Cowboy Bean Dip, is my take on her version, with a few minor tweaks.

Whatever name you use, it’s one of the easiest dishes to throw together, and it works as a dip, a salad, or a chunky salsa perfect with a side of tortilla chips.

Texas Caviar Ingredients

For a quick overview, find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. But for truly foolproof results, here are my top tips as you shop and prep:

The Dressing Ingredients:

Some versions of this recipe use bottled Italian dressing, but I find those to be overly oily and lacking in depth. What makes this Cowboy Caviar dip different is the homemade lime and olive oil dressing. It’s just enough to coat the beans and veggies without weighing them down, adding brightness and balance in every bite.

Ingredients for cowboy caviar's dressing.

Here are a couple of helpful ingredient notes as you make the dressing:

Lime zest and lime juice: My version of the Texas Caviar dressing uses both lime zest and fresh lime juice to bring out a bright, tangy flavor. Four tablespoons of lime juice might sound like a lot, but trust me, it’s just the right amount.

If you prefer a milder taste, you can use 2 tablespoons of red wine vinegar and reduce the lime juice to 2 tablespoons.

And just a quick tip: it’s always easier to zest the lime before squeezing it.

Spices: I use a small amount of ground cumin and sweet paprika, following Dorie’s recipe. I think they add a beautiful depth and a welcome punch. Still, if you’re not a fan of either spice, feel free to leave them out.

Sweetener: I almost always reach for natural sweeteners like honey or maple syrup, but granulated sugar works in a pinch if that’s what you have on hand.

Garlic: Whenever I make a salad dressing, I love using fresh garlic. I think the sharp bite and depth of flavor just can’t be replicated. But if you prefer something milder, you can substitute it with 1 teaspoon of garlic powder.

Salad Ingredients:

A photo showing what's in Texas caviar.

Beans: I use a combination of black beans and black-eyed peas in my version of this Cowboy Caviar salad. In my opinion, black-eyed peas are pretty much a must in any Texas Caviar dip recipe. You can swap red kidney beans or pinto beans in place of the black beans if you’d like, and you’ll still get the heart of the dish.

Canned beans help keep things quick and easy, but you can absolutely cook them from scratch if that’s your preference.

Just be sure to rinse and dry them well before assembling the salad to avoid extra liquid watering it down.

Corn: In the summer, I love using fresh shucked corn when it’s in season. But if you’re making this at another time of year, frozen (and thawed) or canned (rinsed and drained) corn works just as well.

Onion: I use a combination of finely chopped green onions and red onions because I love the distinct flavors each one adds. You get a mix of color, crunch, and both mild and sharp flavors. If you prefer a milder taste, you can leave out the red onion. Or if you want something with more bite, skip the green and just use red.

Peppers: Most Texas Caviar recipes use a combination of red bell peppers and jalapeño, and for good reason. Each one brings its own unique flavor. If you like a bit of heat, feel free to leave some of the jalapeño seeds in for a touch of spiciness.

Tomatoes: During the summer months, I love using colorful cherry tomatoes for this Texas Caviar dip. But really, any kind of tomato will work. Heirloom, beefsteak, or even regular Roma tomatoes are all good options. Just be sure to cut them into small, bite-sized pieces so they mix easily with the other ingredients.

Avocado: It is optional and not traditional, but I think a ripe avocado makes a great addition, especially if you’re planning to serve this as a dip with chips on the side. Just be sure to cut it into small cubes so it blends in nicely.

Fresh Herbs: I used a handful of finely chopped fresh cilantro leaves, but if you are not a fan, you can use fresh parsley instead.

How To Make Texas Caviar?

Making this recipe takes no more than 15-20 minutes and requires no special equipment. 

Step 1 – Make the Cowboy Caviar Dressing: 

Person making Texas caviar dressing.

In a mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, honey, and garlic until fully combined.

Or, if you prefer, add everything to a mason jar, put the lid on, and give it a good shake.

You can also make the dressing a day or two ahead of time to speed things up even more when you’re ready to assemble the dip.

Step 2 – Assemble the salad:

Cowboy caviar salad from the top view in a bowl.

In a large salad bowl, combine the drained and rinsed black beans and black-eyed peas with the corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeños, tomatoes, and chopped cilantro.

If you’re using avocado, I recommend adding it just before serving so it doesn’t brown.

Step 3 – Drizzle and Serve:

Images showing how to make Cowboy caviar.

Drizzle the dressing over the salad and gently toss to combine, being careful not to break up the beans too much.

This is also a good time to give it a taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

One of the best things about this Cowboy Salad recipe is that it can be made ahead of time (one or two days). In fact, I recommend it because the extra time allows the flavors to mingle and develop. Here’s how I do it:

  • To make ahead:
    Prepare the dressing and chop all the salad ingredients except the avocado. Toss everything together in a large bowl, drizzle with the dressing, cover tightly, and refrigerate. If you’re using avocado, add it just before serving to keep it from browning.
  • Storing leftovers:
    Transfer any leftover Cowboy Caviar to an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Before serving, give it a good stir and freshen it up with a squeeze of lime juice and a sprinkle of salt if needed.

Expert Tips for The Best Texas Caviar

While this recipe is pretty straightforward, below are a few helpful tips for the best results.

  • Let it rest: This step is optional, but I recommend letting the salad rest in the fridge for about an hour before serving. It gives the tangy lime juice dressing time to soak into the beans and veggies, bringing everything together.
  • Evenly cut vegetables: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is chopping the vegetables, but it’s worth taking your time. Aim to cut everything into similar-sized pieces so each bite feels balanced. Try to slice the tomatoes thinly and cut the peppers into small, bite-sized pieces, ideally smaller than the black-eyed peas.
  • Be gentle as you toss: When mixing the salad, go slowly and gently to avoid breaking the beans. This helps keep the texture nice and prevents everything from turning into mush. 

Cowboy Caviar Variations and Substitutions

Making this Cowboy Caviar dip your own is easy because, let’s face it, this simple recipe is endlessly customizable. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • Add more veggies: You can pack your Cowboy Caviar with even more fresh vegetables. Try thinly sliced cucumbers, chopped celery, or even finely diced radishes for extra crunch and color.
  • Add fruit: I’ve seen versions of this recipe made with sweet fruit like mango or pineapple. It might sound unexpected, but the sweetness pairs nicely with the tangy dressing, adding a refreshing twist, especially when served as a dip with chips.
  • Switch up the dressing: While my favorite part of this recipe is the tangy lime dressing, I sometimes change things up with my chili lime vinaigrette, which incorporates chili powder and adds a more Mexican-inspired twist.
  • Toss in grains: I love adding a cup of cooked quinoa, wild rice or farro to make it a filling salad especially if I am making this recipe as a part of my weekly meal prep.
  • Make it vegan: If you prefer a vegan version, just swap the honey for maple syrup or agave.

What To Serve with Texas Caviar?

It’s no secret that this recipe makes a great side dish or appetizer, whether you’re heading to a summer BBQ, a potluck, or packing lunch for work. But if you’d like to turn it into a full meal, you have plenty of options. Here are a few ideas:

  • Grilled Meats and seafood: Serve it alongside grilled chicken, shrimp, or salmon for a light and colorful plate. It’s a perfect match for summer cookouts or easy weeknight dinners.
  • With chips on the side: This Cowboy Salsa recipe makes a great appetizer when served with tortilla chips. I like using the scoopable kind, so you can get a little bit of everything in each bite.
  • With eggs: Scrambled eggs wrapped in a tortilla with a generous spoonful of Texas Caviar makes an excellent breakfast burrito. It adds freshness, texture, and just the right amount of zing to your morning meal.

FAQs

What is Texas Caviar?

Texas Caviar is a recipe originally created and served by Helen Corbitt, the culinary director of Neiman Marcus, in 1940s Dallas.

Made with a combination of canned or cooked beans (i.e. red, black, or pinto), black-eyed peas, peppers, tomatoes, garlic, and other extras like corn, avocado, mango, and various herbs and spices, since then it has stood the test of time and become a Southern classic.

Texas Caviar vs. Cowboy Caviar: Is There a Difference?

The dish was originally created in Texas, which is how it got the name “Texas Caviar.” Over time, people started calling it “Cowboy Caviar” as a fun, casual nickname.

How far in advance can you make cowboy caviar?

You can make Cowboy Caviar up to 2 days in advance. Just store it in an airtight container in the fridge, and it should still taste fresh and delicious. If you’re planning to include avocado, wait to add it until right before serving to keep it from browning.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Delicious Bean Salads You’ll Love

Fan of bean salads? Me too! Here are a few more that you might like:

  • My Corn and Black Bean Salad is yet another great alternative to a bean salad that you can serve with chips on the side.
  • What makes my Five Bean Salad recipe the best bean salad is the garlicky mustard dressing. Just like this cowboy caviar recipe, it uses a combination of canned beans and some lightly boiled fresh green beans.
  • If you have extra black eyed peas, then my Black Eyed Peas Salad is just as fresh and satisfying. Not to mention, it takes 15 minutes to make.
Texas caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.
Print

Texas Caviar Recipe

This Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar)loaded with black-eyed peas, corn, tomatoes, peppers, and tangy lime dressing makes the best salad, dip, or side dish. Ready in 30 minutes and can be made ahead.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 192kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon honey
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Caviar Dip:

  • 1 can black beans 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • 1 can black eyed peas 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • ½ cup corn kernels frozen (and thawed), canned (and drained) or fresh corn would all work
  • 3 scallions both white and green parts are chopped
  • cup red onion chopped finely or diced
  • 1 red bell peppers chopped (approx. 1/2 cup)
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes sliced thinly
  • ½ avocado ripe – cut into small cubes
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro rinsed and chopped

To Serve With (Optional)

  • Your favorite hot Sauce
  • Tortilla Chips

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, smoked paprika, salt, honey and garlic. Set it aside.
    Person making Texas caviar dressing with lime juice.
  • For the Texas Caviar dip (or salad): Place, black beans, black eyed peas, corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeno pepper, cherry tomatoes, avocado, and fresh cilantro in a bowl.
    The ingredients for Cowboy caviar in a bowl from the top view.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person drizzling the salad with dressing and mixing it.
  • If preferred, add in a few dashes of your favorite hot sauce and serve with tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5-6 cups of Cowboy caviar ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving and does not include the calories coming from (optional) tortilla chips.
  • Make ahead: You can make this recipe up to 2 days in advance. If you go in that direction, add the avocado right before serving to avoid browning.
  • Storage: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • If you want to go with more of the traditional Italian salad dressing route instead of the lime dressing I used, feel free to use my Italian salad dressing below: ¼ cups extra virgin olive oil
    2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    1 tablespoon freshly squeezed lemon juice
    1 clove of garlic, minced
    1 teaspoon dried basil
    1/4 teaspoon dried oregano
    ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper (optional)
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt (I use Diamond kosher salt)
    ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 192kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 326mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 982IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 31mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was originally published in March 2019. It has been updated with some additional information with no changes to the original recipe in July 2025.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/feed/ 44
Burrata Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/#comments Wed, 18 Jun 2025 22:05:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67454 Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a…]]>

Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata

Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a few key ingredients from the grocery store or farmer’s market. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Below are some helpful tips as you shop for this recipe’s ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Burrata cheese: Fresh burrata cheese is a soft Italian cheese with a delicate, creamy center, similar in taste and texture to fresh mozzarella. It’s usually sold submerged in water in a tub. Before using it in your salad, take it out of the fridge and let it come closer to room temperature to enhance its flavor and texture. 

Also, drain off any excess liquid before tearing it into pieces.

Tomatoes: I like to use a mix of large heirloom tomatoes and sweet cherry tomatoes. The juicy heirlooms bring a meaty, steak-like texture to the salad, while cherry tomatoes add a pop of sweetness. Feel free to use any variety you have on hand, including Roma, beefsteak, vine-ripened, or grape tomatoes.

To get the best flavor, keep your tomatoes on the counter (not in the fridge) and try to use them within a few days of buying them. For easy, clean slices, I recommend using a serrated knife.

Fresh basil leaves: To finish the salad, use whole basil leaves or tear them gently with your hands instead of cutting them with a knife, which can bruise their delicate leaves and release bitter flavors.

Balsamic vinegar: If your budget allows, look for a traditional, aged balsamic vinegar from Modena. Its deep sweetness and complex flavor will elevate the salad. However, you can absolutely use a more affordable condiment-style balsamic vinegar and it’ll still taste delicious!

Extra virgin olive oil: I prefer a single-origin extra virgin olive oil with mild, fruity notes for this recipe. It adds a lovely finishing touch and complements the creamy burrata perfectly.

Seasonings: Keep it simple with kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper. A final sprinkle of flaky salt adds a nice, salty crunch.

How to Make this Burrata Caprese Recipe?

The combination of burrata, tomato and basil is just as delicious here as a traditional caprese salad. The good news is that making it is quick and easy with only a few steps:

A collage of images showing how to make burrata Caprese recipe.

Step 1 – Prepare tomatoes: Slice the larger tomatoes using a serrated knife into ⅓-inch thick slices. If using cherry tomatoes, cut them in half (or you can quarter them as well). 

Grab a large serving platter and arrange the sliced tomatoes overlapping until it covers the bottom of the plate. 

Sprinkle it with salt to ensure they are properly seasoned.

Step 2 – Add burrata: Place burrata balls in the center of the serving platter. Alternatively, gently cut them into smaller pieces with a sharp paring knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes. Alternatively, you can carefully tear into small chunks by hand.

Step 3 – Season: Sprinkle the tomatoes and burrata with the remaining salt and black pepper. Finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil and balsamic vinegar ensuring that each slice of tomato gets a bit of oil and a bit of balsamic vinegar.

Garnish with torn basil leaves before serving.

How to Store Leftovers?

Leftover burrata caprese will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for 2–3 days. Keep in mind that the burrata’s creamy center will solidify a bit over time, so it won’t be quite as creamy on days two and three.

Before serving leftovers, drain off any excess liquid to prevent them from becoming soggy. To “revive” your burrata caprese, add a few fresh tomato slices and some fresh basil leaves, then drizzle with a little extra olive oil and balsamic vinegar. Finish with a sprinkle of flaky salt for a fresh, vibrant bite.

Expert Tips

  • Use peak season tomatoes for the ultimate flavor. While creamy burrata may seem like the star of the show, slightly ripe, juicy tomatoes are just as crucial for the most delicious dish. When shopping for tomatoes for this recipe, take a moment to ensure that they are not overly ripe and free of any bruises.
  • Season tomatoes liberally:  Don’t be shy about salting the tomatoes. Properly seasoning them draws out their natural juices and enhances their sweet, vibrant flavor.
  • Serve at room temperature: To achieve the perfect burrata “ooze”, bring it to room temperature before tearing and adding it to the salad. This way, it will be extra creamy with a soft and spreadable texture.
  • Presentation is key: This is a showstopping salad that will become the talk of the table. Be creative – assemble the tomatoes somewhat haphazardly and whimsical. Allow the burrata to shine in the center or scattered into pieces.
  • Resist the urge to overcomplicate it: This is a super simple tomato salad that truly shines when made with in-season, high-quality ingredients. Stick to the basics and let the fresh flavors speak for themselves. There is no need for extra bells and whistles!
  • Double the recipe or halve it for a small crowd: The recipe below serves four, but I could honestly eat the whole thing myself. Double or triple the recipe for a large party, or halve it when serving for one or two.

Variations

While the combination of basil, burrata, and tomatoes is quite simple and effective, you can take this recipe to the next level by changing it up a bit. Here are a few variations I’ve tried and recommend:

  • Use balsamic reduction instead of balsamic vinegar: Balsamic reduction (also known as sweet balsamic glaze) is reduced balsamic vinegar that is sticky and sweet, and can add just another level of flavor to this burrata caprese salad recipe. Simply drizzle your burrata salad with balsamic glaze at the very end (instead of the balsamic vinegar drizzle) for a robust and tangy finish.
  • Change up the Dressing: Take it up a notch with a simple basil dressing for caprese salad, like Basil Vinaigrette or go for Balsamic and Lemon Dressing.
  • Add avocado: Although unconventional, a ripe avocado adds another layer of creaminess and color to this tomato burrata salad. Simply slice a ripe avocado (or cut it in cubes) for an added layer of flavor and texture.
  • Add summer fruit: Add a handful of summer berries, such as sliced juicy strawberries or raspberries, or some ripe stone fruit like peaches and apricots for a burst of color and natural sweetness.

What to Serve With Caprese Burrata Salad

When you put this Caprese salad with burrata on the table, I think we can all agree that it will be the star of the show. Make it a part of your Memorial Day Menu, Labor Day Menu, or 4th of July celebrations! Here are some pairing and serving suggestions:

  • Crusty Bread: Serve it with warm crusty bread like French baguette or No Knead Olive Bread on the side for an appetizer that is guaranteed to impress.
  • Bruschetta: Slice a baguette, brush with olive oil and toast just before serving alongside the tomato caprese with fresh burrata, or make it a part of your Meat and Cheese Platter.
  • Grilled or Roasted Meats: Give it a nice boost of protein and serve it as a side dish with Marinated Shrimp Skewers, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Greek Yogurt Chicken or Shrimp Scampi.
  • Pasta: Go all-out Italian and serve it with a main dish, such as my Garlic Butter Pasta or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.
  • Crisp White Wine: If all else fails, treat yourself to this gorgeous salad and a crisp, chilled glass of wine like an Italian Pinot Grigio or Sauvignon Blanc.
Burrata Caprese styled on a plate from the top view.

FAQs

What is burrata?

Creamy burrata cheese is an Italian cow’s milk cheese that features an outer shell of fresh mozzarella wrapped around a soft-center of stracciatella (cheese curds and cream).

Where does burrata cheese come from?

Burrata originated in Puglia, Italy at the Castel del Monte and since has become a global sensation around the world.

What’s the difference between burrata and caprese?

Burrata is the soft cheese ball with a creamy center, whereas caprese is the simple Italian salad that can be made with either burrata or fresh mozzarella.

What is the difference between burrata and mozzarella?

Burrata and mozzarella are both creamy, white, semi-soft Italian cheeses very similar in appearance. However, burrata is made with an outer layer of fresh mozzarella and filled with soft, stringy curd and cream known as stracciatella (the cheese, not the gelato). As a result, it has a super creamy texture and taste. Mozzarella is made from cow or water buffalo milk that is firm and bouncy.

How to cut burrata?

Instead of slicing it with a knife (as you would with mozzarella cheese), try breaking it using your clean hands. I usually like to break it into chunks, revealing all the creamy bits, and place it over the tomatoes.

How do you eat burrata?

Burrata is typically first sliced with a knife (or torn with clean hands) to reveal its creamy soft center, drizzled with olive oil and flakey sea salt, then eaten just as is with a fork, summer produce, or toasted bread.

Other Tomato Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you simply love the combination of tomato, basil, and burrata, or need some delicious ideas to use up your summer tomatoes, I have plenty of recipes I know you’ll love. Below are a few that I make over and over again during the peak tomato season:

  • My Caprese Chicken Sandwich is an open-faced sandwich that’s a wonderful weeknight recipe, with the same classic flavor profile as burrata caprese. It’s a fantastic summer dinner idea.
  • For a quick and easy weeknight dinner, my Pizza Caprese celebrates the flavors of the classic Italian recipe by turning it into a pizza that’s especially great when serving kids.
  • If you want to travel down to the South Mediterranean, try my Piyaz – Turkish Tomato White Bean Salad for another tomato salad recipe that’s a bit different but just as delicious.
  • Try my quick Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad for a simple summer side that you can make in less than 15 minutes.
Burrata Caprese placed on a plate from the top view.
Print

Burrata Caprese Recipe

Put your fresh summer tomatoes to good use with this Burrata Caprese recipe that you can make in 10 minutes.This easy summer salad combines the classic Italian flavors we all love, but uses Burrata instead of mozzarella cheese.
Course Salad
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 93kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-5 large tomatoes
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
  • 2 balls burrata cheese 8 ounces in total
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves torn
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for finishing
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze

Instructions

  • Slice tomatoes into ⅓-inch thick slices. Arrange them on a serving platter. Sprinkle tomato slices with ½ teaspoon salt.
  • Arrange burrata balls in the middle or gently break them with a sharp pairing knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes.
  • Sprinkle everything with the rest of the salt and freshly ground black pepper. Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar.
  • Garnish it with basil leaves. Serve!

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 generously. I usually serve one ball of burrata and two medium-sized tomatoes for 2 people. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply this recipe using this ratio.
  • Tomatoes: While we use heirloom tomatoes in the recipe, you can use any type of tomatoes you have on hand. Cherry tomatoes, vine-ripened tomatoes and even roasted tomatoes would work in this recipe.
  • You can serve burrata as a whole or gently break it to reveal the creamy center. This way, your guests can easily serve themselves.
  • Storage: Leftover burrata caprese will keep for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. However, keep in mind the buratta’s cream will solidify and lose its viscosity over time, so it will not be as creamy on days two and three.

Nutrition

Calories: 93kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 0.4mg | Sodium: 444mg | Potassium: 307mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1108IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/feed/ 2
Mediterranean Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/#comments Thu, 22 May 2025 12:56:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81553 Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing…]]>

Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing in the kitchen wondering, what should I bring? I mean, I know I have a blog full of recipes, but when you’re serving a crowd with so many preferences and diet restrictions, it’s always a hard decision to make.

My experience is that this Mediterranean macaroni salad seems to please most people. For one thing, most people love the familiar “Greek” flavors (i.e. cucumbers, olives, tomatoes, etc.) and it rarely needs an introduction. To me, it is like a bistro pasta salad that is the most popular dish on the menu.

Cold Mediterranean pasta salad in a bowl with wooden spoons from the top view.

Key Ingredients:

The good news is that once you understand the process and the flavor profile, it’s easy to make this Mediterranean pasta recipe your own. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but below are a few helpful notes and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Pasta: I used farfalle (also known as bow tie pasta), but other shapes like rotini and fusilli would also work. I prefer these shapes as they hold on to the dressing, blend well with the rest of the ingredients, and are easy to scoop and eat cold. Of course, you can always use gluten-free pasta if preferred. 

Canned & fresh veggies: In my humble opinion, using a combination of canned and fresh vegetables is what makes this Mediterranean noodle salad a winner. And the best part is that if you do not have one ingredient (or you don’t care for it), you can use another. Here are a few optional add-ins and substitution ideas:

  • Onion: Use finely chopped red onion instead of scallions.
  • Tomatoes: If tomatoes are not in season, use finely chopped sun-dried tomatoes instead.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh oregano is the classic “Mediterranean” herb used in salads like this, but other herbs like fresh parsley, dill, and mint would all work.
  • Cheese: Not a fan of feta cheese? Use goat or no cheese if you prefer a vegan or dairy-free version of this pasta salad. 
  • Add protein: If you want to turn this into a more filling meal, feel free to bulk it up with a protein. Chickpeas are a great plant-based option and work beautifully with the Mediterranean flavors. You can also add grilled shrimp, chicken, or even canned tuna for a quick boost. Just be sure everything is cooled before mixing it in.
  • Pasta Salad Dressing: I used my go-to Mediterranean Vinaigrette, but my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette would also be a great dressing option.

How to Make Mediterranean Pasta Salad?

Once you have the ingredients ready, making this Mediterranean diet pasta salad is no more than a few easy steps. You can find the detailed recipe below, but here’s how I put it together:

A collage of images showing cooked pasta and making of the pasta salad dressing.

Step 1 – Cook the pasta: I feel like most pasta salads either have too much pasta or too many “supporting” ingredients. For a salad with so many add-ins, I find that 8 ounces of pasta (which gives you about 4 cups cooked) is the right balance.

Cook it in well-salted boiling water until al dente, according to the package instructions. Then drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process.

Pro tip: Let the pasta cool completely before adding the rest of the ingredients. If it’s too warm, it can wilt the veggies or melt the cheese. Plus, the dressing will soak in too quickly, leaving the salad a bit dry.

Step 2: Make the dressing: You can make the Mediterranean pasta salad dressing in a mason jar (great if you’re making it ahead) or a measuring cup, but if I’m making this for just us at home, I usually grab a large bowl and make it right there. 

That way, (1) I don’t have to wash another dish, and (2) I can start building the salad directly in the bowl.

No matter what vessel you’re using, start by adding the lemon juice, garlic, Dijon mustard, oregano, salt, and pepper. Then, slowly drizzle in the olive oil while whisking. This helps emulsify the dressing, making it a little creamy and helping it cling to the pasta.

Photos showing how to assemble the Mediterranean noodle salad.

Step 3 – Assemble the salad: Grab a large salad bowl. And I do mean large because we’ve got a good amount of vegetables going in. Add the cooled pasta along with the rest of the ingredients. It’ll look like a pile at first, and that’s totally fine.

Step 4: Dress and serve: Drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine. It might get a little messy, but that’s part of the charm of this easy pasta salad. Use tongs or two large spoons, and be gentle (and patient) as you toss.

If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes so the flavors can mingle.

Expert Tips:

Before you start cooking, here are a few tips to help you get the best results from this cold Mediterranean pasta salad. These small details can make a big difference in taste, texture, and presentation.

Drain the canned vegetables: One of the reasons this salad is so convenient is that it takes advantage of canned or jarred ingredients like artichoke hearts, roasted bell peppers, and olives. But if you don’t drain them properly, they can add too much moisture and water down the salad. Use a colander and drain each ingredient thoroughly before adding it to the bowl.

Taste for seasoning: Whenever I write a recipe with salty or briny ingredients like feta cheese and olives, I keep the added salt to a minimum. But let’s face it, not all feta or olives are created equal. Some are much saltier than others. So it’s always a good idea to taste those components first, then adjust the amount of salt in the dressing as needed.

Chop everything into similar sizes: For the best texture and an even bite, keep all the ingredients around the same size as the pasta. It’s a small thing, but it helps everything mix well and makes the salad easier to eat.

Serving Suggestions:

While this Mediterranean bow tie pasta salad can stand on its own, it also pairs well with a variety of main dishes. Below are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Roasted or grilled meat and seafood: This pasta salad is the ideal companion to a simply grilled salmonbaked chicken breast, or even lamb chops. The fresh, vibrant flavors of the salad beautifully cut through the richness of grilled proteins, making for a light yet satisfying meal.
  • Make it a Mediterranean weeknight dinner: Make a batch of my mom’s Chicken Kofta Recipe and serve it with your pasta for a true Mediterranean feast.
  • Bread: Serve it with a side of crusty bread (such as my Olive Bread) or warm pita bread to scoop up every last bit of that delicious dressing.
  • Fresh fruit: If all you need is a light and refreshing complement, serve it alongside a bowl of seasonal fresh fruit, such as watermelon, berries, or grapes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Mediterranean cold pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

This Mediterranean Pasta Salad is a vibrant, make-ahead dish that’s perfect for gatherings, lunches, or easy dinners. It travels well and tastes even better after a few hours.
Course Vegetarian Pasta
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 350kcal

Ingredients

For the Salad:

  • 8 oz dry pasta farfalle, fusilli or rotini
  • 3 Persian cucumbers or 1 English cucumber – peeled and sliced thinly
  • 1 ½ cups cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 2/3 cup black olives such as Kalamata olives sliced or chopped – 3 oz.
  • 1 cup roasted red peppers sliced and drained (or cut into small strips) (I use jarred)
  • 1 cup marinated artichoke hearts quartered and drained (7 oz after drained)
  • 3 scallions thinly sliced
  • 2 cups arugula or baby spinach – washed and dried
  • 4 oz. feta cheese crumbled

For the Mediterranean Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – or ⅛ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Cook the pasta until it’s al dente, according to the package directions. Drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the cooked pasta and salad dressing for the recipe.
  • While the pasta is cooking, make the dressing by whisking together 3 tablespoons lemon juice (or vinegar), 1 clove of minced garlic, ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard, ½ teaspoon chopped oregano, ½ teaspoon of Kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a small bowl. Slowly drizzle in ¼ cup of olive oil while whisking until fully emulsified.
  • To assemble the salad, in a large bowl, combine the cooked and cooled pasta, cucumber, tomatoes, olives, roasted red peppers, artichoke hearts, scallions, arugula, and feta cheese.
    Images showing how to assemble the Mediterranean macaroni salad.
  • Pour the dressing over the salad and toss gently to ensure all ingredients are evenly coated with the dressing. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes before serving.
    Pasta salad in a bowl with wooden utensils.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-7 cups of pasta salad that is ideal for six (generous) servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead Instructions: Keep in mind that this salad gets better as it sits, so you can absolutely make it a day in advance. The only thing I recommend is holding off on adding the arugula or spinach until just before serving so the greens stay fresh and don’t wilt.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. It is normal to get a bit soggy as it sits. Be sure to give it a good toss and taste (and adjust) the seasoning before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 350kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1104mg | Potassium: 314mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1027IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 154mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/feed/ 4
Red Cabbage Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/#comments Wed, 30 Apr 2025 14:37:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81303 How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw? This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

Before you dive in, here are a few quick tips that will help you make the best red cabbage slaw every time:

Slice Thinly for Best Texture: A mandolin is great for getting ultra-thin, even slices, but a sharp knife works just as well. The key is to slice the cabbage as evenly as possible to keep the slaw light, crisp, and not bulky.

Make It Ahead: This simple slaw stores beautifully in the fridge if you prefer to make it ahead. In fact, it gets even better as it sits and the flavors meld together — ideal for meal prep!

No mayo dressing: Made with a light, tangy vinegar dressing instead of mayo, this purple cabbage slaw recipe is naturally vegan. It’s a great option if you’re looking for a coleslaw that’s a little lighter but still delivers on texture and taste.

How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw?

This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably already have on hand, and once everything’s sliced and tossed, you’re ready to go. Here’s how to make it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather Your Ingredients: For a full list and measurements, check out the recipe card below. Here’s a few ingredient substitution ideas:

  • Make It Creamy: I opted for a vinegar-based dressing to keep it light, but if you prefer your red cabbage coleslaw with mayonnaise, this classic coleslaw dressing will give you that creamy texture and flavor you’re after.
  • Onion: I like the milder bite of green onions here, but thinly sliced red onions work just as well if you want a bit more punch.
  • Fresh Herbs: A handful of parsley brightens up the slaw and adds a pop of green, but feel free to use what you have — fresh cilantro, dill, or even fresh mint would all be delicious.
  • Carrots: I add carrots for extra crunch and a pop of color, but you can definitely leave them out if you prefer a simpler slaw.
    Steps showing how to make coleslaw with red cabbage.

    Step 2 Prepare the vegetables: Using a mandolin (or a sharp chef’s knife if you prefer), shred the red cabbage into thin, even slices. Grate the carrots using the large holes of a box grater, then thinly slice the green onions and chop the parsley. Add all the ingredients to a large mixing bowl and set it aside.

    Step 3 Mix the Dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together the extra virgin olive oil, minced garlic, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar (or red wine vinegar or rice vinegar), honey (or maple syrup or sugar), Dijon mustard, kosher salt, and black pepper until smooth.

      Red cabbage slaw being drizzled with dressing.

      Step 4 Toss It All Together: Drizzle the dressing over the cabbage mixture. Use clean hands (or tongs) to toss everything together, making sure the vegetables are evenly coated.

      Step 5 Chill and Serve: If you have the time, cover the bowl and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes to let the flavors come together. Serve your red cabbage carrot slaw chilled and enjoy.

        Coleslaw with red cabbage and carrots in a bowl.

        What to Serve It With?

        This simple red cabbage slaw is one of those side dishes that pairs well with many meals. Whether you’re making tacos, grilling, or just pulling together a quick weeknight dinner, it brings the perfect pop of color and crunch. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

        • Tacos: I love using this red cabbage slaw for tacos! It’s especially good piled onto brisket tacos for a smoky, hearty bite. It’s also fantastic with flank steak tacos, adding just the right amount of freshness, and honestly, it’s a must with fish tacos. The crunch balances out the tender, flaky fish so well.
        • Grilled Meats: This slaw is a total no-brainer for BBQ season. Serve it alongside grilled harissa chicken for a spicy kick or with grilled turkey tenderloin for a light but satisfying meal. And I am pretty sure no one would complain if you served it with grilled lamb burgers either.
        • Grilled Seafood: For seafood nights, I love pairing it with grilled shrimp, grilled salmon, or grilled mahi mahi. It’s the kind of side that keeps everything feeling light, bright, and colorful. Perfect for summer dinners!
        • Pulled Pork: Try tossing this purple cabbage slaw onto your pulled pork sandwiches for a crunchy twist, or serve it next to a big plate of roasted veggies and grains for a fresh meal.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Like:

        It is no secret that coleslaw recipes are some of the most popular summer salads. Here are a few other reader favorites in case you need more inspiration:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Red cabbage and carrot slow in a bowl.
        Print

        Red Cabbage Slaw Recipe

        A vibrant and easy Red Cabbage Slaw made with a light, zesty dressing — no mayo needed! Great for tacos, pulled pork, grilled meats, and fresh summer meals. Vegan and gluten-free.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Resting time (otpional) 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 98kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Coleslaw

        • 1 head of red cabbage about 1 ½ lbs shredded (~7-8 loosely packed cups)
        • 2 medium carrots peeled and shredded, about ½ lbs (~2 cups)
        • 3 green onions chopped thinly (or 1/2 cup sliced red onion)
        • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley roughly chopped

        For The Dressing

        • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced
        • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juice
        • 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine or rice vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup, or sugar
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place shredded red cabbage (about 7-8 cups), 2 shredded carrots, 3 thinly sliced green onions, and 3 tablespoons of chopped fresh parsley in a large bowl. Set it aside.
          Cabbage slaw made with red cabbage preparation photos.
        • In a small bowl (or mason jar), whisk together 3 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon honey (or your preferred sweetener), 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon of ground black pepper.
          Person drizzling and mixing purple cabbage slaw with dressing and mixing it.
        • If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 30 minutes before serving. Serve chilled.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: Red cabbage can range in size. I used a small to medium-sized head (about 1 ½ pounds with the core), which gave me roughly 7 to 8 cups of sliced cabbage. Once you mix it with the shredded carrots (about 2 cups), you’ll have around 10 cups of veggies. After tossing it with the dressing and letting it sit, the slaw wilts slightly and loses about 1½ to 2 cups in volume. Even so, this recipe still makes plenty — enough to comfortably serve 6 to 8 people as a side dish.
        • Taste for Seasoning: Always give your slaw a taste before serving. If it seems like it needs more salt right away, give it a little time to sit first. As the slaw rests, the flavors develop and become more pronounced, so it might balance out perfectly without adding anything extra.
        • Make ahead: You can prep it a day in advance — just toss everything together, cover it, and place it in the fridge. Letting it sit for a few hours (or even overnight) helps the flavors come together.
        • Storing leftovers: Leftovers will keep well in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Just give it a quick toss before serving. If any liquid has settled at the bottom, that’s totally normal — a quick stir will bring it right back to life.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 98kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 339mg | Potassium: 337mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 3890IU | Vitamin C: 64mg | Calcium: 60mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/feed/ 2
        Asparagus Salad Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/#comments Tue, 04 Mar 2025 23:34:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=36068 For many of us home cooks, spotting fresh asparagus at the store is the first sign that spring has finally…]]>

        For many of us home cooks, spotting fresh asparagus at the store is the first sign that spring has finally arrived. After months of cold and hearty winter meals, those vibrant green spears feel like a promise of warmer days ahead.

        And with asparagus in season, I’m always looking for new ways to enjoy it. This simple asparagus salad is one of my go-to recipes—it’s fresh, easy to make, and perfect for meal prep. And if you’re looking for more salad recipes with asparagus, my Butter Lettuce Salad is another great option to try.

        Asparagus Salad with Feta, Tomatoes and fresh basil in a large salad bowl from the top view.

        Key Ingredients and Substitutions:

        This simple asparagus salad is packed with everyday ingredients that come together to create a refreshing and satisfying dish. The good news, you ask? You can easily customize it to your taste or use what you have on hand. Below is what you’ll need, along with ingredient substitutions, so you can make it your own with what you have on hand.

        Ingredients for the recipe are laid out
        • Fresh asparagus: During asparagus season, you’ll often find different varieties at the store—thin or thick, and sometimes even in shades of green, purple, or white, depending on where you live. Any of these will work beautifully in this recipe! Just be sure to trim off the tough woody ends for the best texture. And if you’re not using them the same day you buy them, don’t worry—I’ve written a whole guide on how to store asparagus to keep it fresh for longer.
        • Tomatoes: I opted for cherry tomatoes that I sliced in half but you can use any tomatoes you have on hand. Just slice them in bite sized pieces.
        • Radishes: I love adding thinly sliced radishes for a pop of color and crunch.
        • Olives: Use any olive you have on hand. Kalamata olives, Castelvestrano olives, or green olives would all work. Not a fan of olives? Omit them. It will still be delicious.
        • Onions: I prefer the mild flavor of scallions but a thinly sliced red onion would also work.
        • Cheese: Adding cheese is optional. I opted for feta cheese for a Mediterranean flair, but parmesan cheese, goat cheese, and shredded mozzarella would also work. And if you need a dairy-free salad, omit cheese altogether.
        • Fresh herbs: The combination of fresh basil and asparagus is terrific, but fresh mint, dill, and parsley would also work beautifully in this fresh asparagus salad recipe.
        • The dressing: My go-to asparagus salad dressing is my homemade lemon vinaigrette. However, you can also use my avocado salad dressing, lemon balsamic vinaigrette in this asparagus salad recipe. Or you can also try my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette for more of a sweet and tangy salad.

        Optional Add-ins:

        What I love most about this spring asparagus salad is that you can keep it simple or jazz it up with these optional add-ins to make it your own. Here are a few ideas:

        • Add nuts: You can easily add in some crunch and extra protein by adding a handful of pecans, walnuts, or pine nuts.
        • Spring mix or Butter Lettuce: If you’d like to turn this into more of a green asparagus salad, toss in a handful of spring mix or butter lettuce leaves for extra freshness and texture.
        • Peas: A handful of blanched peas make a great addition to this salad. They add a subtle sweetness and a pop of color, making the dish even more vibrant and seasonal.

        How To Cook Asparagus for A Salad?

        Asparagus is one of those wonderfully versatile vegetables that can be enjoyed in so many ways, no matter the season.

        However, if you’re making this salad during peak asparagus season and have access to freshly picked spears, you can even serve them raw following this recipe.

        Raw asparagus salad offers a satisfying, crisp, and refreshing bite that is truly a treat.

        However, I also encourage you to try other methods of cooking asparagus for this salad recipe. Whether you prefer oven baked asparagus, air fryer asparagus, steamed asparagus, or pan sautéed asparagus, this vibrant spring vegetable always makes for a quick and delicious addition to any salad recipe, and this one is no exception.

        How To Make Asparagus Salad?

        There’s something so satisfying about creating a beautiful salad with fresh, seasonal ingredients. And this asparagus salad is just that—a simple yet flavorful dish that highlights the best of spring. Here are the easy steps to follow:

        Person cooking asparagus for salad in a baking sheet
        1. Cook the asparagus: As mentioned earlier, if you’re making this salad during the asparagus season, you can serve it raw for a crisp, fresh bite. However, I personally love roasting it—drizzling the spears with olive oil, seasoning with salt and pepper, and letting the heat bring out their natural sweetness. The slightly smoky, caramelized flavors are just so delicious and addictive.
          Alternatively, you can blanch the asparagus for a few seconds to keep it tender-crisp while maintaining its vibrant green color. The instructions below are for medium size asparagus. For thick asparagus, I recommend increasing the cooking time by 1-2 minutes.
        Person making lemon vinaigrette from the top view
        1. Make the lemon vinaigrette: I make a batch of this dressing during the weekend and keep it in a jar in the fridge. To make it, whisk together extra-virgin olive oil, fresh lemon juice, garlic, dijon mustard, salt, and pepper in a small mixing bowl until emulsified.
        Cold asparagus salad with all ingredients placed in a salad bowl top view
        1. Assemble the salad: Once you have your asparagus ready, all you have to do is to chop the rest of the ingredients. Then, go ahead and place chopped asparagus, cherry tomatoes, sliced radishes, chopped green onion, and kalamata olives in a large bowl and drizzle it with the lemon vinaigrette. Grab two large spoons or tongs and give it a gentle toss, making sure that all the veggies are coated with the dressing.
        2. Garnish and Serve: If preferred, top your asparagus salad with feta cheese and a handful of freshly torn basil leaves. Serve immediately or cover with stretch film and refrigerate.
        Cold asparagus salad recipe placed in a bowl with lemon dressing on the side

        How To Store Leftovers & Make Ahead Instructions

        One of the great things about using asparagus in salad is that it holds up well, even after a day or two in the fridge. Whether you’re making it ahead for meal prep or saving leftovers, here’s how to keep it fresh and delicious.

        • To Store Leftovers: The best part about this spring asparagus salad is that it holds up well. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • To make it ahead of time: If you want to make this salad in advance, I recommend preparing and storing all the vegetables in a bowl and then adding the lemon vinaigrette, feta cheese, and basil leaves at the very end, right before serving.

        Serving Suggestions:

        While this asparagus salad with lemon vinaigrette is perfect when served by itself, you can turn it into a whole meal with other recipes like:

        Expert Tips

        • Trim the woody ends: Asparagus spears have tough, fibrous ends that aren’t pleasant to eat. Be sure to snap or trim them off using a sharp knife before cooking.
        • Skip the frozen asparagus: While you can use thawed asparagus, it won’t have the same crisp, fresh bite that makes this salad so delicious. Fresh asparagus is best for both texture and flavor.
        • Serve it warm or cold – This salad is delicious both ways! Serve it warm right after roasting the asparagus for a cozy side dish, or let it chill in the fridge for a refreshing, make-ahead option.
        • Use good quality ingredients: Since this salad is made with just a few simple ingredients, each one really shines. Opt for fresh, in-season asparagus, juicy cherry tomatoes, and good-quality olive oil for the best flavor.

        You Might Also Like:

        If fresh veggie-packed salads are your jam, here are a few more you might like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Asparagus Salad recipe, please take a minute to give it a star rating and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Asparagus salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Asparagus Salad Recipe

        A simple Asparagus Salad drizzled with homemade lemon vinaigrette and topped with feta, tomatoes, and olives. Light, crunchy, and perfect as a side dish, light lunch, or meal prep option. Gluten-free and vegetarian.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 12 minutes
        Total Time 17 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 229kcal

        Ingredients

        To roast the asparagus:

        • 1 bunch asparagus spears rinsed and the woody ends cut
        • 2 teaspoons vegetable oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the lemon vinaigrette:

        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 1/2 teaspoon dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper

        For the salad:

        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
        • ½ cup radishes thinly sliced
        • 3 scallions stalks – chopped
        • ½ cup kalamata olives optional
        • ½ cup feta cheese cut into cubes or crumbled or grated parmesan cheese (optional)
        • ½ cup basil leaves loosely packed and torn (optional)

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Place asparagus on a sheet pan in one layer. Drizzle with oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Give it a toss, making sure that all the spears are coated with the oil and seasoning.
        • Roast for 12 minutes or until the asparagus is cooked*. Transfer onto a plate and let asparagus cool. When cooled, cut the asparagus into 2-inch pieces. Place into a salad bowl.
        • While the asparagus is roasting make the lemon vinaigrette by mixing together 1/4 cup olive oil, 3 tablespoons of lemon juice, 1 clove of minced garlic, 1/2 teaspoon of dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and 1/2 teaspoon of black pepper.
        • To assemble the asparagus salad: Place tomatoes, radishes, scallions, olive into the bowl with the asparagus. Drizzle with the dressing.
        • Stir in the feta cheese (if using) and basil leaves. Give it a gentle toss. Serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups (loosely packed) salads that serves four adults as a side dish. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Raw asparagus: During the spring, when asparagus is in season, you can use raw asparagus to make this salad, especially if you can get your hands on freshly picked asparagus. Some people like to shave it (using a vegetable peeler), which will work, but I also like to cut it into bite-size pieces for a fresh and crispy spring salad.
        • Blanched Asparagus: Alternatively, you can blanch asparagus to make this recipe. To do so, bring a pot of salted water to a boil. Add the asparagus spears and cook them for 4-5 minutes or until fork tender. Meanwhile, prepare the ice bath by placing some ice cubes and cold tap water in a bowl. Remove the asparagus using a slotted spoon and place it in the bowl of ice water (to stop the cooking process). Drain and cut it into smaller pieces.
        • How To Store Leftovers? The best part about this spring asparagus salad that it holds up well. Store it in an airing container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • Instructions to Make It Ahead: If you want to make this salad in advance, I recommend preparing and storing all the vegetables in a bowl and then adding the lemon vinaigrette, feta cheese, and basil leaves at the very end right before serving.
         

        Nutrition

        Calories: 229kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1363mg | Potassium: 172mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 606IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 121mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/feed/ 13
        Quinoa Tabbouleh https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/ https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/#comments Sat, 01 Mar 2025 12:47:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20389 Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring…]]>

        Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring and summer salad, which she paired with pretty much everything. 

        This version, made with protein-rich quinoa (a fantastic substitute for bulgur), is the latest addition to my Quinoa Salad recipes collection, and it’s just as delicious as the traditional recipe. If you love quinoa as much as I do, be sure to check out my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad for another fresh and vibrant option. 

        Quinoa tabouli being drizzled with the dressing.

        And if you’ve ever wondered about the different names and spellings—tabbouleh, tabouli—they’re simply variations of the same name, reflecting different versions of the Arabic word.

        Recipe Ingredients:

        This tabouli quinoa recipe is made with simple ingredients that make a bright and refreshing salad. The fresh herbs and crisp vegetables provide a delicious contrast to the fluffy quinoa, while the tangy lemon dressing ties everything together beautifully. You will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Quinoa: This quinoa tabbouleh salad will work with any type of quinoa. Red, black, tricolor and white quinoa would all work. It is imperative to rinse quinoa before cooking if you want it to taste good. 
        • Cooking liquid: While water works just fine, I highly recommend cooking your quinoa in vegetable stock. It adds depth of flavor, ensuring that the base of your quinoa tabouli salad is tasty right from the start.
        • Fresh lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is my favorite acid for the dressing used in this recipe, but in a pinch, white wine vinegar can be used. The flavors would be slightly different but still be great.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
        • Fresh herbs: A mix of fresh herbs is key to classic tabouli, and this quinoa version is no exception. I like to use a cup of fresh flat-leaf parsley, a cup of fresh dill, and half a cup of fresh mint leaves, but there’s no strict rule—adjust to your taste! You can stick to just parsley and dill or skip the dill altogether if it’s not your favorite.
        • Fresh tomatoes: I prefer using colorful cherry tomatoes for their sweetness and vibrant look, but any variety will work—just be sure to chop them into small pieces for even distribution.
        • Cucumber: I prefer Persian cucumbers as they are crunchy, but English cucumbers would also work.
        • Scallions: Green onions provide a mild onion flavor that ties everything together. While it is not traditional, finely chopped red onion could be a good substitute in a pinch. 
        • Seasonings: I kept it simple with just kosher salt and pepper in this tabbouleh quinoa salad recipe, but you can add a touch of ground cumin, ground coriander, or a pinch of red pepper flakes to the dressing for extra depth of flavor.

        Optional Add-Ins

        While the recipe for quinoa tabouli I’m sharing stays close to the traditional version, you can easily customize it with a few extra ingredients. These aren’t traditional, but they add delicious new flavors:

        • Feta Cheese: A handful of crumbled feta adds a creamy, salty contrast that pairs perfectly with the Mediterranean flavors.
        • Kalamata Olives: Their briny, tangy taste enhances the salad and adds an extra punch of flavor.
        • Garlic: The traditional tabbouleh salad recipe does not use garlic in the lemon dressing, but you can always add a minced garlic clove if you are a fan.
        • Chickpeas: Again, the classic tabbouleh recipe does not use chickpeas, but sometimes I add a can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas to make it even more satisfying.

        How To Make Quinoa Tabbouleh?

        Making this quinoa tabouli recipe is easy, and it comes together in just a few steps in under 20 minutes. Yes, there is a bit of chopping involved, but the result is a refreshing and wholesome dish that you’ll want to make on repeat.

        A collage of images showing how to cook quinoa and make the dressing.
        1. Cook the Quinoa: Place the rinsed quinoa in a medium saucepan along with your cooking liquid and salt. Bring to a boil, reduce to a simmer, cover, and cook for about 10-12 minutes until the liquid is absorbed. Let it rest for 10 minutes, then fluff with a fork and transfer it to a large bowl to cool.
        2. Make the Dressing: While the quinoa is cooking, prepare the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and black pepper until fully combined. 
        3. Chop the fresh herbs and veggies – Finely chop the fresh parsley, dill, and mint. Quarter the cherry tomatoes, dice the cucumbers and thinly slice the scallions. Add the chopped herbs, tomatoes, cucumbers, and scallions to the cooled quinoa.
        Tabbouleh with quinoa in a salad bowl.
        1. Assemble your tabouli quinoa salad – Drizzle the cooked quinoa and the veggies with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
        2. Serve – Taste for seasoning and add more salt, pepper, or lemon juice as needed. Serve immediately or refrigerate for later.

        How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        My favorite thing about this quinoa tabbouleh salad recipe is that it stores well. As a matter of fact, since the flavors meld together over time, it actually tastes even better the next day. Here is how I make-ahead and store leftovers:

        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Before serving, give it a quick stir, taste for seasoning, and refresh it with a squeeze of lemon and more seasoning if needed.
        • Freezing: You can technically freeze this dish, but I do not recommend it as it will lose most of its fresh flavors when thawed.

        Expert Tips:

        This recipe is simple and easy to make, but to ensure the best quinoa tabbouleh, here are a few key tips to help you get it right on your first try:

        • Chopping by hand vs. using a food processor: I like to chop the herbs by hand using a sharp chef’s knife as it gives me more control over the texture, ensuring evenly chopped herbs. Plus, there is no risk of over-processing, which can turn herbs into a paste. However, if you prefer a food processor, pulse in short bursts instead of running it continuously to prevent the herbs from turning into a paste.
        • Herb stems: When it comes to herbs, you can chop the parsley and dill stems, as they are tender and flavorful. However, with mint, I prefer using only the leaves unless you’re growing your own and it’s super fresh.
        • Are you short on time? You can prep the herbs and veggies a day in advance and store them in the fridge until you’re ready to put it all together.
        • Let the quinoa cool a bit: You can mix everything together while the quinoa is still warm for a slightly different texture and flavor, but letting it cool first helps keep the herbs fresh and vibrant. I usually cook the quinoa a day in advance—not only does this save time, but it also ensures it’s perfectly cooled and ready to use.
        • Cooking quinoa: While I opted to cook quinoa on the stovetop, you can cook quinoa in the microwave, in an instant pot, and a rice cooker. Feel free to pick the method that works best for you. Also, I usually cook a big batch and freeze some for later. If you have some cooked quinoa on hand, this quinoa tabbouleh comes together in minutes.
        • Serve at room temperature: This tabouli recipe with quinoa tastes best when served at room temperature, allowing the flavors to fully develop. If you made it in advance, take it out of the fridge 15 minutes before serving for the best taste and texture.

        Serving Suggestions:

        You can serve this gluten-free tabbouleh salad with any protein or vegetarian main or just by itself for a light meal. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        Other Quinoa Salads You Might Also Like

        If you make this recipe for tabbouleh salad with quinoa, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to leave a star rating and a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        This recipe was originally published in September 2018 and updated in March 2025 with new step-by-step photos and more helpful tips. The recipe itself remains the same, with only minor edits for clarification.

        Quinoa tabbouleh in a salad bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe

        Traditional Mediterranean Tabbouleh Salad made with a twist. Made with protein-rich quinoa, this vegan and gluten-free Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe is the perfect year-round salad for all your indoor and outdoor parties.
        Course Side Dish – Salad
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Turkish
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 27 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 205kcal

        Ingredients

        For the Quinoa:

        • 1 cup uncooked quinoa rinsed
        • 1 ¾ cups water or vegetable stock
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

        For The Dressing:

        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed – plus more to taste
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more to taste as needed
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the Tabbouleh:

        • 1 cup fresh parsley chopped
        • 1 cup fresh dill chopped (optional)
        • ½ cup fresh mint leaves chopped
        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes quartered
        • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and chopped or 1 English cucumber
        • 3-4 scallions sliced thinly both white and green parts

        Instructions

        • Place 1 cup quinoa in a saucepan along with 1 ¾ cups of vegetable stock (or water) and a half teaspoon of kosher salt. Stir to combine, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat.
          Person showing how to cook quinoa.
        • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and cook for 10-12 minutes or until water is fully absorbed. Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes. Fluff it with a fork, transfer it to a large salad bowl, and let it cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
        • Meanwhile, prepare the dressing by whisking together 4 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a bowl. Set it aside.
          A collage of images showing how to make the dressing and prep the ingredients.
        • To assemble the quinoa tabbouleh, add 1 cup of chopped parsley, 1 cup of fresh dill, ½ cup fresh mint, 1 cup of quartered cherry tomatoes, 2 chopped Persian cucumbers, 3 thinly sliced green onions into the bowl with the quinoa.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
          A bowl of tabouli with quinoa is being drizzled with the dressing.
        • Taste for seasoning and serve immediately.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 to 6 cups of tabbouleh, ideal for serving six adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Using dill: Most tabouli recipes are made with fresh parsley and mint, but my mom always added fresh dill, so I followed in her footsteps. If you are not a fan, you can omit using dill (and use more parsley or mint instead.)
        • A quick note on chopping herbs: Traditional tabbouleh is made with finely chopped herbs for a light, delicate texture, but if you prefer a rougher chop, that works too! It all comes down to personal preference.
        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Before serving, taste for seasoning and add more lemon juice and salt and pepper if needed. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 408mg | Potassium: 404mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1812IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/feed/ 22
        Christmas Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 23 Dec 2024 15:15:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79518 Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness,…]]>

        Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness, and flavor to your holiday table with minimal effort. While I focused on red and green fruits to keep it festive, the great thing about this recipe is that you can use virtually any fruits you have on hand.

        Christmas salad with fruit in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients and Substitutions:

        Like any great salad recipe, this fruit Christmas salad has two main components: the dressing and the fruit. To achieve the best flavor and texture, use ripe—but not overripe—fruits. Here’s everything you’ll need:

        For the Dressing:

        The dressing ingredients to make Christmas brunch fruit salad.
        • Maple Syrup: With its rich, caramel-like flavor, maple syrup adds a touch of natural sweetness to the salad. If you prefer, honey makes an excellent substitute.
        • Lemon zest: Be sure to zest the lemon before squeezing it, and whatever you do, do not skip using it, as it enhances the dressing by adding a concentrated burst of citrus flavor and aroma.
        • Lemon Juice: The bright, tangy flavor of lemon juice adds a refreshing tartness to the salad, while its acidity helps prevent the apples and pears from oxidizing and browning. However, you can use other citrus and fruit juices like lime juice, pineapple juice or orange juice.
        • Vanilla Extract
        • Spices: Ground cinnamon and a pinch of nutmeg add warm, spiced notes to the dressing, giving it a cozy, festive flavor perfect for the holiday season. 

        For the Fruit Salad:

        While I am listing a bunch of fruits, feel free to use this as a guide and a place to start to make your own winter fruit salad with whatever fruit you have on hand.

        The fruit used in the recipe in bowls.
        • Apples: I used a combination of green apples (such as Granny Smit) and red apples (Gala or Honeycrisp), but any other type of apple would be lovely.
        • Pear (Red, Anjou, or Bosc): Sweet and juicy pears balance the tartness coming from apples. 
        • Oranges: You can use a combination of navel oranges and mandarin oranges (if you can get your hands on them). I know it is an extra step, but take the time to segment the orange for a clean, membrane-free presentation that ensures each piece is tender, juicy, and easy to eat. Alternatively, you can use clementines as a substitute if you can get your hands on them.
        • Kiwis: I included kiwis for their green color and sweet and tart flavor. 
        • Red or green grapes: When buying grapes for making this Christmas day fruit salad, be sure to choose firm, seedless green or red grapes for the best texture and ease of eating.
        • Pomegranate seeds: Many Christmas recipes with fruit feature pomegranate arils, not just for their sweet-tart flavor but also for their vibrant, jewel-like pop of color they bring to the dish. Here is an easy way to cut pomegranate if you need a refresher.
        • Raspberries: I included raspberries for their vibrant red color and to add a delicate, softer texture that balances the crunch of the other fruits in the salad. Strawberries would be a great substitute if you can’t find raspberries.

        Optional Toppings:

        Many Christmas fruit dishes can end up looking like just a simple pile of fruit in a bowl. While optional, by adding a few thoughtful toppings, you can elevate the presentation and bring in extra pops of color and texture, making the salad as stunning as it is delicious. Try adding:

        • Coconut flakes: If you have the time, toast them to enhance their flavor with a warm, nutty aroma that adds even more depth to the salad.
        • Fresh mint: A few sprigs of fresh mint can add a refreshing aroma and a vibrant pop of green, making your salad look and taste even more festive.

        How To Make Christmas Fruit Salad?

        Yes, there’s a bit of chopping involved, but don’t let that intimidate you—this xmas fruit salad recipe is super simple to put together. It’s quick to assemble, making it a great choice for busy holiday mornings. Here’s how to do it:

        A collage of images showing how to make fruit bowl for Christmas.
        1. Make the Dressing: To keep cleanup simple, prepare the dressing directly in a large bowl. Whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, ground cinnamon, and nutmeg until well combined.
        2. Chop the Fruit: Begin by chopping the apples and pears, then add them to the bowl with the dressing. Coating them in the acidic dressing immediately helps prevent browning. Continue peeling and chopping the rest of the fruit (except raspberries) and place them in the bowl. Give it a toss to ensure all the fruit is evenly distributed and coated with the dressing. If you have the time, chill it for an hour or for upto six hours before serving.
        3. Garnish and serve: Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with coconut flakes and/or fresh mint, if using. 

        How To Make Ahead, Store and Freeze?

        Once you’ve made this fruit salad for xmas, you won’t want any of it to go to waste. With a bit of planning, you can keep it fresh and delicious for longer. Here’s how:

        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. Keep in mind that pre-cut fruit will release some of their juices. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Keep in mind that the fruits will release their juices over time, but the salad will still taste great. Give it a good toss before serving.
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this Christmas fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for upto 3 months.

        Expert Tips:

        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into similar-sized pieces for even mixing and easy eating. If you have the time, use cookie cutters (affiliate link) to cut apples and pears in fun shapes (like I did in the pictures). This is especially a fun way to make this salad with kids.
        A collage of images showing cutting of the fruit using cookie cutters and the finished dish.
        • Presentation: Use a clear trifle dish or a colorful holiday fruit bowl to show off the salad’s vibrant red and green colors, perfect for a Christmas morning fruit salad centerpiece.
        • Add Raspberries Last: I intentionally added the raspberries at the last minute as their soft texture can easily break.
        • Portion Planning: This recipe yields approximately 8 cups, suitable for a small Christmas dinner, but can be multiplied as needed. 
        • Make it your own: This recipe is a perfect starting point for creating your own signature fruit salad for any holiday! While the citrus-maple dressing is my go-to for Christmas, I love switching things up for other occasions. For Thanksgiving, I’ll often use my honey lime dressing for a bright, zesty twist that complements the autumnal flavors of the season. For Easter, I might add a splash of orange blossom water to the dressing for a festive springtime touch. No matter the holiday, this salad is versatile enough to adapt and impress every time!

        Serving Suggestions:

        This Christmas fruit salad recipe is wonderful when served on its own or as a refreshing side dish, but why not make it extra special for the holidays? Here are a few indulgent serving ideas to take it to the next level:

        You Might Also Like

        If you make this festive fruit salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Christmas fruit salad in a bowl.
        Print

        Christmas Fruit Salad Recipe

        Celebrate the holidays with this easy Christmas Fruit Salad recipe. Red and green fruits, drizzled with a citrus-maple dressing, make it a light and refreshing addition to your holiday table.
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 277kcal

        Ingredients

        For the dressing

        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
        • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
        • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed or lime juice
        • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
        • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • Pinch of nutmeg

        For the fruit salad

        • 1 green apple (about 1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Granny smith apples
        • 1 red apple about 1 ½ cups, peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Honey Crisp, Gala or Fuji
        • 1 pear (180g/1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Red, Anjou or Bosc
        • 2 oranges (140g) peeled and segmented or mandarin oranges
        • 2 kiwis (142g/1 cup) peeled, quartered, and cut into ½- inch cubes
        • 1 cup green grapes 190g cut in half
        • 1 cup pomegranate arils (160g)
        • 6 ounces raspberries (170g)

        Optional Garnish

        • Sprigs of mint optional topping

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing: In a large salad bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, cinnamon and nutmeg.
        • To make the salad: Add the apple, pear, orange segments, kiwis, grapes and pomegranate arils. Toss to coat thoroughly. Chill for at least an hour or up to 6 hours in the refrigerator.
        • Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with fresh mint leaves, if using. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 8 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into bite-sized pieces for even mixing. If you have the time, use cookie cutters to shape the apples and pears into fun designs (like I did in the pictures). It’s a great way to make the salad more festive and a fun activity to enjoy with kids!
        • Presentation: You can serve this salad in a large salad bowl or transfer it into a trifle dish, if you have one. Alternatively, you can place it in a large platter as well.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 277kcal | Carbohydrates: 57.1g | Protein: 2.8g | Fat: 5.4g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 405mg | Sugar: 40.4g | Calcium: 100mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
        Eggplant Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/#respond Tue, 06 Aug 2024 11:59:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77481 It is no secret that Caprese is a summer classic. With all the fresh and colorful summer tomatoes and fresh…]]>

        It is no secret that Caprese is a summer classic. With all the fresh and colorful summer tomatoes and fresh basil abundant in the garden, it is the easiest yet most delicious summer recipe. While I make my Burrata Caprese often, this summer, I have been loving this grilled eggplant caprese. 

        If you are a fan of eggplant recipes, this easy recipe is a great way to use them in your daily cooking.

        Eggplant Caprese on a plate garnished with basil leaves.

        Ingredients

        The list below includes two sets of items: what you’ll need to grill the eggplant and what you’ll need to make the eggplant Caprese salad.

        Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.
        • Eggplant: The widely available globe eggplants work beautifully in this recipe. However, if you can get your hands on other eggplant varieties, like Italian Graffiti eggplants, you can use them as well. Keep in mind that each variety offers a slightly different flavor and texture, but all will work beautifully in this recipe. There is no need to peel the eggplant as the skin is edible. 
        • Olive Oil: This is used both for the marinade and the final drizzle. Choose an extra virgin olive oil that offers a rich but subtle flavor.
        • Balsamic Vinegar: We are using balsamic vinegar both in the marinade and in the assembled dish. I recommend a good-quality aged balsamic vinegar (affiliate link), but any of your favorite brands would work.
        • Garlic: Freshly minced or pressed garlic adds a pungent, savory depth to the marinade.
        • Seasonings: Kosher salt (or flaky sea salt) and ground black pepper are all you need for seasoning this eggplant recipe.
        • Tomatoes: If you can find them, use sweet, ripe heirloom tomatoes. However, any type of tomato would work in this caprese salad with eggplant. For even layering, try to choose tomatoes that are similar in size.
        • Fresh mozzarella cheese: Sliced thickly, fresh mozzarella pairs perfectly with the tomatoes and eggplant. While it is not traditional, you can take things up a notch by using burrata instead.
        • Fresh Basil Leaves: Fresh basil is key for that authentic Caprese taste. We recommend tearing larger leaves by hand instead of chopping them with a knife, which will bruise them.
        • Balsamic Glaze – Optional: This is an optional ingredient, but if you have it on hand, drizzle it over the salad for a touch of sweetness and acidity.

        How to make this recipe?

        Creating this eggplant Caprese is simple and straightforward. It starts with grilling the eggplant and then assembling the salad. Below are the step-by-step instructions:

        1. Fire up the grill: Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, approximately 400 degrees F.
        Person showing how to prepare eggplant to make caprese with eggplant.
        1. Prepare the eggplant: Slice eggplant into ½-inch thick rounds and place them in a single layer on a baking sheet.
        2. Make the marinade: In a shallow baking dish, whisk together olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
        3. Marinade the eggplant: Place the sliced eggplant in the marinade and make sure that they are coated on both sides. Let them rest for 10 minutes. 
        4. Grill: Place the eggplant slices directly on the grill grate for 4-5 minutes, flip, and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes just until tender to maintain its structure and avoid a mushy texture. 
        A collage of images showing how to assemble the caprese with eggplant and tomatoes.
        1. Assemble: Arrange the grilled eggplant slices with sliced mozzarella, tomato slices, and fresh basil leaves on a large serving platter.
        2. Season and garnish: Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar (or balsamic glaze) and sprinkle with salt and black pepper. Garnish with fresh basil leaves and serve immediately.

        How To Serve Caprese Eggplant?

        The beauty of this Italian classic is that it can be served in many different ways, making it a versatile summer dish that you can prepare on a moment’s notice. Here are some serving suggestions:

        • A light meal or appetizer: Serve it with a loaf of crusty bread for an impressive summer appetizer that is great for serving a crowd.
        • A vegetarian dinner: Place eggplant caprese stacks on top of a bowl of a hearty grain like quinoa or wild rice for a complete vegetarian meal.
        • Side Dish with grilled meats and seafood: If you are wondering what to serve with eggplant caprese, know that any grilled protein would work. I especially like to pair it with my Grilled Wild Salmon and Shrimp and Vegetable Kabobs.
        • Make it a sandwich or a wrap: Use the eggplant mozzarella stacks to make a quick sandwich with Italian bread or a wrap with flour tortilla for a quick lunch.
        Person serving eggplant Caprese salad along with wine.

        Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Like

        If you make your own Eggplant Caprese following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Eggplant caprese on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Eggplant Caprese Recipe

        Grilled eggplant slices layered with mozzarella cheese and juicy tomatoes garnished with basil leaves. If you are a fan of the classic Italian Caprese, be sure to try this eggplant version.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American/Italian
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 8 minutes
        Resting Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 28 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 279kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Eggplant

        • 1 large eggplant or two medium eggplant (approximately 1 lb)
        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
        • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Caprese

        • 1 lb. fresh tomatoes any tomatoes would work (we prefer heirloom or cherry tomatoes) sliced 1/2 inch thick
        • 8 oz. fresh mozzarella sliced ½ inch thick
        • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves
        • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze optional
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, approximately 400 degrees F.
        • Slice the eggplant into ½-inch thick rounds—place as a single layer on a baking sheet.
        • To make the marinade, whisk together olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a shallow baking dish (9X13) until combined.
        • Place the eggplant slices in the marinade, coating them fully on both sides. Let them rest for 5-10 minutes. When ready to grill, remove them onto a platter shaking the excess marinade.
        • Place the eggplant slices directly on the grill grate and cook for 4-5 minutes until lightly golden brown. Using a spatula, flip and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes or until tender.
        • To assemble the eggplant caprese, arrange grilled eggplant, sliced juicy tomatoes, and mozzarella in an overlapping pattern on a large serving platter. Alternatively, you can layer them in stacks starting with eggplant slices followed by mozzarella cheese, sliced tomatoes and fresh basil leaves.
        • Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar (or balsamic glaze, if using). Sprinkle with salt and pepper.
        • Garnish with fresh basil leaves and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 7-8 (loose) cups of eggplant caprese, which is ideal for serving 6 people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Cooking Eggplant: We made this recipe using grilled eggplant since it’s perfect for the summer months. However, you can enjoy this eggplant dish all year round. You don’t have to stick to grilling; try air-frying, sautéing in a skillet, or baking in the oven your eggplant for equally delicious results.
        • Crispy Eggplant: Another alternative to grilling eggplant could be my Baked Crispy Eggplant or Breaded Eggplant in Air Fryer. Coating sliced eggplant with a mixture of panko breadcrumbs, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, and other seasonings adds yet another layer of flavor to the eggplant caprese.
        • Salting eggplant: It is not necessary to salt eggplant if you buy it from a supermarket during the summer months when it is in season. Thanks to the advancements in eggplant farming, farmers have bred out much of that signature bitterness, especially in the globe eggplants you find in US supermarkets. However, if you prefer to salt it, you can do so by following our guide on salting eggplant.
        • Serve at room temperature: While you can make this salad a few hours in advance, I find that it is best when served at room temperature. For the best results, simply take it out of the fridge 30 minutes before serving.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 279kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 827mg | Potassium: 405mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 957IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 213mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/feed/ 0
        Greek Cucumber Salad https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/#comments Tue, 30 Jul 2024 15:36:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77332 This Greek cucumber tomato feta salad is the perfect way to enjoy fresh produce on a hot summer day. Bursting…]]>

        This Greek cucumber tomato feta salad is the perfect way to enjoy fresh produce on a hot summer day. Bursting with summer’s bounty while staying traditional, I serve this salad throughout the warm weather season.

        If you are a fan of fresh summer salads, make Tomato Cucumber Caprese Salad, Mediterranean Quinoa Salad with Feta, and Strawberry Spinach Salad.

        Tomato cucumber Greek salad in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients for Greek Tomato Cucumber Salad

        You will need just a few simple ingredients to make this Greek tomato and cucumber salad with feta. Feel free to experiment with substitutions and tips provided to suit your taste and what you have on hand. Below is what you’ll need:

        The dressing Ingredients:

        • Olive oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for a buttery, fruity and smooth flavor.
        • Lemon juice: Fresh lemon juice makes a light, bright dressing. If you prefer more acidity, you can also use red wine vinegar.
        • Garlic: Fresh garlic gives us an extra punchy bite. If you do not have any fresh garlic cloves on hand, swap them out for ¼ – ½ teaspoon garlic powder.
        • Oregano: Fresh oregano is deliciously aromatic and makes you feel like you’re on the cobblestone streets of the Mediterranean. If you grow oregano in your backyard, this is a great use for it. If you prefer a mild oregano taste, use half the amount of dried oregano.
        • Seasonings: An easy and simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper enhances those fresh summer vegetables.
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        Salad Ingredients:

        • Fresh Cucumbers: I love Persian cucumbers for their delicate flavor, crunchy texture, and thinner skin. That being said, English cucumbers have fewer seeds and can also be used in this cucumber tomato feta cheese salad recipe. If you can’t find either one, regular cucumbers can also be used.
        • Fresh Tomatoes: This recipe would work with any type of tomato. During the summer months, I usually use cherry tomatoes, grape tomatoes, or colorful heirloom tomatoes. However, other tomatoes, such as vine-ripened or Roma tomatoes, would also work.
        • Onions: Thinly sliced red onion provides color and flavor. If you do not prefer the taste of raw onion, thinly slice one bunch of green onion for a milder onion flavor.
        • Olives: Greek Kalamata olives are a classic when making this Mediterranean cucumber tomato salad, but black olives are a great substitute. If you are not a fan, you can leave them out.
        • Fresh herbs: I kept it simple with fresh parsley, but you can toss in any fresh herb available in your kitchen, including fresh mint, fresh dill, or fresh basil.
        • Crumbled feta cheese: Tangy feta cheese is the crowning glory of this healthy feta salad and it adds a creamy, salty brininess. Fresh feta can be found in the cheese section of the grocery store. If you are not a fan of salads with feta cheese, you can leave it out.

        Optional Add-Ins and Variations

        As it is with any iconic recipe, the authentic Greek Salad everyone seems to love can be customized with various (optional) add-ins and substitutions. Below are a few that I tried and recommend:

        • Dressing: While my Greek cucumber salad dressing is pretty basic, you can take it up a notch by using my Lemon Salad Dressing (with Dijon mustard), Red Wine Vinaigrette, or Lemon Balsamic Dressing.
        • Sweetener: Adding a small amount of sugar helps with balancing out the acidity. I like adding a small amount of honey or maple syrup. If that sounds good to you, make this recipe with my Mediterranean Salad Dressing.
        • Bell pepper: Toss in thinly sliced green or red bell peppers, or roasted red peppers.
        • Capers/Pepperoncini: Toss in a handful of drained and rinsed capers or sliced pepperoncini.
        • Salad greens: While leafy greens are not traditionally added to classic Greek salad, you can certainly pile all the ingredients on top of your favorite salad greens, such as romaine lettuce, mixed greens, or baby spinach.

        How to Make Greek Cucumber Salad?

        I love making this Greek cucumber tomato feta salad because all it takes is a quick whisk of the easy homemade Greek salad dressing and a few minutes of chopping the fresh veggies. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        A collage of images showing how to make the tomato cucumber Greek salad recipe.
        1. Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together olive oil, lemon juice (or vinegar), garlic, oregano, salt, and pepper until combined. Alternatively, you can place everything in a mason jar and shake vigorously.
        2. Assemble salad ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, place sliced cucumbers, tomatoes, red onion, olives, parsley, and crumbled feta cheese.
        3. Toss: Drizzle it with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
        4. Serve: Enjoy immediately or cover and store in the fridge until ready to serve.

        Make Ahead and Storage Instructions

        This tomato cuke feta salad is great for making ahead as long as you store the ingredients properly. Prep the ingredients a couple of hours (or up to a day) ahead of time to maintain the integrity of the vegetables. Here’s how I do it:

        • Make Ahead: Dice the vegetables into bite-sized pieces, then store them separately in an airtight container in the fridge. Crumble or cube the feta and store it in a separate container in the refrigerator. Assemble the dressing and keep it refrigerated in a mason jar. When ready to serve, assemble the prepared veggies and cheese, give the dressing a good shake, toss, and enjoy.
        • Storage: Leftover dressed cucumber Greek salad can be stored for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the refrigerator.

        What to Serve with this Cucumber Tomato Greek Salad?

        This is a great side dish to bring to all your summer barbecues, yet equally delicious to enjoy at home as a main course with grilled protein for a full meal. Some of my favorite ways to serve this cucumber tomato and feta salad include:

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        While this recipe is pretty straightforward and easy, I’d like to point out a few helpful tips for the best results on your first try:

        • Cut vegetables roughly the same size: Slicing and dicing the vegetables about the same size ensures you get each one of the vegetables in every bite.
        • Rest for 15 minutes: For the best flavor, let the cucumber and tomato salad rest for 15 minutes before enjoying it to allow the ingredients to meld together.
        • Pay attention to feta cheese and salt: Different brands of feta cheese will be saltier than others. I like to make the dressing, add the feta, toss it all together, then taste and add any additional salt, if necessary.
        • Tomatoes and cucumbers will release their juices: The water from the fresh tomatoes and cucumbers will naturally release when you add the dressing. If you prefer, you can serve the salad with a slotted spoon to hold back the excess water.

        FAQs

        What is the dressing made of in a traditional Greek salad?

        The traditional Greek salad dressing is made with good-quality extra virgin olive oil, lemon juice (or red wine vinegar), fresh garlic, fresh oregano, salt, and black pepper.

        What is the difference between Greek salad and Italian salad?

        Greek salad focuses on simplicity, using fresh vegetables, a simple dressing, salty feta cheese, and olives. Italian salad is more herbaceous and savory, thanks to a wider variety of vegetables, a more complex dressing, and different cheese options.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Like:

        If you make this Easy Greek Cucumber Salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Greek cucumber tomato salad in a bowl with serving spoons on the side.
        Print

        Greek Cucumber Salad Recipe

        This vibrant Greek Cucumber salad recipe combines crunchy cucumbers, juicy tomatoes, and creamy feta cheese with a zesty dressing, perfect as a refreshing side or light meal.
        Course Salad, Side Dish – Salad
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 311kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Dressing:

        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
        • 1 clove garlic minced or pressed
        • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano or ½ teaspoon dried oregano
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Salad:

        • 6 Persian cucumbers peeled and diced or 1 English cucumber
        • 3 cups cherry tomatoes cut in half or 4-5 Roma tomatoes – 15 oz.
        • ¼ cup sliced red onion thinly sliced
        • 1 cup Kalamata olives pitted and sliced
        • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
        • 1 cup feta cheese crumbled

        Instructions

        • To make the salad dressing, whisk together olive oil, lemon juice (or vinegar), garlic, oregano, salt, and pepper in a small bowl until well combined. Alternatively, you can put everything in a mason jar and shake vigorously.
        • Place cucumbers, tomatoes, red onion, olives, parsley, and feta cheese in a large bowl.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss to combine.
        • Serve right away or store in the fridge until ready to serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe (depending on the size of your vegetables) makes about 6-7 cups of cucumber and tomato salad, which is ideal for four servings. The nutritional information below is per serving.
        • Adding Salt: Be sure to taste your feta cheese before adding more salt to the recipe. Some brands tend to be saltier than others, so it is best to give it a taste.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be kept in an airtight container for up to 2 days. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 311kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 33mg | Sodium: 1553mg | Potassium: 463mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1252IU | Vitamin C: 38mg | Calcium: 247mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/feed/ 1
        Pesto Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/#comments Wed, 17 Jul 2024 18:46:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=52273 Why Should You Make This Recipe? Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of.…]]>

        Why Should You Make This Recipe?

        Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of. This vinaigrette is easy, fresh, and pairs well with dozens of delicious dishes. 

        • This 5-minute pesto vinaigrette recipe is a great way to use fresh basil, especially if you’re growing your own fresh herbs. Who can resist natural ingredients?
        • Elevate any dish with ease when you top it with this herby and robust dressing. Whether you use pesto sauce for salad (or pasta salad!), to drizzle on pizza, or even to top grilled meat, your tastebuds will thank you.
        Basil Pesto Salad dressing in a jar

        Ingredients

        For this pesto dressing recipe, you will need:

        • Fresh basil leaves: It goes without saying your basil should be fresh and free of any bruises. I used green basil here, but you can use purple basil if you prefer.
        • Pine nuts: If you have the time, toasting your pine nuts in an empty skillet for 3-4 minutes will produce a rich, earthy vinaigrette.
        • Fresh garlic cloves
        • Acid: White wine vinegar and fresh lemon juice
        • Parmesan cheese
        • Kosher salt and black pepper
        • Extra virgin olive oil
        Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette ingredients from the top view.

        Substitutions & Variations

        • Nuts: Don’t have any pine nuts on hand? No problem! Swap out your pine nuts for almonds or walnuts for an easy substitution.
        • Vinegar: Give your pesto vinaigrette sweeter, sharper, or more robust undertones by swapping out which vinegar you use. Simply substitute your white wine vinegar with an equal amount of red wine vinegar or balsamic vinegar for a delectable Pesto Balsamic Dressing.
        • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought or homemade pesto, white wine vinegar, and parmesan cheese. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
        • Copycat Sweetgreen Pesto recipe: If you have ever dined at one of the Sweetgreen restaurant locations, you probably already know about their pesto dressing. It seems like Sweetgreen’s Pesto Vinaigrette recipe is very similar to mine, except that they use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of dDijon mustard to your basic lemon pesto dressing.
        • Make it vegan: To make a vegan version of this delicious recipe, all you need to do is use vegan parmesan. For a homemade substitution, I suggest using this recipe for vegan parmesan or an equal amount of nutritional yeast.
        • Sweetener: A teaspoon of honey or maple syrup can be added to balance out the acidity and earthy flavors coming from the vinegar and fresh basil leaves.

        How to Make Pesto Vinaigrette

        This 5-minute recipe for classic basil pesto dressing is as easy as it is fresh, and it comes together in just three steps.

        a collage of photos showing how to make pesto vinaigrette
        1. Chop/Pulse the ingredients in a food processor: Place all the ingredients except the olive oil (i.e., fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper) into a food processor (or a blender). Pulse the mixture 4-5 times for a rough chop.
        2. Add the olive oil: Turn on the food processor and, while it runs, drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop the machine 1-2 times while mixing to scrape the bowl’s sides. Continue running your food processor until the salad dressing is creamy (approx. 45 seconds).
        3. Season and serve: Taste your pesto salad sauce and add any additional seasoning. Give the mixture one more pulse, and then serve.

        How to Store

        This pesto salad dressing recipe is a delicious addition to any meal. With these simple storage tips, you can keep your leftover vinaigrette fresh for days.

        • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the refrigirator. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
        • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

        Recipe Ideas to Use

        Basil pesto vinaigrette is a delicious dressing that goes with just about anything. This topping adds a sumptuous flavor to countless dishes, from leafy green salads to hearty mains.

        pasta salad in bowl using this basil salad dressing

        Expert Tips

        • Texture: Feel free to adjust the consistency and texture by processing (or blending) longer or shorter. I like it to have a pourable consistency, but you can always process it less if you prefer it to be more like a sauce.
        • Emulsify: You can process everything all at once, but taking the time to drizzle the olive oil over the tube after processing the rest of the ingredients will help the dressing blend well and result in a creamier vinaigrette.
        • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to taste it before serving and adjust the amount of acid and seasoning as needed.

        FAQs

        Pesto vinaigrette dressing is easy enough for even beginner chefs to prepare. Still, you can become an expert saucier in no time with these helpful FAQs!

        What is pesto vinaigrette?

        Pesto vinaigrette is a dressing that combines the classic elements of a pesto recipe (e.g., fresh basil, pine nuts, and parmesan cheese) with vinegar and lemon juice.

        How to turn pesto into salad dressing?

        For an easy pesto vinaigrette salad dressing, mix ½ cup of leftover pesto, ¼ cup of white wine vinegar, and ¼ cup of parmesan cheese. It’s that easy!

        What is in Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette?

        Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette is made with apple cider vinegar, fresh basil, garlic, dijon mustard, parmesan cheese, pine nuts, and salt and pepper.

        What is pesto dressing made of?

        This basil pesto salad dressing recipe consists of fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, minced garlic, white wine vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, pepper, and olive oil.

        Other Homemade Salad Dressing You Might Like:

        If you try this Pesto Vinaigrette recipe or any other one of my homemade salad dressing recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Pesto Vinaigrette in a spoon
        Print

        Pesto Vinaigrette Recipe

        Learn how to make pesto vinaigrette recipe to use in salads, sandwiches, and more. Made with basic pantry staples, this basil salad dressing is easy and quick to make.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine American/Italian
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 254kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 ½ cups fresh basil leaves loosely packed
        • cup pine nuts or sliced almonds
        • 2 small cloves garlic minced
        • 2 tablespoons white wine vinegar
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 2 tablespoons shredded parmesan cheese
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt*
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper into the bowl of a food processor*. Pulse 4-5 times to give them a rough chop.
        • Turn the machine on and while it is running drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop and scrape once or twice and continue running the machine until the salad dressing is creamy, 45 seconds or so.
        • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Give it one more pulse and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields 2/3 cup pesto salad dressing that is ideal for 4 servings (about 3 tablespoon each.)
        • Amount of salt used: This is one of those recipes that you want to taste as you go. I listed 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt, but please give it a taste before serving to make sure that it is properly seasoned to your taste.
        • Blender: If you do not have a food processor, you can use a blender.
        • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought pesto. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
        • Pesto Vinaigrette Sweetgreen Recipe: For a version similar to Sweetgreen’s pesto vinaigrette recipe, use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of Dijon mustard.
        • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the fridge. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
        • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 254kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 336mg | Potassium: 121mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 501IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 45mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/feed/ 2
        Red Wine Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/#comments Wed, 17 Jul 2024 14:48:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77071 If you are ready to skip the store-bought dressings and dive into the homemade salad dressings made from scratch with…]]>

        If you are ready to skip the store-bought dressings and dive into the homemade salad dressings made from scratch with basic pantry staples, you have come to the right place. This red wine vinegar dressing recipe is super versatile and exceptionally delicious. It is the dressing you would find at your favorite Italian restaurant or even bigger chain restaurants like Quiznos or Sweetgreen.

        If you love making homemade dressings as much as we do, be sure to check out our Lemon Vinaigrette and Maple Dijon Dressing.

        Salad dressing with red wine vinegar and olive oil in a jar with a spoon.

        Ingredients

        The secret to a good vinaigrette is to use good-quality ingredients. Most store-bought dressings fall short because they use canola oil and artificial flavors. Conversely, our classic red wine vinaigrette recipe requires six simple ingredients that are easy to find at the grocery store if you don’t already have them in your kitchen. Here’s a look at the ingredient list:

        Ingredients for olive oil red wine vinegar dressing.
        • Red wine vinegar: I have found the best red wine vinegar for salad dressing is one that is not too acidic (with an acidity level of 6-7%), made with natural ingredients without any artificial flavors, and offers a rich and complex flavor with slightly tangy and sweet notes. My favorite red wine vinegar brand is Napa Valley (affiliate link). It is made from organic oak-aged red wines. With that being said, any red wine vinegar that you enjoy using in your cooking would work in this recipe. Feel free to use your favorite brand based on your taste preference and price point.
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Fresh minced garlic provides the best flavor, but you can use ¼ – ½ teaspoon garlic powder instead.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard is the secret ingredient that helps emulsify the olive oil red wine vinegar dressing. Dijon mustard is a classic, but you can also use regular, country-style, or whole-grain mustard.
        • Honey: Honey adds a touch of natural sweetness, which helps to balance the acidity. Real maple syrup or agave nectar are great vegan options.
        • Oregano: This red wine vinegar vinaigrette recipe can be made with fresh or dried oregano. Some people consider fresh oregano quite potent and sometimes hard to come by. If you feel that way, ¼ teaspoons of dried oregano is a delicious alternative.
        • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper allows the red wine vinegar to shine.
        • Extra-virgin olive oil: For the best flavor in this homemade dressing, use good-quality extra virgin olive oil. 

        Optional Add-In’s & Variations

        While this red wine vinegar salad dressing recipe is delicious as written, you can swap out one or two ingredients or amp up the flavor based on your taste preferences. You could try:

        • Other kinds of vinegar: For a tangy flavor, you can swap a portion of red wine vinegar (perhaps half and half) for some balsamic vinegar. If you prefer the crisp flavors of white wine vinegar, you can substitute it for red wine vinegar. For a lighter (no alcohol) version, you can also use apple cider vinegar.
        • Parmesan cheese: If you like the classic Italian flavors, add ¼ cup of finely grated Parmesan cheese for a delicious, cheesy addition.
        • Fresh herbs: While I think fresh oregano complements this red vinegar salad dressing best, use any fresh herbs in your fridge, including fresh basil, fresh parsley, or fresh chives.
        • Citrus: Add even more tang with fresh lemon juice or orange juice for a bright, citrusy flavor.
        • Additional seasonings: To make it even more Italian, replace the oregano with ¼ – ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning blend.
        • Mayo / Greek yogurt: Add 1-2 tablespoons of mayo or Greek yogurt to make it creamy.

        How to Make Red Wine Vinaigrette?

        Homemade red wine vinaigrette can be made in one of two ways. Either using a bowl and a whisk or shaking it up in a mason jar. Here are the step-by-step instructions for each method:

        Steps showing how to make salad dressing with red wine vinegar.
        1. Whisk ingredients: In a small bowl, whisk together the red wine vinegar, garlic, Dijon mustard, honey, oregano, Kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
        2. Add olive oil: While still whisking, slowly add the olive oil in a steady stream. Continue whisking until slightly thickened, silky, and smooth. Alternatively, you can place all the ingredients in a mason jar, seal it with a tight-fitting lid, and shake vigorously until it is silky smooth.
        3. Taste test: Taste for seasoning, adding more salt or vinegar as needed.

        Ways to Use This Red Wine Vinegar Dressing

        I must admit that a salad dressing made with red wine vinegar and olive oil compliments nearly any kind of salad. Whip up a recipe, and this dressing will make it shine. But because it is so versatile, there are so many different ways you can use this red wine dressing, including:

        • Fresh Greens: Toss it over simple green salads like Spring Mix Salad or a sweet and salty salad combo of baby arugula, sliced red onion, dried cherries, walnuts or pecans, and feta cheese.
        • Vegetable Salads: Use it as the dressing component for Turkish Bean Salad or Greek Cucumber Salad for extra zing and tang.
        • Pasta Salad / Grain Salads: Go for a heartier side dish by tossing this red vinaigrette dressing over pasta salads and grain salads, such as my Quinoa Feta Chickpea Salad or Avocado Quinoa Salad.
        • Roasted or Grilled Vegetables: Drizzle over any cooked veggies to brighten and season them with tangy flavors. Try it on my Grilled Eggplant, Roasted Asparagus, or Air Fryer Green Beans.
        • Marinade for Meat or Tofu: Use it for your favorite protein, such as beef, pork, lamb, chicken, or tofu. Allow it to sit for a few hours in the refrigerator to allow the zippy, tangy flavors to sink in.
        • Brush onto Seafood or Fish: Use it as a fast and flavorful sauce by brushing onto fish filets, grilled shrimp skewers, or scallops before (or after) cooking.
        • Sandwiches and Wraps: Drizzle it on top of any sandwich or wrap for a tangy kick. It’s especially delicious when served on Chicken Caprese Sandwiches or Chicken Pita Wraps (instead of tzatziki).

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Here are some of my expert tips for the best red wine vinaigrette recipe:

        • Emulsifying: While shaking all the ingredients in a mason jar is a simple approach, achieving a perfectly creamy red wine vinaigrette requires a bit more technique. When using Dijon mustard, it’s best to whisk the vinegar and mustard together first. Then, gradually drizzle in the oil while continuing to whisk constantly. This method allows the natural compounds in the mustard to effectively bind with both the water and oil, stabilizing the emulsion and preventing the dressing from separating.
        • Shake well before using: With that being said, the vinegar and oil will naturally separate as it sits over time, so it is best to give it a good shake or whisk before serving.
        • Serve at room temperature: The flavors and viscosity of the olive oil are best enjoyed at room temperature. If the salad dressing has been in the refrigerator for a while, take it out 5-10 minutes before using it in your recipe.
        • Olive oil red wine vinegar dressing ratio: After testing this recipe multiple times, we found the best ratio of oil to vinegar was 2:1 (½ cup olive oil to ¼ cup vinegar).
        Red wine vinegar oil salad dressing in a jar with a spoon on the side.

        FAQs

        Does red wine vinaigrette have alcohol?

        Yes, it does, but it contains a very tiny amount of alcohol. According to American Vinegar Works, during the production of red wine vinegar, bacteria eat away at the wine to convert it to vinegar, consuming most of the alcohol in the process. However, in the end, a small amount of alcohol might still remain.

        What is the difference between red wine vinaigrette and vinegar?

        Red wine vinaigrette is an emulsified dressing with olive oil, mustard, and additional seasonings like garlic and herbs. On the other hand, red wine vinegar is plain vinegar on its own.

        How long does red wine vinaigrette last in the fridge?

        Our homemade red wine vinegar salad dressing will keep for 1 week in the fridge when stored in an airtight container or mason jar with a tight-fitting lid.

        If you make this red wine vinegar oil salad dressing recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Red wine vinaigrette recipe with a spoon.
        Print

        Red Wine Vinaigrette Recipe

        This is an all-purpose red wine vinaigrette recipe that you can use as a salad dressing, drizzle for roasted or grilled veggies, marinade for meat (or tofu), and more. All you need is 5 minutes and 6 basic ingredients.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 167kcal

        Ingredients

        • ¼ cup red wine vinegar
        • ½ cup olive oil
        • 1 clove garlic grated or pressed
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon honey
        • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – I used ¼ teaspoon dried
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • In a small bowl (or a mason jar), whisk the red wine vinegar, garlic, Dijon mustard, honey, oregano, kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
        • While still whisking, slowly add the olive oil and continue whisking until fully incorporated*.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed before using it in your recipe.

        Notes

        • Yields: This red wine vinaigrette dressing recipe makes ¾ cups and is ideal for six servings, each serving around two tablespoons.
        • Make it in a jar: While I think whisking oil into the red vinegar and mustard mixture produces the most creamy dressing, you can also put everything in a mason jar, cover it tightly with the lid and shake vigorously.
        • Storage: You can store your vinaigrette in a mason jar (or an airtight container) for up to one week. The olive oil will naturally solidify in the refrigerator, so give it a good stir or whisk before serving.
        • Freeze: Freeze the dressing in a freezer-safe container for up to 1 month. Thaw to room temperature on the kitchen counter.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 167kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 398mg | Potassium: 12mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 6IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/feed/ 7
        Harissa Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:26:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76802 In this simple guide, I’ll teach you how to make a restaurant-quality harissa vinaigrette dressing, including preparation tips, tasty uses,…]]>

        In this simple guide, I’ll teach you how to make a restaurant-quality harissa vinaigrette dressing, including preparation tips, tasty uses, and storage guides.

        Cava copycat hot harissa vinaigrette in a glass jar with a spoon.

        What is Harissa Dressing Made Of?

        The best way to capture the bright flavors of CAVA’s hot harissa vinaigrette is by using the right ingredients—fresh, flavorful, and already in your pantry!

        Ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view.
        • Olive oil: Though a little more expensive, high-quality extra virgin olive oil is excellent for vinaigrettes due to its richness and depth. (Remember: Olive oil plays a big part in vinaigrette recipes!) Still, any olive oil will work as long as you like its flavor.
        • Lemon juice or vinegar: I recommend using fresh lemon juice due to its bright, citrusy overtones. However, if you want sharper, more acidic notes in your harissa vinaigrette, you can use red wine vinegar or white wine vinegar instead.
        • Harissa: This recipe works with both harissa sauce (or paste) and harissa powder. You can also make harissa paste from powder. Regardless of your choice, I suggest making them from scratch due to their more vibrant, fresh, and customizable flavors. However, you can also purchase store-bought versions for simpler meal prep. In particular, I love brands like NY Shuk, Mina, and Whole Foods, though you should be able to find more harissa products in the “international” or “ethnic” sections of local grocery stores.
        • Honey: Honey is the key to giving harissa salad dressing a beautiful balance of “heat and sweet,” though you may also use maple syrup or agave syrup for a vegan version.
        • Garlic: Be sure to grate or press your fresh garlic before adding it to your recipe. Otherwise, the garlic won’t properly infuse the dressing with its flavors.
        • Seasoning: Kosher salt and ground black pepper are all that’s necessary to bring out the savory tones of this all-natural harissa vinaigrette recipe.

        Optional Add-Ins

        How you customize your harissa salad dressing depends on your brand of harissa. Some store-bought brands—like Trader Joe’s—tend to have a hotter flavor profile, while others—like Whole Foods—are a little milder. 

        In short, taste your harissa sauce and consider your final dish before adjusting your recipe!

        • Spicier: Want to kick up the heat of this CAVA copycat recipe? Try adding a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes to your mix. Depending on the brand of harissa you are using, you can also add cumin for an added layer of warmth. If you are making it from scratch following our recipe, I do not recommend adding more, but of course, you can give your harissa a taste and decide for yourself.
        • Herbal flavors: If you prefer an earthier, lighter taste in your harissa dressing, try adding a shake of dried oregano or dried mint to your recipe.
        • Greek yogurt: Though not traditional, you can make a creamy harissa dressing by adding Greek yogurt to your recipe. Not only does this ingredient lend the mixture a nice tang, but it’s also a great way to lighten up its flavor profile for those who want a not-too-spicy harissa vinaigrette.

        How to Make Harissa Vinaigrette?

        You can make hot harissa vinaigrette in three simple steps, bringing spicy, Middle Eastern flavors to any meal. And the best part, you ask? It takes less than 5 minutes to make.

        A collage of images showing how to make harissa vinaigrette.
        1. Add the ingredients: Place the olive oil, lemon juice, harissa sauce (or powder), honey, garlic, kosher salt, and black pepper to a mason jar with a tight-fitting lid.
        2. Mix: Cover the jar and shake it for 30 seconds or until emulsified. Taste for seasoning and adjust as necessary.
        3. Serve or store: Refrigerate the vinaigrette or use it immediately in your desired recipe. Be sure to shake the mixture after storage to ensure a well-integrated mixture.

        How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

        • Store: You can store your harissa vinaigrette in an airtight container or glass jar in the refrigerator for up to one week. Remember to shake the mixture well before using it to help reintegrate any separated ingredients.
        • Freeze: For extra-long storage, freeze this recipe in a freezer-safe, airtight container for up to one month. Leave enough room in your chosen container for the vinaigrette to expand.
        • Thaw: To thaw your frozen harissa dressing, put it in the refrigerator overnight.

        How to Use Harissa Vinaigrette?

        Lighter and tangier than traditional harissa, this delicious condiment works pretty much anywhere you want that hot harissa taste. Below are a few of my favorite ways to add a bold flavor to any weekday menu.

        • Salad dressing: No one can resist a classic. Using harissa dressing for salad is a no-brainer, especially since it strikes such a tasty balance with the crispness of leafy green salads. This vinaigrette pairs impeccably with the refreshing cucumber and tomatoes in my Spring Mix Salad. Or, you can balance this spicy condiment with the rich creaminess of my Butter Lettuce Salad or Massaged Kale Salad with Avocado—especially when topped with a crumble of feta cheese.
        • Grain bowls: Want to learn how to make CAVA at home? Grain bowls are a staple of this Mediterranean restaurant chain—a clear reason why I love using this copycat vinaigrette for dishes like my vegan Quinoa Power Bowl and gluten-free Quinoa Sweet Potato Bowl.
        • Sandwiches and wraps: This harissa vinaigrette doesn’t just work in bowls. It’s also a mouthwatering blend for sandwiches and wraps—whether you drizzle it over the spread or use it as a dipping sauce.
        • Roasted vegetables: Equal parts nutritious and flavorful, this easy vinaigrette makes the perfect addition to roasted veggies. Drizzle it over tender dishes like Baked Eggplant Slices, sweet Roasted Maple Carrots, and hearty Air Fried Red Potatoes, and you’ll never have a bland side dish again.
        • Roasted and grilled meats & seafood: You can lend any protein a delicious spice by serving this vinaigrette with dishes, such as my succulent Grilled Salmon, Steak Kabobs in Oven, and Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast. Use this dressing like your other go-to dips and serve it on the side, or use it as a drizzle for a well-infused smokiness.
        • Use it as a marinade: Out of all the CAVA dressing recipes, this is one of my favorites for meat marinades. Simply add ¼ cup of harissa vinaigrette to your favorite marinade recipe (especially my tangy Chicken Marinade with Yogurt, zesty Shrimp Marinade, and savory Turkey Tenderloin Marinade!) and add more as necessary.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        If you want the flavors of the authentic hot harissa vinaigrette, below are a few helpful tips for getting the best flavor, consistency, and use from this five-star dressing.

        • Powder vs. sauce: Though both will work, during our recipe testing, we thought the harissa sauce performed better when making this vinaigrette. Powder tends to sink at the bottom as it sits, while sauce blends better (depending on the brand you use, of course). If your only option is harissa powder, be sure to shake it vigorously before using it in your recipe.
        • Adjust seasoning and sweetness: Because this dressing recipe can be customized in many ways, you must taste it for seasoning. Consider, too, what kind of dish you plan to make, and adjust your dressing’s ingredient ratios to make the best match. For instance, you can make a sweet honey harissa vinaigrette by increasing the amount of honey you use.
        • Shake well before use: Letting your harissa dressing rest for 20 minutes is an easy way to help its flavors infuse and develop. However, as with any vinaigrette, this recipe’s ingredients tend to separate as it sits. Therefore, you must whisk or shake it well before using it.

        FAQs

        What is harissa dressing?

        Harissa dressing is a spicy, light vinaigrette popularized by the Mediterranean restaurant chain CAVA. This dressing gets its primary flavors from harissa—a chili-based condiment that originated in Tunisia. However, it also contains rich, citrusy notes from other ingredients like lemon juice and garlic.

        What is the difference between harissa sauce and harissa vinaigrette?

        Of course, both recipes boast a hot, smoky taste due to their use of chili peppers, spices, and herbs. However, harissa sauce is an ingredient in harissa vinaigrette, with a more concentrated flavor and thicker consistency. The vinaigrette version is a thinner, lighter, and less intense mixture, as it has an olive oil base and other ingredients like lemon juice, vinegar, and honey.

        Other CAVA-Inspired Dressing Recipes

        If you make this hot harissa vinaigrette recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Harissa vinaigrette in a jar with a spoon.
        Print

        Harissa Vinaigrette Recipe

        Hot harissa vinaigrette is the ultimate condiment for anyone craving the spicy and smoky flavors of harissa. In just five minutes and with a handful of ingredients, you can take any dish—grain bowls, veggies, salads, and beyond—to the next level.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 146kcal

        Ingredients

        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons harissa sauce or 1 tablespoon harissa powder
        • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup or agave nectar for a vegan option
        • 1 clove garlic grated or pressed
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground

        Instructions

        • Combine the olive oil, lemon juice, harissa sauce (or powder), honey, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a mason jar.
        • Cover and shake until emulsified, about 30 seconds. Adjust seasoning to your desired taste.
        • Use right away or store in the fridge until ready to use. Be sure to shake before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 1/2 cup harissa vinaigrette. I listed 4 servings because you can use it in a salad or grain bowl recipe that serves 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Storage: Place leftovers in a mason jar (or any other airtight container) and keep them in the fridge for up to a week.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this dressing in a freezer-safe container for up to a month. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 146kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 392mg | Potassium: 47mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 52IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/feed/ 4
        Mango Avocado Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/#respond Sat, 29 Jun 2024 15:28:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=54258 Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads.…]]>

        Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads. While I think that creamy avocado and ripe mango are a match made in heaven, avocado is also the perfect addition to other fruit salads. Try this Peach Avocado Salad or Watermelon and Avocado Salad for a refreshing twist. Readers also love my Kale Avocado Salad or this Avocado Quinoa Salad for a more savory option. 

        And if you have some leftover mangoes, try our Pineapple Mango Salsa.

        Avocado Mango Salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

        Why You’ll Love This Mango Salad?

        I know you’ll love this mango and avocado salad as much as I do! Here’s why:

        • Quick, easy, and nutrient-dense: Healthy has never been easier! Throw this simple salad together in 15 minutes for your daily dose of essential fatty acids and vitamin-C
        • The ideal accompaniment to grilled favorites: This salad pairs perfectly with fish tacos, grilled seafood, meats, and other main dishes. Or, serve it as a mango salsa with your favorite tortilla chip as a quick appetizer! 
        • Bursting with refreshing summer flavor: Like our other summer salads, this fresh fruity salad is the perfect way to cool off on a hot summer day. 

        Ingredients for Avocado Mango Salad

        To make this mango salad with avocado, you’ll need two sets of simple ingredients. The dressing consists of a few well-loved, familiar pantry items and the salad consists of a handful of fresh produce from your local farmer’s market or grocery store. 

        Avocado mango dressing ingredients from the top view.

        For the chili lime dressing, you will need:

        • Extra virgin olive oil
        • Lime juice and lime zest
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Be sure to mince it finely.
        • Spices & seasonings: Ground cumin, chili powder, and kosher salt.
        • Sweetener: You can use honey or maple syrup interchangeably in this mango avocado salad dressing.
        Mango salad ingredients from the top view.

        To make the recipe for mango salad, gather:

        • Avocados: Use ripe but firm avocados. This way, they won’t get mushy when cut into cubes and incorporated into the salad.
        • Mangoes: I recommend using juicy ripened mangoes for this recipe. I usually buy them a few days before I plan to make it and keep them on the counter to ripen.
        • Red Onion: You need only a small, thinly sliced red onion. For a lighter taste, you can also use green onions.
        • Jalapeno peppers: Deseed and chop your peppers finely. If you prefer your mango salad to be spicy, you can incorporate some of the seeds into the salad. Alternatively, you can also use a red bell pepper.
        • Fresh cilantro: I know that Mango Salad with cilantro might not be everybody’s cup of tea. If that is you, feel free to swap it with other fresh herbs like parsley or mint to pack an aromatic punch. 

        Substitutions and Possible Additions

        • Dressing: If a spicy mango avocado salad isn’t your thing, try this Balsamic Lemon Dressing for a tangy, balsamic vinegar-based salad addition with fresh lemon juice.
        • Nuts & Seeds: For a salty crunch that beautifully balances the sweetness of the mango, try adding a handful of pumpkin seeds or chopped walnuts. 
        • Other produce: Create endless salad varieties with any fresh summer produce you have on hand. Turn this recipe into a Mango Avocado Tomato Salad by tossing in a cup of cherry tomatoes, or throw in a cup of diced English cucumber for some extra crunch. 
        • Salad greens: To turn this into a green salad with mango and avocado, add spring mix, butter lettuce, arugula, or any of your favorite leafy greens. 
        • Cheese: Top it off with 1/2 cup of cotija cheese, feta or even goat cheese for some salty umami flavor.
        • Add in some protein: Looking for a good protein source to make this salad more filling? Try adding a few grilled or baked chicken breasts for a delicious copycat version of the fan-favorite Cheesecake Factory salad with mango and avocado. Or if you have the grill on, top it off with grilled shrimp on top.

        How to Make Mango Salad?

        With a little bit of chopping and a gentle toss of the ingredients, this delicious avo mango salad comes together in the blink of an eye and is sure to impress at any summer gathering. Simply:

        Person showing how to make mango avocado salad in a collage of images.
        1. Make the dressing: Add all ingredients into a mason jar. Screw on the lid tightly and shake until thoroughly combined. 
        2. Assemble the salad: Grab a large bowl and add in your cubed avocado, chunks of fresh mango, sliced red onion, chopped jalapeño (optional), and freshly chopped cilantro. 
        3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss it gently until just combined. 
        4. Season: Season to taste with salt and black pepper, if necessary. Enjoy!

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

        • Dressing: To make this recipe come together quickly, you can make the dressing a day in advance. Simply combine all ingredients in a mason jar and place in the fridge. 
        • Prep: Avocado is difficult to prep ahead of time because it can quickly turn an unappealing brown color once cut. I recommend chopping up the ripe avocado and the rest of the ingredients as soon as you’re ready to assemble the salad. You can, however, prep the mango and jalapeño in advance, but be sure to store them in an airtight container in the fridge. 
        • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days. 

        What to Serve it With?

        A salad this versatile, refreshing, and vibrant is sure to brighten up your favorite summer main dish. Here are some serving suggestions:

        • Serve it as a great addition to taco night: Looking for ways to amp up your Taco Tuesday? Impress your family by pairing this salad with Brisket Tacos, Flank Steak Tacos, Black Bean Quinoa Tacos, Blackened Mahi Mahi, or your favorite fish tacos. 
        • Pair it with your favorite grilled seafood: A seafood dish isn’t complete without a refreshing salad! Serve the salad on the side with some of my seafood favorites, such as Grilled Salmon, Shrimp Kabobs, or Grilled Mahi Mahi
        • With chips on the side: Serve the salad with tortilla chips, pita chips, or crackers for a refreshing and flavorful dip perfect for entertaining.
        Salad with mango and avocado in a bowl from the front view.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        While this recipe for avocado and mango salad is super simple and easy, follow these helpful tips to achieve maximum results and flavor!

        • Use ripe fruit: Avocados and mangoes have the best texture and flavor when they’re ripe. Also, it is best if you cut them in bite-sized pieces.
        • Prevent Browning: To prevent the avocado from browning, cut it right before incorporating it into the salad and drizzle it with the lime-based dressing immediately. This not only preserves the color but also enhances the flavor.
        • Ensure your prepped fruit is similar in size: Make sure every bite of your salad is consistent by cutting your mango and avocado into equal-sized cubes or chunks. 
        • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining.

        FAQs

        How do you know if a mango is ripe?

        To tell whether a mango is ripe, use your thumb to apply pressure to the skin gently. If it feels soft or gives slightly, it’s ready! If you’re not quite sure, locate the fruit’s stem and give it a whiff. If it gives off a sweet, fruity aroma, it’s ripe. 

        Is mango skin edible?

        Mango skin is edible, and studies show that the skin contains a variety of health and nutritional benefits. However, keep in mind that eating mango skin may cause allergic reactions or lead to ingesting pesticides or harmful chemicals. The skin is also generally bitter and tough to chew.

        Can you eat this like a mango avocado salsa?

        You sure can. If you prefer it as salsa, I recommend cutting the mango and avocado into smaller cubes so that you can easily scoop them out with a tortilla chip.

        Other Fruit Salads You Might Also Like

        If you loved this mango summer salad, here are some other fruity salad recipes you need to try!

        If you try this delicious Summer Mango Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        mango salad with avocado in a bowl from the top view
        Print

        Mango Avocado Salad Recipe

        This Mango Avocado Salad recipe is made with fresh mango, ripe avocados, and chili lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect side dish for the grilling season.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine Mexican/Southwestern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 4 people
        Calories 358kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Chili Lime Vinaigrette:

        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon of lime zest
        • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon chili powder
        • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon maple syrup/honey

        For The Salad:

        • 2 ripe avocados cut into cubes
        • 2 ripe mangos cut into 1-inch chunks
        • ½ cup red onion thinly sliced – from a small red onion
        • 1 small jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped (optional)
        • ½ cup chopped fresh cilantro

        Instructions

        • Make the dressing by combining everything in a mason jar. Close the lid tightly and give it a shake until all ingredients are thoroughly mixed.
        • Place the cubed avocados, mango chunks, red onion slices, jalapeno, and cilantro in a salad bowl.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a toss to combine.
        • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: The finished salad is about 4 cups with 1 cup per serving.
        • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days.
        • Cut them in similar bite-size chunks: For best results, cut avocado and mango cubes in similar sizes.
        • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 358kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 452mg | Potassium: 743mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 1528IU | Vitamin C: 59mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/feed/ 0
        Turkish Green Beans https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/#comments Wed, 19 Jun 2024 13:57:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6266 There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply…]]>

        There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply put, it is seasonal vegetables like green beans, zucchini, or leeks are cooked in a good amount of olive oil along with summer tomatoes and onion and served at room temperature when their flavor is most prominent.

        This Turkish beans recipe is essentially stewed string beans cooked in a warm skillet until soft, juicy, and melt-in-your-mouth tender. The result is very satisfactory as the low and slow cooking time produces super flavorful beans.

        Turkish stewed green beans drizzled with yogurt sauce in a bowl.

        I know many people enjoy making classic green bean dishes like Air Fryer Green Beans and Garlic Butter Green Beans, but I hope you give this version a try.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        Turkish style braised green beans require just a handful of simple ingredients. We will need the following:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
        • Fresh Green Beans: I used regular green beans you can easily find at the grocery store. However, the most popular green beans in Turkey are runner beans (çalı fasulye) and romano beans or flat beans (Ayşekadın fasulye). If you are lucky, you may be able to spot them at your local farmer’s market during the summer months. But you can use any green bean, including long beans, string beans, or Haricots Verts (French beans), in this recipe.
        • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for a rich, fruity flavor.
        • Onion: Diced onion adds a delicious savory flavor. Feel free to replace the onion with washed and diced leeks instead.
        • Tomato Paste: This is optional, but tomato paste adds a depth of flavor, and it’s how my mom always made them.
        • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves give these string beans an extra punchy bite.
        • Tomatoes: I used canned diced tomatoes with their own juices, which is why this recipe doesn’t include any water. However, if you are using fresh tomatoes (about 2 medium-sized tomatoes), add about ¼ cup water.
        • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper keeps the green beans front and center.
        • Sugar: Do not skip the sugar. This is the secret ingredient that brightens all the flavors and balances the bitterness in the vegetables.
        • Fresh Herbs: Fresh dill is classic, but fresh mint or parsley can be used instead.
        • Lemon Juice: A squeeze of lemon juice right before serving is optional but a welcome addition to brighten up the dish.

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Meat: If you prefer more of a warm one-pot summer meal, you can brown ½ pound ground beef along with the onion and follow the rest of the recipe as written. Alternatively, you can use stew meat. If you go in that direction, be sure to dry the meat thoroughly, season it with salt and pepper, and sear it in the pot using a few tablespoons of olive oil until lightly browned but not fully cooked, 7-8 minutes. Remove onto a platter and follow the recipe as written. Add the browned stew meat back in after adding the green beans, and cook as directed.
        • Beans: It is not traditional, but you can toss in a can of drained and rinsed chickpeas (garbanzo beans) or white beans for an extra dose of plant protein.
        • Spices: You can add additional spices like cumin, red pepper flakes, Aleppo pepper, or paprika.
        • Cinnamon: Some variations of this Turkish bean dish include cinnamon, about ¼ teaspoon or so. My mom never added cinnamon, but I think a small amount would be a welcome addition.
        • Cheese: There is a similar recipe in Greece called fasolakia, which is often served with salty and tangy crumbles of feta cheese. We mostly serve it with a side of thick yogurt, but if you want to follow in the footsteps of the Greeks, you can crumble some feta on top.

        How to Make Turkish Green Beans?

        If you are ready to try something new, I can not imagine a better dish than this stewed green beans recipe. Luckily, it comes together in one pot in just a few easy steps. Simply:

        A collage of images showing how to make Turkish style green beans recipe.
        1. Saute onion: In a medium saute pan or heavy pot (such as a Dutch Oven), heat olive oil over medium-high heat until warm but not smoking. Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, about 5-6 minutes.
        2. Add aromatics: Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for 1 minute.
        3. Add tomatoes and green beans: Next, stir in the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar. Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed.
        4. Cook low and slow: Cover and bring it to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times while cooking.
        Two images showing the finished dish.
        1. Garnish: Stir in the dill. Serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

        Serving Suggestions

        In Turkish tradition, braised green beans and accompanying vegetable dishes are served as a course themselves, before or after a meaty main dish. However, the rich and luxurious textures and flavors from this green bean dish can be served with any of the following:

        Turkish Green Beans served on an oval plate.

        FAQs

        What are Turkish green beans?

        Turkish green beans, also known as zeytinyağlı taze fasulye, are fresh green beans cooked in a tomato sauce made of tomatoes, onions, garlic, and olive oil and slow-simmered until tender.

        What type of green beans should I use?

        Fresh, tender green beans are ideal, but any variety will work, such as string beans, haricots verts, runner beans, or flat beans. For this recipe, avoid frozen and canned green beans.

        Is this dish vegan?

        Yes, Turkish green beans are naturally vegan and vegetarian as they are made with extra virgin olive oil, green beans, tomatoes, onions, garlic, fresh herbs, and seasonings.

        Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Also Like

        If you try this Turkish Style Green Beans recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

        Turkish green beans on a plate garnished with dill.
        Print

        Turkish Green Beans Recipe

        This Turkish-style green beans recipe (Zeytinyagli Taze Fasulye) is a classic Turkish summer dish made by braising green beans with onions, tomatoes, and garlic in plenty of olive oil. It can be served as a side dish with meat or as a light meal by itself.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 45 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 226kcal

        Ingredients

        • 5 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 medium-sized onion chopped (~1 cup)
        • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
        • 2 cloves garlic minced
        • 1 cab diced tomatoes (15-ounce can) or 2 medium tomatoes cut into small cubes
        • 1 pound fresh green beans trimmed and cut in half
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar or coconut sugar
        • ¼ cup fresh dill or parsley

        For Serving (Optional)

        Instructions

        • Heat the oil in a medium-size saute pan or a heavy bottom pan (such as a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat.
        • Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, 5-6 minutes.
        • Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for another minute or so.
        • Add the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar.
        • Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed in the pan. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn the heat to medium-low, and cook until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times during the cooking process.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Stir in the dill and serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

        Notes

        • Yields: This dish makes 6-7 cups of braised green beans, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Preparing the green beans: We used fresh string beans from supermarkets. To prepare them for cooking, simply cut the stem ends off first, then cut them in half, making sure all the beans are roughly the same size. If you are lucky enough to find romano beans or flat beans, you will need to remove the string from the bean. First, snap one end off and pull it all the way down to remove the string. Then repeat on the other side.
        • Cooking times may vary: Keep in mind that the cooking duration may be different depending on the type of green beans you use. Start checking around 25-30 minutes. If they are still crisp, keep cooking until tender.
        • The best part of this recipe is that it stores well and can be made ahead making it ideal for your summer meal prep. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:
          • Make Ahead: The dish can be made up to 2 days in advance and stored, covered, in the fridge. They often taste better the next day. Simply remove from the refrigerator 30 – 45 minutes before serving.
          • Storage: Leftover green beans will keep for up to 4 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Enjoy them cold as a salad or at room temperature.
          • Reheat: If you prefer the green beans warm, reheat them in a skillet over medium heat until warm.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 226kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 622mg | Potassium: 366mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 851IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/feed/ 12
        Lemon Tahini Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/#comments Wed, 12 Jun 2024 14:53:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75894 Rich, smooth, and zesty, this tahini sauce recipe is an easy way to elevate any menu. Looking for more recipes…]]>

        Rich, smooth, and zesty, this tahini sauce recipe is an easy way to elevate any menu. Looking for more recipes with tahini? You’ll love my smoky, savory Baba Ganoush and creamy Hummus—perfect additions to a mezze platter, Mediterranean appetizer, or sandwich spread.

        A spoonful of lemon tahini sauce being drizzled in a jar.

        Lemon Tahini Sauce Ingredients

        This easy tahini sauce recipe requires only five simple ingredients. Below, you’ll discover everything you need to make the creamiest, most vibrant condiment in your cookbook.

        Ingredients for the sauce from the top view.
        • Tahini (aka sesame seed paste): High-quality tahini is essential when making this delicious sauce recipe. You should be able to find premade tahini paste in the Middle Eastern section of your local grocery store, or you can purchase it online (my favorite store-bought tahini is from Soom Foods!). Before using, stir or shake your tahini to avoid unwanted settling, and then store the rest in the refrigerator for up to one week.
        • Lemon juice: I always use fresh lemon juice in this recipe due to its rich, bright taste. However, you can also use store-bought lemon juice, depending on what you have on hand.
        • Garlic: I recommend using finely minced or pressed garlic to ensure its flavors distribute evenly throughout the mixture.
        • Salt
        • Water: Cold water is the key to adjusting this sauce’s consistency.

        Optional Add-Ins

        Turning this simple tahini sauce into a culinary masterpiece is easy with a few optional add-ins. Here are a few that we recommend:

        • Lemon herb tahini sauce: To create a more herbaceous blend, add ½ cups of fresh herbs, such as cilantro or parsley, to your tahini sauce. This variation has an extra-bright flavor and makes an incomparable addition to my vegan Mediterranean Nachos.
        • Seasonings: To make a flavored tahini sauce, add a pinch of other spices. For instance, you can make a turmeric tahini sauce by adding ¼ teaspoon of turmeric powder or play around with different flavors by adding ingredients like cumin, paprika, dill, or black pepper.
        • Sweet tahini cream sauce: Although it’s not a traditional ingredient, you can give this sauce a sweeter finish by adding a tablespoon of honey or maple syrup to the mix.
        • Dijon mustard: Add a teaspoon of Dijon mustard for a nice zing that complements the zesty flavors of this tahini garlic sauce.
        • Olive oil: Tahini paste provides a creamy consistency, but a teaspoon of olive oil can be added to mellow its robust flavor.

        How to Make Tahini Sauce

        There’s no need to stress when learning how to prepare this simple sauce. This iconic Middle Eastern recipe is a cinch, whether you’re a gourmet chef or a kitchen novice.

        A collage of images showing how to prepare tahini sauce.
        1. Mix the ingredients: Place the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, and salt into a small bowl. Whisk the ingredients to the best of your ability, knowing that the mixture will be thick.
        2. Add water: Pour the water into the bowl while still whisking until smooth. You may use more or less water to achieve your desired consistency.
        3. Serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning and add more if necessary. Store it in a mason jar in the refrigerator or use it right away.

        Tahini Sauce Uses

        When deciding what to make with tahini sauce, the options are endless. Below, I’ve listed my favorite uses, from light vegetable sides to hearty main dishes.

        • Dipping sauce: This tahini dip recipe is a must when serving mezze platters and veggie trays. Try serving it alongside a plate of fresh vegetables—like cucumber, carrots, and tomatoes—and you’ll never have to stress over party appetizers again.
        • Shawarma: Since they’re both packed with rich Middle Eastern taste, I love using tahini sauce for shawarma recipes, such as my spiced Chicken Shawarma and succulent Beef Shawarma. You can even use this classic Mediterranean tahini sauce for gyros—the Greek version of shawarma—or transform it into a tahini spread for a flavor-packed wrap or pita pocket. 
        • Grilled meat and fish: This easy recipe pairs beautifully with grilled meat and fish dishes. Try using this tahini sauce for roasted or grilled chicken, lamb, salmon, or your favorite white fish, and prepare for an explosion of earthy, zesty flavors.
        • Drizzle over roasted veggies: Roasted veggies taste out of this world with a drizzle of this lemon tahini recipe. In particular, this sauce makes a delectable addition to savory-sweet dishes like my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes, Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Cauliflower, and Roasted Butternut Squash and Sweet Potatoes.
        • Salads and grain bowls: Another great way to use this creamy sauce is in fresh salads and grain bowls. This sauce works exceptionally well when bringing out the zingy, garden-fresh taste of my Butternut Squash Tahini Salad and Sweet Potato Quinoa Bowl.
        • Falafel: Using sesame tahini sauce for falafel balls is a fantastic option to complement the dish’s herby, nutty taste.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Learning to make tahini sauce from scratch is easy. However, if you want to make the best tahini sauce, these top-notch tips will ensure your recipe is as creamy, flavorful, and rich as possible.

        • Stir tahini before using: Like other natural seed and nut butters, tahini tends to separate during storage, with its oils rising to the top and its solids sinking to the bottom. Therefore, just like you would do with peanut butter, it’s necessary to stir your tahini before adding it to your recipe.
        • Adjust the sauce’s consistency: One of the best ways to make this lemon garlic tahini sauce as versatile as possible is to adjust its consistency. Add more water to your mixture if you want a thinner tahini drizzle—similar to other creamy salad dressings—or use less liquid for a thicker, creamy tahini sauce.
        • Food processor: If you are making a large batch of this sauce, we recommend using a food processor (or a blender) to achieve the ultimate creamy consistency.
        • Resting time: If you have time, I suggest letting the sauce rest for a few minutes before serving. This way, all the ingredients will have time to mix, develop, and infuse the mixture.
        • Experiment with seasoning and add-ins: With so many uses for this easy lemon tahini sauce, I highly recommend playing around with its flavor and consistency to complement your main dish.

        FAQs

        What is tahini sauce made of?

        Traditional Mediterranean tahini sauce comes together with a few main ingredients: tahini (a creamy paste made from ground sesame seeds), lemon juice, salt, and water. However, there are many variations on this classic Middle Eastern condiment, including those that add extra flavors with fresh garlic, cumin, parsley, cilantro, and more.

        What does tahini sauce taste like?

        Tahini sauce has a deliciously complex flavor profile, making it an ideal condiment for countless dishes. Tangy, savory, earthy, and mildly bitter, this classic Middle Eastern sauce tastes as great alongside shawarma as it does with a bowl of greens.

        What does tahini sauce look like?

        Generally, tahini sesame sauce has a light tan color with a yellowish tint, depending on the amount of lemon juice or garlic added to the mixture. The sauce is also known for its smooth, creamy texture, though its thickness may vary from liquidity to a thicker, dip-like consistency, depending on the amount of water you add.

        Is tahini good for you?

        Though everything is good in moderation, tahini has many health benefits, including improving cardiovascular health, reducing cancer risk, and helping with inflammation.

        Other Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you make your own Lemon Tahini Sauce following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        A spoon of lemon tahini sauce drizzling in a jar showing how creamy it is.
        Print

        Lemon Tahini Sauce Recipe

        This Lemon Tahini Sauce is perfect for salads, falafel, shawarma, and more! Ready in 5 minutes, this classic Middle Eastern condiment is creamy, nutty, and delicious.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 183kcal

        Ingredients

        • ½ cup tahini paste stirred well
        • ¼ cup lemon juice
        • 2 cloves garlic minced finely or pressed
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more as needed
        • ¼ cup cold water more as needed

        Instructions

        • Place tahini, lemon juice, garlic, and salt in a bowl. Whisk (as much as you can) until combined. It will be thick, and that is normal.
        • Pour in the water and continue whisking until it is smooth. You can adjust the consistency by adding more (or less) water.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 2/3 cup tahini sauce, which is ideal for serving 4-6 people, depending on the dish you plan to use this recipe. The below nutritional values are per serving for 4 people.
        • Adjust consistency and seasoning: Use this recipe as a starting point and adjust consistency based on your preference or the recipe you plan on pairing it with. You can make it thinner by adding more water and vice versa.
        • Storing, freezing, and thawing the leftover sauce: Garlic lemon tahini sauce is the perfect condiment for anyone who enjoys no-fuss meal prep. Here is how I store leftovers:
          • Storing: Transfer the prepared tahini sauce to an airtight container or tightly sealed mason jar and store it in the refrigerator for up to one week. Keep in mind that this sauce tends to separate and thicken during storage, so you might have to whisk a little cold water into the mixture before serving.
          • Freezing: Technically, you can freeze tahini sauce, although extreme temperatures might mess with its consistency. Still, you can freeze this recipe by pouring it into an airtight container and freezing it for up to one month. Or, for easier portioning, you can place the garlic lemon tahini sauce into the compartments of an ice cube tray, freeze until solid, then transfer the individual cubes into a freezer-safe Ziploc bag.
          • Thawing: Place your frozen tahini sauce in the refrigerator overnight to thaw. Because separation is inevitable during freezing, remember to stir it well to regain its creamy, well-incorporated texture before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 183kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 302mg | Potassium: 159mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 21IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/feed/ 1
        Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/#comments Sun, 02 Jun 2024 17:12:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25252 If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have…]]>

        If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have come to the right place! We have already shared Mexican Street Corn On The Cob, Mexican Street Corn Salad with Avocado, Air Fryer Elotes, Mexican Street Corn Soup and Elote Dip. This Mexican street corn pasta recipe is the newest addition to the collection.

        A person is drizzling the elote pasta salad with chili lime dressing.

        While I usually make this street corn macaroni salad during the summer months when sweet corn is in season, you can also make it using canned or frozen corn during the cooler months (i.e., during the football season and Cinco de Mayo celebrations). In this post, we cover everything you need to know, including ingredient substitutions, variations, making it with grilled (or sauteed) corn, and expert tips to guide you through the process.

        Ingredients for Mexican Pasta Salad with Chili Lime Dressing:

        The ingredients list for this pasta corn salad consists of a mix of fresh and store-bought ingredients. You will need two sets of ingredients: First, for the salad and second, for the chili lime dressing: 

        For The Salad:

        • Sweet corn on the cob: You can make this salad by cooking the corn on the grill (or using a grill pan), sauteeing it in a skillet, or even cooking it in an air fryer. Our recipe below covers both methods of cooking. However, during the cooler months, when corn is not in season, you can use canned or frozen corn as well. 
        • Oil: You can use any vegetable oil, like olive oil or avocado oil, but unsalted butter would also work.
        • Pasta: When making pasta salads, my favorite pasta shapes are fusilli, farfalle(bow-tie pasta), or cellentani. However, any pasta shape that can hold onto the dressing and mix well with other ingredients in the recipe would work here. If you are following a gluten-free diet, you can also use your favorite gluten-free pasta.
        • Jalapeno pepper: If you like the heat, keep the seeds on. If not, remove them before chopping the pepper into small pieces. Alternatively, you can use bell peppers if you prefer a milder flavor.
        • Onion: I used red onion, but green onions would also work for a lighter flavor. If you have them on hand, my Mexican pickled onions would also be a great addition.
        • Cilantro: Chopped fresh cilantro is a classic ingredient in any Mexican corn recipe, but if you are not a fan, you can use other fresh herbs like parsley or omit using it.
        • Cheese: The authentic elote recipe uses cotija cheese, so we used that, but you can also use queso fresco, shredded cheddar, or even crumbled feta cheese in a pinch.
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        For The Dressing:

        • Mayonnaise: Use a brand you like or make it at home
        • Sour cream: If you can find it, you can use Mexican crema (aka Mexican sour cream) instead of sour cream. 
        • Seasonings: I used a small amount of chili powder to complement the smoky and charred flavors of the corn, but it is optional. You will also need salt and pepper to season the recipe. If preferred, a cayenne pepper can also be added for some heat.
        • Lime zest and Lime Juice: I highly recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for the freshest flavors.

        Optional Additions:

        • Cherry tomatoes: While it is not traditional, a handful of cherry tomatoes would be a lovely addition and make this grilled corn pasta salad a true summer salad. 
        • Garlic: A clove of minced garlic can be added to the creamy dressing, if preferred. If you prefer a lighter (less pungent) alternative, you can use a teaspoon of garlic powder as well.
        • Black Beans: Again, it is not traditional, but adding a can of drained and rinsed black beans would make this even more wholesome and filling.
        • Avocado: If you are an avocado lover, add a cubed ripe avocado to take this  Mexican corn pasta salad to the next level.
        • Grilled chicken: You can turn this sweet corn pasta salad into a delicious summer meal by adding some grilled chicken on top.

        How To Make Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad?

        While I prefer using grilled corn, you can make this street corn macaroni salad by sauteeing corn kernels in a skillet. Below are the steps to making it both ways:

        Steps showing how to make elote pasta salad.
        1. Cook corn:
          1. Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
          2. In a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
        2. Cook the pasta: Meanwhile, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. You can reserve some pasta water just in case, but during our recipe testing, we didn’t think that it was necessary. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl. Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
        3. Make the chili lime dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust your seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty!
        Steps showing how to assemble Mexican pasta salad with corn recipe.
        1. Assemble the salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

        Serving Suggestions:

        You can serve this grilled corn pasta salad by itself for a delicious pasta lunch or as a side dish with many of your vegetarian and meat dishes. Below are a few of my favorite dishes that you can pair it with:

        • Grilled seafood: The light and smokey flavors of Grilled Shrimp complement the creamy, spicy flavors of the salad. However, if you are feeding a crowd, you can also try my Grilled Sockeye Salmon for a well-rounded meal.
        • Tacos: The robust flavors of Grilled Flank Steak Tacos pair beautifully with this Mexican corn side dish, making it a summer feast. But if I am serving this salad during the cooler months, I pair it with my Slow Cooker Brisket Tacos for a meal that is perfect for a crowd.

        Other Mexican recipes you might like:

        If you make this Easy Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad recipe, I would appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Mexican street corn pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad Recipe

        This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is bursting with the flavors of fresh summer corn, jalapenos, red onion, and a creamy chili lime dressing. Ready in just 30 minutes, it's the perfect dish for feeding a crowd!
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine Mexican
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 30 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 353kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Corn:

        • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil or melted butter
        • 6 ears corn – Husks removed – approximately 4 ½ to 5 cups of corn kernels or frozen or canned corn (see notes below)
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For the Pasta:

        • 8 oz. dry uncooked pasta such as fusilli and farfalle (bowtie pasta)

        For The Creamy Dressing:

        • ¼ cup mayonnaise
        • 3 tablespoons sour cream or Mexican crema
        • ½ teaspoon chili powder
        • 1 teaspoon lime zest from one lime (optional)
        • ¼ cup lime juice freshly squeezed from 1 ½ to 2 limes
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Salad:

        • 2 medium jalapeno seeded and sliced/chopped
        • ½ cup red onion chopped finely
        • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped – more to use as garnish
        • ½ cup cotija cheese crumbled

        Instructions

        • When it comes to cooking the corn, you have two options:
          Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
          Cook it in a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
        • Cook the pasta: While the corn is cooling, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl.
        • Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
        • Make the Mexican Corn Dressing (Chili Lime Dressing): In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, lime zest, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty.
        • Assemble the roasted corn pasta salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 cups of pasta salad (the shape of the pasta you are using will change the volume), which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • What if I don’t have fresh corn? While I am a big fan of any pasta salad with fresh corn, to make this recipe year-round and still get that sweet corn flavor, you can use canned or frozen corn in place of the fresh. If you decide to do so, you can use:
          • Canned corn: For this recipe, you will need 3 (15 oz) cans of drained and rinsed corn.
          • Frozen corn kernels: You will need three (10 oz) bags. I like this option because the corn kernels are already off the cob, which saves you a step. Even better, there is no need to thaw. Simply add 1-2 minutes extra cooking time when sauteing the frozen corn in a skillet.
        • Be sure to salt the pasta water: Salting the cooking water allows the pasta to absorb some salt as it cooks, enhancing its flavor from the inside out so do not skip this step.
        • Toss while it is still warm: I know it’s tempting to add everything to the bowl and simply drizzle with dressing, but we’ve discovered that tossing the dressing with the corn and pasta while they’re still slightly warm allows them to better absorb the tangy, spicy flavors.
        • Serve it cold or warm: Like most pasta salads, this Mexican corn pasta salad can be served at room temperature, warm or cold. 
        • Make-Ahead: You can make this fresh corn pasta salad a day in advance. Simply assemble the pasta salad, but do not garnish with the cotija cheese or cilantro. Bring it to room temperature and store it in an airtight container. On the day you are going to serve, give it another gentle toss and let it come to room temperature. Add the cotija cheese and cilantro right before serving.
        • To Store Leftovers: Bring your Mexican pasta salad to room temperature and transfer it to an airtight container. As long as it is kept in the fridge, it should be good for up to 4 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 605mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/feed/ 26
        Black Bean and Corn Salad https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/#comments Fri, 26 Apr 2024 13:44:28 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=19714 Below, I’ll show you how to make this corn and black bean salad ahead of time (just what you need…]]>

        Below, I’ll show you how to make this corn and black bean salad ahead of time (just what you need to prepare for a big gathering!), as well as how to make a homemade lime dressing you’ll want to add to all your favorite salads, veggie sides, and proteins.With such a vibrantly fresh, citrusy flavor, it’s no wonder why this black bean corn salad is such a hit.

        Mexican black bean and corn salad in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        Packed with fresh and bright flavors, every element of this simple bean salad will delight your taste buds, from its zingy lime vinaigrette to its crisp veggie base.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • For the Dressing:
          • Fresh lime juice
          • Lime zest
          • Garlic: You’ll need one fresh garlic clove to give this dressing a delectably bold, complex finish. After peeling your garlic, press or finely mince it to ensure it thoroughly and evenly infuses the mixture.
          • Olive oil
          • Seasoning: I use a savory, earthy mix of ground cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper to season this simple corn and bean salad recipe. If preferred, a pinch of chili powder can also be added.
        • For the Salad:
          • Black beans: You can cook raw black beans from scratch or use canned black beans for this salad. If you opt for a canned version, be sure to drain and rinse them under cold water before adding them to your mixture.
          • Corn: Any type of corn will work for this easy bean and corn salad recipe. If you’re making this dish during the summer, you can use fresh sweet corn off the cob, air-fried corn (be sure to cut the kernels after cooking), or grill the corn beforehand if you’re in the mood for a smokier flavor profile. Also, if you’re in a pinch and don’t have any fresh corn on hand, you can use frozen corn or canned corn kernels—as long as you thaw, drain, and rinse them beforehand.
          • Cherry tomatoes
          • Bell peppers: You can use any color of bell pepper for this recipe. Though I used red peppers, yellow, orange, or green bell peppers would also add a deliciously fresh crispness to your mixture.
          • Red onion: Chopped red onion is my favorite way to bring out the subtle Mexican flavors of this dish. However, if you’re aiming for a milder taste, you may also use scallions.
          • Avocado: Creamy avocado is there to balance the crisper taste of this recipe’s fresh produce. However, you can omit it from your recipe if you’re not a fan.
          • Fresh cilantro: I love using cilantro leaves to add a fresh, peppery edge to my corn and black bean salad recipe. However, you’re welcome to omit this ingredient (or substitute it with fresh parsley!) if you don’t like its taste.
          • Cotija cheese (optional): If you want to add more light, creamy notes to your salad ingredients, cotija cheese offers a soft, milky flavor you’ll love. Sprinkle your salad with this cheesy addition after mixing.

        How to Make Black Bean Salad with Corn

        It takes almost no time to whip up this avocado corn black bean salad. In just four steps, you’ll have a crowd-pleasing dish you can use as a side, appetizer, or quick snack any day of the week.

        Steps showing how to make mexican corn and black bean salad.
        1. Prepare the lime dressing: In a small bowl, add the lime juice, lime zest, garlic, olive oil, cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
        2. Make the corn and bean salad: Place the black beans, corn, cherry tomatoes, bell pepper, red onion, avocado, and chopped cilantro into a large mixing bowl.
        3. Drizzle and toss: Drizzle the bean salad with the lime dressing and gently toss it until evenly combined.
        4. Taste and serve: Taste the salad for seasoning, add more if necessary, and serve.

        How to Make Ahead and Store?

        There’s a reason why this simple black bean and corn salad is one of my favorite foods. Not only can you make it ahead of time, but you can also store it throughout the week for stress-free meal prep.

        • Make ahead: You can make this quick black bean and corn salad one day in advance. Not only does this early prep minimize kitchen hassle, but it also gives the salad ingredients enough time to mix and infuse their flavors. That said, I still recommend adding the avocado just before serving so the ingredient maintains its color, taste, and texture.
        • Storage: Have leftovers? Don’t worry! You can store this easy salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days. Just be sure to stir the mixture and taste it for seasoning, as the ingredients may separate or change flavor during storage.

        Serving Suggestions for this Corn Salad with Beans

        Like my other salad recipes, this easy black bean salad is a great side dish for any meal, from summer BBQs to Mexican dinners. Plus, it also works as a hassle-free snack or appetizer if you need a quick addition to your weekday menu.

        Below are just a few of my favorite ways to serve this fan-favorite recipe.

        • With chips on the side: Easy and quick, I love serving this simple salad alongside a bowl of tortilla chips—perfect for weeknight get-togethers or midday munching. Or, if you’re in the mood for a heartier snack, my Cheesy Spinach Quesadilla exquisitely balances this salad’s bright flavors with rich, gooey deliciousness.
        • Grilled fish: If you plan to serve this dish as a summer corn and bean salad, it’s time to fire up the outdoor grill! My Grilled Shrimp Skewers and Grilled Mahi Mahi strike a delectable balance between buttery, smoky, and light flavors—an ideal pairing for this salad’s zesty undertones.
        • Grilled chicken or beef: Looking for a meatier meal? This recipe makes a great black bean and corn side dish for all your favorite meaty mains. In particular, this tender-crisp side is a delectable accompaniment for my creamy yet savory Avocado Burger and tangy Yogurt Marinated Chicken.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Corn Salads You Might Also Like:

        Black bean corn avocado salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Black Bean and Corn Salad Recipe

        This colorful, fresh, and festive Black Bean and Corn Salad is loaded with vegetables and drizzled with a delicious lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it can be served as a side dish or a light lunch that you can make as a part of your meal prep.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine Mexican
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 143kcal

        Ingredients

        For the lime dressing:

        • cup lime juice freshly squeezed; from 3 limes
        • 1 teaspoon lime zest from one lime
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 3 tablespoons olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the salad:

        • 2 cans black beans rinsed and drained – (15 oz each)
        • 3 ears fresh corn shucked; ~ 2 ¾ cups (or 1 8.5-oz. can whole kernels, drained)
        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes halved
        • 1 red bell pepper chopped; 1 cup/120 g
        • ½ medium red onion chopped; 1 cup/88 g
        • 1 avocado cubed
        • cup cilantro divided and chopped

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing, combine the lime juice, lime zest, garlic, olive oil, cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper in a bowl and whisk until fully combined.
        • To make the corn and bean salad, place black beans, corn, cherry tomatoes, bell pepper, red onion, avocado, and chopped cilantro in a large salad bowl.
        • Drizzle the salad with the prepared dressing and give it a gentle toss.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This black bean salad recipe makes 5-6 cups of salad ideal for serving six people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Chop everything small: The key to making the best black bean and corn salad recipe is to chop all your veggies into small, uniformly-sized pieces. Not only will your salad be easier to eat, but this small, even size will also ensure that each bite has a more even balance of flavors. This is especially important if you plan to serve it with chips on the side or a topping for tacos.
        • Let it marinate: If you have the time, I highly recommend letting it rest for a few hours before serving (or even waiting until the next day!). Doing so will give the lime dressing time to fully infuse the vegetables and let the veggies’ flavors mix with each other. Just wait until the last moment to add your cubed avocado.
        • Serve it chilled or at room temperature: I prefer this recipe to be served cold, so I usually refrigerate it for a few hours before serving. But you can also serve it at room temperature.
        • Corn: You can use any corn you like. During the summer months, I usually use fresh sweet corn. I like them raw, but if you want, you can also sauté it lightly. If your grill is on, feel free to grill your corn after spreading it with oil (butter and olive oil would work). Of course, you can also use a can of corn (drained and rinsed) and frozen corn (thawed.)
        • Storage: You can store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days. Just be sure to stir the mixture and taste it for seasoning, as the ingredients may separate or change flavor during storage.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 143kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 432mg | Potassium: 334mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 923IU | Vitamin C: 40mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/feed/ 30
        Raw Carrot Salad https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/#comments Thu, 18 Apr 2024 17:31:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74840 The original raw carrot salad became virtually famous based on the teachings of Dr. Ray Peat. According to Dr. Peat’s…]]>

        The original raw carrot salad became virtually famous based on the teachings of Dr. Ray Peat. According to Dr. Peat’s research, raw carrots contain a unique fiber that, when mixed with a touch of healthy fats (like coconut oil) and vinegar, can bind to excess estrogen and safely eliminate it from the body. This is good for hormone balance and gut health. And with this raw carrot salad recipe, it’s so easy to incorporate this health trend into your diet.

        If you are wondering what to do with grated carrots, check out a few of our other raw carrot recipes, including Kale and Apple Slaw and Yogurt Coleslaw.

        A bowl of shaved raw carrot salad in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        The good news is that this vegan carrot salad uses just a handful of ingredients you probably already have on hand:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Carrots: If possible, use organic carrots, as these will provide the highest nutritional content and a good source of fiber. You will need about 3 large carrots (or 10 oz total). I simply cut off the ends, remove the outer layer, and slice them lengthwise with a vegetable peeler. You can also slice your carrots with a julienne peeler, grate them on a box grater, or use the large grating attachment on your food processor.
        • Fresh herbs: I love a ton of fresh parsley in this carrot vinegar salad, but you can also try any of your favorite soft herbs, such as fresh cilantro, mint, or dill.
        • Oil: I use extra-virgin olive oil, but you can also use coconut oil or avocado oil.
        • Vinegar: I love the slightly sweet tang of apple cider vinegar, but other options include rice vinegar, white wine vinegar, or red wine vinegar. The flavor profile will change based on what type of vinegar you use.
        • Sweetener: I like to use maple syrup to keep it vegan, but a touch of honey or agave could also work.
        • Seasonings: Go for a simple blend of ground cumin, sea salt, and black pepper.
        • Nuts and Seeds: I like a final sprinkle of sesame seeds, which I find adds a subtle crunch and nutty flavor. Other options include sunflower seeds, sliced almonds, or pumpkin seeds (raw pepitas).

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Lemon juice or lime juice: A squeeze of fresh citrus juice is an easy way to brighten up this peeled carrot salad recipe. You can use this addition in place of the vinegar or in addition to vinegar.
        • Dijon mustard: To give the salad a little kick, add a very small amount, maybe about ½ teaspoons.
        • Soy sauce: To give this carrot salad an Asian twist, you can use soy sauce instead of salt.
        • Green onions: If you can’t imagine a salad without onions, a small amount of (¼ cup) chopped scallions would be a great addition.

        How to Make Raw Carrot Salad?

        This healthy carrot salad comes together in a few easy steps. Here’s how I like to make it:

        A collage of images showing how to make raw carrot salad.
        1. Shred carrots: Cut off the ends of your carrots, then peel the outer skin with a vegetable peeler. Then, continue to slice them into carrot ribbons as evenly as possible. Transfer the sliced carrots to a large bowl.
        2. Make the dressing: Add the olive oil, apple cider vinegar, maple syrup, cumin, salt, and ground black pepper to a small bowl or mason jar. Whisk or shake until combined.
        3. Toss: Drizzle the dressing over the shaved carrots and give it a gentle toss.
        4. Garnish: If using, sprinkle with chopped fresh parsley and sesame seeds. Serve cold or at room temperature.

        How to Make Ahead and Store?

        After testing the carrot salad with vinegar several times, we found the salad was better the next day, making it a great make-ahead recipe. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips for this raw carrot recipe:

        • Make Ahead: Prepare the salad up to 1 day in advance and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. This gives a chance for all the flavors to marry together.
        • Storage: The dressed carrot salad will keep for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Give it a good toss just before serving.
        Person sprinkling fresh carrot salad with sesame seeds.

        Serving Suggestions

        According to dieticians, it is best to eat this cold carrot salad on an empty stomach to reap its benefits, which is why I usually eat it as a light lunch. That being said, it makes a great side dish with any of the following:

        Aysegul’s Recipe Tips

        If you look at the recipe below, you’ll see that this shaved carrot salad recipe is easy to make with minimal ingredients. However, we learned a few tips as we were testing this recipe.

        • Best way to slice carrots: I prefer to shred carrots lengthwise using a vegetable peeler to make this simple carrot salad. However, you can also use a julienne peeler for a more French-style salad, the large holes of a box grater, or the shredding blade on your food processor to achieve different textures.
        • Let it rest before serving: The natural sweetness of the carrots and dressing tastes better the longer they have a chance to mingle together, so I recommend making this grated carrot salad for at least a few hours, or up to two days, ahead of time.
        • Taste for seasoning: Start with the recommended amount of salt, pepper, and cumin, and then add more to your liking. I added a good dose of salt right before serving.

        FAQs

        How do you cut carrots for raw carrot salad?

        First, cut off the ends, then peel away the outer skin. Then, slice evenly but thinly with a vegetable peeler, julienne peeler, large holes of a box grater, or the grating attachment on your food processor.

        What are the benefits of raw carrot salad?

        According to Dr. Ray Peat, the benefits of eating raw carrot salad regularly include improved digestive health and optimal liver and thyroid function. The fiber in raw carrots promotes bowel regularity and enhances digestion. Additionally, by aiding in the removal of excess estrogens and endotoxins, consuming this salad regularly helps reduce the burden on the liver, thereby supporting both liver and thyroid health.

        If you make this Raw Carrot Salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a wonderful way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Raw carrot salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Raw Carrot Salad Recipe

        Here's a Raw Carrot Salad that you can make in under 10 minutes. Vegan and gluten-free, this healthy salad is perfect for a light lunch or side dish with any of your main dishes.
        Course Lunch, Dinner
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 72kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 medium-sized carrots washed, ends trimmed (10 oz/287 g)
        • ½ cup parsley roughly chopped (can substitute with cilantro or mint)
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil or coconut oil
        • 2 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or rice vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon sea salt or kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 1 teaspoon sesame seeds optional

        Instructions

        • Using a vegetable peeler, peel the outer skin of your carrots. Then continue to to grate them into ribbons. Transfer them to a large salad bowl.
        • Add the parsley to the bowl.
        • Prepare the dressing: Place the olive oil, apple cider vinegar, maple syrup, cumin, salt, and ground black pepper in a mason jar. Put the lid on and shake. Set aside.
        • Drizzle the shaved carrots with the dressing and give it a gentle toss using tongs.
        • Sprinkle with sesame seeds, if using. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3-4 cups of carrot salad, which is ideal for 4 servings as a side dish and 2 servings as a light meal. The nutritional values below are per serving (of 4.)
        • Slicing carrots: While I shave the carrots into ribbons, you can shred it using a box grater or a food processor.
        • Let it rest: If you have the time, let the salad rest in the fridge for a few hours before serving. Resting time allows the flavors to meld together and make it even more delicious.
        • Storage: You can store leftovers in the fridge for up to 3 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 72kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 619mg | Potassium: 213mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 8279IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/feed/ 3
        Kale Brussel Sprout Salad https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/#comments Tue, 16 Apr 2024 17:34:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15238 Transform raw Brussels sprouts into one of your new favorite fall salads—alongside my Kale Waldorf Salad and Apple Kale Slaw.…]]>

        Transform raw Brussels sprouts into one of your new favorite fall salads—alongside my Kale Waldorf Salad and Apple Kale Slaw.

        You can serve restaurant-quality eats for any weeknight dinner, green side dish for thanksgiving, or quick lunch with this crowd-pleasing dish. Inspired by the classic brussel sprout and kale salad recipe featured by popular sites like Bon Appetit, Whole Foods, NY Times, and Epicurious, my recipe will delight your tastebuds whether you’re a beginner or an expert chef.

        A kale Brussel sprout salad in a bowl with spoons from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This kale Brussel sprouts salad comes together in three sets of basic ingredients:

        ingredients for a kale salad with Brussels sprouts from the top view.
        • For the salad ingredients, you’ll need:
          • Tuscan Kale: Because of its mild flavor and popularity in grocery stores, lacinato kale is my go-to for this easy recipe. If you’d like to try other Types of Kale, curly kale has a sharp, peppery flavor that will work great in your kale Brussel salad.
          • Brussels Sprouts: You can shred brussels sprouts like I do it here or buy packaged and already shaved sprouts from the store.
          • Grated Parmesan Cheese: I love the salty and umami flavors of parmesan cheese, but Pecorino Romano goat cheese, blue cheese, and feta cheese would also work.
          • Dried or fresh fruit: I used dried cranberries, but pomegranate seeds, fresh apples, raisins, and craisins also make the perfect additions to this simple kale and Brussels sprouts salad.
        • To make the dressing, gather:
          • Olive oil
          • Fresh lemon juice
          • Vinegar: I used apple cider vinegar, but balsamic vinegar or white wine vinegar would also work. If you are a fan of Cracker Barrel’s brussel sprout and kale salad recipe you can use my Dijon Maple Vinaigrette instead.
          • Dijon mustard
          • Fresh minced garlic cloves
          • Onion: I used a minced shallot, but you can use red onions as well.
          • Kosher salt and black pepper. 
        • For the nuts: I suggest using sliced almonds, chopped walnuts, or chopped pecans. Alternatively, you can use candied nuts like candied pecans! You could also swap out the nuts for seeds, like pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds, to accommodate nut allergies.

        Variations & Optional Add-Ins

        Take this shaved brussel sprout and kale salad to the next level with countless tasty additions.

        • For meat lovers: Turn your veggie-packed side into a healthy meal by adding a nutritious protein. Top your salad with Turkey Bacon for a kick of crispy bacon flavor, or add Baked Chicken Breasts for a succulent addition.
        • Serve it warm: If you prefer a warm kale and Brussel sprout salad, you can sautee the vegetables in a large skillet until they are lightly cooked. Simply heat a tablespoon of oil in a large skillet, add the chopped kale and sautee until lightly warmed. Transfer it to a bowl and follow the same steps for the Brussel sprouts.

        How to Make this Recipe?

        Kale brussel sprout cranberry salad is among my favorite easy salad recipes to whip up on busy weeknights and special occasions alike. You can even hone your veggie prep by checking out my foolproof guide on How to Cut Kale.

        A person showing how to make a kale salad with dressing from the top view.
        1. Prepare the kale: Wash and rinse the kale leaves under cold water, and dry them in a salad spinner. Then, use a sharp knife to remove the stems and thinly slice kale leaves. Place them in a large bowl.
        2. Shave the Brussels sprouts: Rinse the Brussel sprouts under cold water using a colander, dry them, and remove their outermost leaves. Then, place them in a food processor fitted with a slicing blade. Switch on the machine and feed the Brussels sprouts into the tube. Once shaved, transfer the Brussels sprouts from the food processor into the salad bowl with the kale. 
        3. Make the lemon vinaigrette: Whisk together the olive oil, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, garlic, shallot, salt, and black pepper in a small bowl.
        4. Drizzle the vegetables: Gently pour the dressing over the kale and Brussel sprouts. Toss the mixture such that each leaf has an even coating of the dressing. This even layer will help soften the kale, but if you want, you can also massage kale and sprouts gently to ensure they are fully mixed with the dressing. Set the vegetables aside and let them rest.
        A person showing how to assemble a kale salad with toasted almonds from the top view.
        1. Toast the almonds: Place the almonds in a small skillet over medium heat. Toast the nuts for 4-5 minutes, frequently stirring, until they turn fragrant and lightly golden brown. Alternatively, you can toast them in a preheated 350-degree F. oven on a baking sheet for 5-7 minutes, turning once during the process.
        2. Add the toppings: Top the shaved brussel sprout salad with Parmesan cheese, toasted almonds, and cranberries if using. Toss the mixture until evenly combined, then serve.

        How to Make Ahead and Store

        This Lemony brussel sprout salad is as easy to make ahead and store as it is to prepare (hello, easy kale storage!). Here’s how I do it:

        • Make ahead: To make this kale Brussels sprouts salad ahead of time, prepare each component (i.e., salad, dressing, and toppings) one day in advance. Begin by washing, chopping, and shaving the kale and Brussel sprouts, and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Then, mix and cover dressing and store it in a separate airtight container, such as a mason jar, in the refrigerator. Toast the almonds and store them at room temperature. Lastly, shred the Parmesan cheese and store it in the fridge. Combine the ingredients just before serving.
        • Store: To store your salad with Brussel sprouts, place it in an airtight container in the fridge. If you have not yet added the dressing, the veggies will stay fresh for 3-4 days. However, if you have already added the dressing, your salad mixture will last up to two days. You may also extend your salad’s storage time by storing each salad component separately and dressing individual servings as needed.

        What to Serve with this Salad

        With so many tantalizing flavors, this Brussel sprout and kale recipe makes the ultimate side dish for dozens of tasty mains. Here are just a few delicious recipes to try with your new favorite salad:

        • Meat Dishes: My favorite way to serve this kale Brussels sprouts salad is with a savory, meaty main. Ground Turkey Meatloaf is a flavorful classic even picky eaters love, while Baked Chicken Parmesan and Chicken Fricassee will perfectly complement your light salad with rich and succulent flavor.
        • Vegetarian Dinners: Fill your plate with nutritious and eco-conscious foods by pairing your brussel sprout salad with tasty vegetarian recipes. Quinoa Chili and Mexican Quinoa will balance your kale salad with hearty spice, and Stuffed Acorn Squash is a festive, gluten-free option everyone can enjoy.
        A salad with kale and Brussel sprouts in a bowl from the side view.

        FAQs

        Can brussel sprouts be eaten raw in a salad?

        Absolutely! Just be sure to shred your raw brussel sprouts before adding them to your recipe.

        Do you rinse off brussel sprouts before cooking?

        Yes, I recommend rinsing your brussels sprouts under cold water before cooking with them. I also recommend removing each sprout’s dark, outermost leaves to ensure maximum freshness.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Kale Brussels Sprout Salad recipe or any other salad recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A bowl of brussels sprouts and kale salad recipe from the top view
        Print

        Kale Brussels Sprout Salad Recipe

        This nutrient-dense Kale Brussel Sprout Salad is packed with hearty greens, toasted almonds, cheese, and sweet cranberries, all tossed in a tangy homemade Dijon dressing. Enjoy it for a light meal or serve it as a fall-inspired side dish.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 438kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Salad:

        • 1 bunch Tuscan Kale or Curly Kale ~1 lb
        • 1 pound Brussels sprouts finely chopped – I used my food processor
        • 1 cup grated Parmesan cheese
        • ½ cup dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds optional

        For The Dressing:

        • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ¼ cup lemon juice
        • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • ½ small shallot minced (about 2 tablespoons) or red onion
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Nuts:

        • 1 cup sliced or whole almonds or chopped walnuts or pecans

        Instructions

        • Prep the kale: Wash and rinse the kale leaves under cold water. Dry in a salad spinner. Remove the leaves from the center ribs and chop thinly. Place it in a large salad bowl.
        • Shave Brussel sprouts*: Place Brussel sprouts in a food processor fitted with the shredding blade. Turn the machine on and feed brussels sprouts into the tube and let the machine do all the work for you. Transfer the now-shaved Brussels sprouts into the bowl with kale.
        • Make the dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, garlic, shallot, and salt and pepper in a small bowl.
        • Drizzle the vegetables with the dressing and give it a toss to make sure all the leaves are evenly coated with the dressing. Set aside and let it rest.
        • Place almonds in a small empty skillet over medium heat. Toast for 4-5 minutes, keeping a very close eye on and stirring frequently, until fragrant and lightly browned. Chop them up into large bite-size pieces.
        • To assemble, sprinkle the brussel sprout and kale salad with toasted almonds, parmesan cheese, and cranberries (or pomegranate arils), if using. Toss to combine and serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 8-7 cups of salad that is ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • When it comes to shredding brussels sprouts, you have two other options:
          • Use a sharp pairing knife and slice one by one as thinly as you can. This takes around 10-15 minutes for a pound of raw brussels sprouts.
          • Use a mandolin. This method produces evenly sliced Brussels spouts and takes about 8-10 minutes to shred a pound of brussels sprouts. If you need advice on a good mandoline, I just purchased this one (affiliate link), and I love it.
        • To make ahead: To make this salad ahead of time, prepare each component (i.e., salad, dressing, and toppings) one day in advance. Assemble it right before serving.
        • To Store: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for up to 2 days. You may also extend your salad’s storage time by storing each salad component separately and dressing individual servings as needed.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 438kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 535mg | Potassium: 537mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 901IU | Vitamin C: 70mg | Calcium: 253mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/feed/ 28
        Deviled Egg Potato Salad https://foolproofliving.com/deviled-egg-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/deviled-egg-potato-salad/#comments Fri, 22 Mar 2024 13:36:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=18519 There are so many versions of potato salad, like Red Potato Salad and Potato Caper Salad. But I like to…]]>

        There are so many versions of potato salad, like Red Potato Salad and Potato Caper Salad. But I like to think this deviled potato salad recipe is a step above the rest. Thanks to layers of flavors, textures, and unmatched tanginess, it’s an old-fashioned potato salad recipe with the volume turned up.

        If you are a serious potato salad fan and you’ve always loved Resers Deviled Egg Potato Salad, now is your chance to make it right at home.

        Potato salad with hard boiled eggs and chives in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This recipe for deviled egg potato salad combines the main ingredients for deviled egg filling and creamy boiled potatoes. Here’s a look at what we need:

        Ingredients for the dish from the top view.
        • Potatoes: The best potatoes for potato salad are waxy potatoes, like Yukon gold, red potatoes, or baby potatoes, which hold their shape better than starchy potatoes like russet potatoes. Avoid potatoes with green spots or sprouts, as this indicates potatoes that are old and have lost their flavor and moisture.
        • Hard-boiled eggs: Hard-boiled egg yolks create the base for the deviled egg dressing, and the cooked egg whites are added to the salad. Keep reading to learn how to make perfect hard-cooked eggs at home.
        • Green onions: We are using scallions for the filling and bright green chives for garnish. Both provide that extra layer of savory flavor.
        • Celery: Celery gives the potato salad crunch and color. 
        • Sweet relish: Sweet pickle relish is a classic in salads like this, so that’s what we used. The sweet, tangy, and briny flavor is impossible to replicate. If you prefer a less sweet flavor, use dill relish, finely chopped dill pickles, or olives.
        • Paprika: A final sprinkle of paprika or smoked paprika celebrates the deviled egg and it adds such beautiful color.
        • Mayonnaise: I like to use avocado oil mayonnaise, which gives it a creamy, slightly sweet flavor.
        • Greek yogurt: Greek yogurt lightens up the dressing so the eggs and potatoes are not weighed down. In a pinch, sour cream can be a good substitute.
        • Garlic: One fresh garlic clove adds a punchy bit, but if you like your potato salad garlicky you can up it to two cloves.
        • Apple cider vinegar: We used apple cider vinegar, but white wine vinegar would also work.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard adds a zesty punch and elevates the dressing even further. Yellow mustard can also be used if that is all you have on hand.
        • Seasonings: A simple blend of Kosher salt and black pepper allows the rest of the ingredients to shine. Feel free to add a dash of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes for a little kick. Or, have fun with different things like celery seed, old bay seasoning, or creole seasoning.

        Optional Add-Ins & Substitutions

        • Lemon juice: Replace the apple cider vinegar with lemon juice for a fresh citrus kick.
        • Pickled red onion: Pickled Red Onions add another layer of tangy sharpness and a vibrant pop of color.
        • Bacon: Although the recipe is vegetarian, the addition of chopped Baked Turkey Bacon or regular bacon would be nice.
        • Herbs: Fresh herbs like parsley would be a nice addition, too.
        • Peppers: If you have it, a small amount of diced red bell pepper or pimento peppers would also work nicely in this recipe.

        How to Make Hard Boiled Eggs for Potato Salad?

        The key to deviled egg potato salad vs regular is the eggs, of course. We want fresh, high-quality eggs with deep orange-yellow yolks that promise a rich flavor. For easy-peel hard-boiled eggs, follow these steps:

        1. Place the eggs in a large pot with cold water, ensuring that they are submerged in water by about 1 inch.
        Steps showing how to cook and peel hard boiled eggs to use in this recipe.
        1. Set the pot on medium-high heat and bring to a boil, then immediately turn the heat off, cover, and let sit for 11-13 minutes.
        2. Next, carefully remove the eggs from the pot to an ice bath, letting them chill for 5-10 minutes, and drain. 
        3. When ready to peel, lightly tap each egg on a flat surface to crack the eggshell. Then, gently begin peeling the egg, starting from the bottom, where there is typically an air pocket. Continue with the rest of the eggs.

        How to Make Deviled Eggs Potato Salad?

        Now, the fun begins! Here are the step-by-step instructions on how to make this potato salad deviled egg recipe:

        Steps showing how to cook potatoes and prepare egg yolks to use in the recipe.
        1. Boil potatoes: In a large pot, place the cubed potatoes and cover with cool water by 1-inch. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat, then reduce the heat to medium, and cook until the potatoes are fork tender, about 15-20 minutes.
        2. Drain potatoes: Drain the cooked potatoes in a colander and place them into a large mixing bowl to cool.
        3. Mash egg yolks: Slice the eggs in half lengthwise. Remove the cooked egg yolks and place them in a small bowl. Mash with the back of a fork until completely smooth, breaking up any large lumps.
        A collage of images showing how to make deviled egg potato salad.
        1. Prep egg whites: Cut the cooked egg whites into 1-inch cubes.
        2. Make the dressing: Into the bowl with the mashed egg yolks, add the mayonnaise, Greek yogurt, garlic, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, Kosher salt, and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined. 
        3. Assemble the salad: Place the now-cooled potatoes, chopped egg whites, scallions, celery, and sweet relish into a serving bowl. Gently stir to combine.
        4. Add dressing: Drizzle generously with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. Adjust the seasoning to your desired taste. If you have the time, cover it with stretch film and chill it for an hour in the fridge.
        5. Garnish: Sprinkle the salad with paprika and chives. Enjoy!

        How to Make Ahead & Store Leftovers?

        Hard-boiled egg potato salad is a delicious make-ahead recipe, and leftovers are stored beautifully in the fridge. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:

        • Make Ahead: Prepare the recipe as instructed, but do not add the paprika or chives. Store it for up to 2 days in an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid. When ready to serve, transfer to a serving dish, garnish, and enjoy.
        • Storage: Leftover potato salad with boiled eggs will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. The potatoes will absorb the dressing over time, so you may need to adjust the seasoning or add a touch more yogurt or mayo to bring it back to its original consistency.

        Expert Tips

        While the recipe is pretty straightforward, we learned a few things during our recipe testing.  Below are a few helpful tips on how to make the best-deviled egg potato salad recipe:

        • Don’t overcook the potatoes: We want the potatoes to still hold their shape for optimal taste and texture. Overcooking the potatoes will result in a mushy potato salad.
        • Option to toss the dressing while the potatoes are still warm: During testing, we found that you can toss the dressing with the potatoes while they are still warm since warm potatoes better absorb all the flavors. 
        • Be gentle when mixing the potatoes: Since we’ve done our best not to overcook the potatoes, it’s important to have a gentle hand when mixing so that they don’t smush or lose their texture.
        • Make it ahead of time: Boiled egg and potato salad is a wonderful make-ahead recipe as the flavors get better the longer they have to marry together. Allow the salad to sit in the refrigerator for at least 1 hour, or up to 2 days, before serving.
        • Enjoy cold or room temperature: I like it at cool room temperature, not fridge cold but also not warm. For best results, remove it from the fridge 30 minutes before serving.
        • Taste before serving: As with all homemade recipes, taste and adjust the seasoning before serving.
        • Garnish before serving: Just before serving, gently and evenly garnish with paprika and fresh chives to keep the garnishes’ color and integrity. Otherwise, they will get lost with the rest of the ingredients.
        • Keep it cool: If serving it during the summer (i.e., as a part of your Memorial Day or Labor Day menu), make sure it is kept chilled, whether this is over a large bowl of ice, in a cooler, or indoors. This is a mayo and egg-based dish, so we want to keep the ingredients as cool as possible in the hot summer months for optimal food safety.
        Person mixing the potato salad from the top view.

        FAQs

        How long is deviled egg potato salad good for?

        Homemade deviled egg potato salad will keep for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. If the potato salad thickens slightly, adjust the consistency with a spoonful of mayo.

        Can you freeze deviled egg potato salad?

        I do not recommend freezing potato salad with deviled eggs, as this will alter the texture of the potatoes and make the dressing runny.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Deviled Egg Potato Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

        Deviled egg potato salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Deviled Egg Potato Salad Recipe

        This deviled egg potato salad recipe combines the rich, savory flavors of deviled eggs with creamy potatoes, drawing inspiration from Southern-style potato salads. It is made lighter by substituting some of the dressing with Greek yogurt. Perfect as a side dish for Easter, summer cookouts, or winter potlucks.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 20 minutes
        Total Time 40 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 364kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Salad:

        • 2 pounds Yukon Gold potatoes peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes (or yellow potatoes)
        • 8 hard-boiled eggs
        • 2 stalks green scallions chopped
        • 2 stalks celery finely chopped
        • 2 tablespoons sweet relish
        • ½ teaspoon paprika or smoked paprika
        • 1-2 tablespoons chives or green onions or parsley – chopped

        For The Dressing:

        • ½ cup mayonnaise
        • ½ cup full-fat Greek yogurt
        • 1 garlic clove minced
        • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place the cubed potatoes in a large saucepan and cover with water. Put the lid on and bring the mixture to a boil over medium-high heat. Once boiled, turn the heat to medium and cook until the potatoes are fork-tender, 15-20 minutes.
        • Drain the potatoes thoroughly, place them into a large salad bowl, and set aside to cool.
        • Halve the hard-boiled eggs. Remove the cooked egg yolks and place them in a bowl. Using the back of a fork, mash them to break down any lumps.
        • Cut the cooked egg whites into 1-inch cubes and transfer them into a small bowl. Set aside.
        • To make the dressing, into the bowl containing the mashed egg yolks, add the mayonnaise, Greek yogurt, garlic, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, kosher salt and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
        • To assemble the salad, place the now-cooled potatoes, chopped egg whites, scallions, celery and sweet relish into the serving bowl.
        • Drizzle the dressing over everything and give it a gentle toss. Adjust the seasoning to your desired taste.
        • Sprinkle the salad with paprika and chives (if using). Serve!

        Notes

        • Yields: The recipe makes approximately 6-7 cups of potato salad which is ideal for 6 servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below is per serving.
        • Make-Ahead Instructions: Prepare the recipe as instructed, but do not add the paprika or chives. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready to serve, transfer to a serving dish and garnish with paprika and chives.
        • Storage: Leftover potato salad can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. The potatoes will absorb the dressing over time, so you may need to adjust the seasoning or add a touch more yogurt or mayo to bring it back to its original consistency.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 364kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 250mg | Sodium: 672mg | Potassium: 808mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 618IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 83mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/deviled-egg-potato-salad/feed/ 18
        Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/#comments Wed, 20 Sep 2023 19:47:47 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15280 Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick…]]>

        Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick and easy, but it’s the tastiest way to get your daily dose of nutrients. If you’re looking for more easy recipes for beautifully caramelized, tender roasted veggies, you have to make my Roasted Acorn Squash, this Maple Roasted Carrot dish, and my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes

        Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes in an oval plate with a spoon on the side.

        Ingredients

        We’re keeping the ingredient list short and simple for this roasted brussel sprout and sweet potato recipe. The veggies crisp up perfectly with just a little olive oil, and we’re adding a few additional seasonings to enhance the flavor of this dish. Here’s what you’ll need:

        Ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view.
        • Fresh Brussels sprouts: Rinse them under cold water and slice them in half. If you have larger sprouts, cut them into quarters.
        • Sweet potatoes: You’ll need 1 or 2 large sweet potatoes or 3-4 medium sweet potatoes. Be sure to peel them and cut them into 1-inch cubes.
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Peel garlic and mince finely. Don’t have fresh garlic on hand? Use a teaspoon of garlic powder instead.
        • Extra-virgin olive oil
        • Seasonings: You’ll need paprika (sweet or smoked), ground cumin, kosher or sea salt, and black pepper. 
        • Fresh Herbs (optional): We used fresh parsley as a garnish, but when making this dish during the holiday season, we use other fresh herbs like fresh sage, fresh thyme, or fresh rosemary.

        Substitutions 

        Root vegetables are ideal for roasting because the high heat allows the veggie’s natural sugars to caramelize and release a sweet flavor. Feel free to swap the sweet potatoes for your favorite root vegetable or even switch up the flavor profiles of this dish. Here are some ideas:

        • Pioneer Woman’s Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes: The Pioneer Woman has a delicious variation of this Brussel sprouts and sweet potato recipe that uses butternut squash and onion. If you’d like to try out her version, swap the sweet potatoes for cubed butternut squash and add some diced onion (she uses yellow onion, but red onion would also work.) If you don’t know how to cube butternut squash, check out my easy How to Cut Butternut Squash guide. If you’re not a fan of butternut squash, try substituting chopped carrots. You can even make roasted yams and Brussels sprouts for another substitution. 
        • Maple roasted Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes: Sweet and savory is such a classic combo! Balance the savory spices in this recipe by adding a sweetener like sweet maple syrup, which will also help to bring out those beautiful caramelized flavors. I recommend drizzling your oven-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts with maple syrup (about one tablespoon), just as I did in this Maple Roasted Carrots and Balsamic Maple Brussels Sprouts recipe. For another sweet option, try drizzling your roasted veggies with a dash of balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze (affiliate link.) 

        How to Roast Sweet Potatoes and Brussel Sprouts?

        In just 30 minutes, you can serve up this impressive, colorful vegetable dish that pairs with an endless number of main dishes. Plus, with only one bowl and a sheet pan, it makes for a super easy cleanup. Here’s how to make brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes in oven:

        1. Prep your equipment: Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C). Line a large sheet pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil and set aside. 
        A collage of images showing how to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes.
        1. Combine the veggies and seasonings: Add the veggies, olive oil, garlic, cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper to a large or medium bowl. Toss Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes with all the oil and seasonings until evenly coated.
        2. Transfer to the baking sheet: Transfer the seasoned veggies to the prepared baking sheet and spread them into a single layer. 
        3. Roast vegetables: Place in the center rack of the oven for 20-25 min, making sure to flip halfway through. 
        4. Serve: Transfer the roasted sweet potato and brussel sprouts to a serving bowl or plate. Sprinkle with fresh parsley or other fresh herbs, if desired. 

        Variations with Optional Add-Ins

        While roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes are delicious as-is, they make an excellent base for salads, grain bowls, and more. Get creative by drizzling with dressings, adding lots of toppings, or adjusting the flavor profile to suit a special occasion. Here are a few suggestions:

        • Add quinoa: Turn this easy side dish into a roasted vegetable salad with cooked quinoa. For nutritious, simple, and filling lunch or dinner options, add your roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potato to this yummy Quinoa Sweet Potato Bowl or to my other delicious Quinoa Salad recipes. If you’d like to try these recipes but you are unfamiliar with cooking quinoa, I have you covered. Check out my easy guide for Cooking Quinoa on the Stove.
        • Mix with salad greens or massaged kale: Amp up the nutrients of this dish by tossing it with your favorite salad greens or kale. For a restaurant-worthy creation, finish off your sweet potato brussel sprout salad with a drizzle of Lemon and Balsamic Dressing and top it with lots of Crispy Bacon
        • Nuts and dried fruits: While you can enjoy roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts year-round, they’re especially fitting for the autumn season because of their warm, cozy flavors. If I’m making this dish for Thanksgiving, I love adding festive toppings like chopped pecans (or walnuts) and dried cranberries. Feel free to use your favorite nuts and dried fruit, such as dried figs or sliced almonds. Or, add a fun pop of color by tossing this sweet potato brussel sprout recipe with some fresh pomegranate seeds. 

        How to Make Ahead, Store, & Reheat?

        While sheet pan Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes are quick and easy to throw together for a last-minute side dish, they’re also make-ahead-friendly for meal prep and storage-friendly for those yummy leftovers. Here are some make-ahead, storage, and reheating tips:

        • Make-ahead: You can make this sweet potato and brussel sprout recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
        • Store: Bring the baked brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They’ll stay fresh in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
        • Reheat: You can reheat your leftovers for a few seconds in the microwave or in a 300-degree F oven for about 10 minutes or until warmed through. 
        A close up of the dish from the top view.

        What to Serve It With?

        Baked sweet potato and Brussels sprouts are a classic side that pairs with virtually any main dish. While it is one of my go-to dishes for holiday dinners, you can also enjoy this recipe as a snack, appetizer, or simple lunch! Here are a few of my serving recommendations: 

        Expert Tips

        When it comes to roasting Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes, the goal is to make them tender, caramelized, and crisp rather than mushy and lifeless. Thankfully, this is easy to achieve with just a few tricks up your sleeve! Here’s what you need to know: 

        • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping medium-sized sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
        • Leave the outer leaves: While you can remove any loose sprout leaves before roasting, I prefer to leave them since they crisp up really well in the oven and add a nice crunch to the dish. 
        • Flip halfway through the roasting process: When roasting sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts, flip them halfway through to ensure even cooking. They can turn from perfectly crisp and caramelized to mushy pretty quickly, so make sure to keep an eye on them after about 20 minutes (every oven is different). You’ll know they’re done when they’re fork-tender.

        FAQs

        Can I roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes together?

        Yes, you can. Roast sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in the oven for a total time of about 20-25 minutes to achieve a fork-tender texture with crisp, caramelized edges. Plus, sweet potato brussels sprouts are a savory and sweet combination that makes for the perfect side dish.

        What temp to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes?

        You can cook sheet pan sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in a 400-degree F oven for 20-25 minutes or until fork-tender.

        Can I roast brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes in the air fryer instead?

        For a quick and easy cooking option, you can make air fryer brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes instead of roasting them in the oven. I recommend roasting them in the air fryer basket at 400 degrees F for 17-20 minutes or until you achieve tender potatoes and crispy brussel sprouts.

        What pairs well with brussel sprouts?

        Root veggies, such as sweet potatoes, carrots, and butternut squash, pair beautifully with sprouts. Roasted root vegetables and brussel sprouts require around the same cook time, resulting in a tender texture with crisp, golden brown, and caramelized edges. It’s the perfect combination of savory and sweet.

        Should I soak brussel sprouts before roasting?

        There’s no need to soak your sprouts before roasting them. However, I recommend giving them a good rinse under cold running water to remove any dirt, debris, or pesticides. You can lightly dry them with a paper towel before cooking to ensure they crisp up nicely.

        Other Roasted Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

        Whether you need a delicious side dish to serve with your holiday dinner or you are just looking for a healthy veggie meal for a Tuesday night dinner, we have a good collection of vegetable side dishes for you to choose from. Below are a few hand-picked recipes that we make regularly:

        If you try this Roasted Sweet Potato Brussel Sprouts Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Roasted Sweet Potatoes and Brussels Sprouts on a plate with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes Recipe

        These Oven-Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes are an easy side dish that’s vegan, gluten-free, and dairy-free. Tender, perfectly caramelized, and seasoned with cumin and paprika, these veggies are just as tasty as they are nutritious. Serve this recipe as a snack or appetizer, alongside your favorite weeknight meal, or even as an accompaniment to your holiday table.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 25 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 4 servings (as a side dish)
        Calories 271kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 pound Brussels sprouts trimmed and halved lengthwise
        • 1 pound sweet potatoes peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
        • 2 cloves fresh garlic minced or 1 teaspoon garlic powder
        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley optional or other fresh herbs like fresh sage, thyme or rosemary

        Instructions

        • Preheat oven to 400 degrees F (or 204 degrees C). Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper (or aluminum foil) and set aside.
        • Into a large bowl, place halved Brussels sprouts, cubed sweet potatoes, minced garlic, olive oil, ground cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper.
        • Give it a good toss to ensure that the vegetables are coated with all the seasonings and oil.
        • Transfer onto the prepared baking sheet and make sure that they are spread on a single layer.
        • Roast vegetables in the oven for 20 to 25 minutes, flipping halfway through the cooking process.
        • Transfer the now-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts to a serving platter. Serve it with a sprinkle of fresh parsley.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields about 4 to 5 cups of roasted vegetables, which is ideal for serving 4 people as a side dish. The nutritional values listed below are per serving.
        • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
        • Make-ahead: You can make this recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
        • Store: Bring the roasted vegetables to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. Keep them in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
        • Turn it into a salad: An earlier version of this recipe was tossed with ½ cup of cooked quinoa, 1 cup of arugula, a handful of pumpkin seeds, and pomegranate arils. It was drizzled with a homemade salad dressing. Below are the ingredients you will need to make the dressing:
          • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
          • 2 tablespoons olive oil
          • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
          • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
          • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Nutrition

        Calories: 271kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 674mg | Potassium: 853mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 17158IU | Vitamin C: 101mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/feed/ 20
        1905 Salad https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/#comments Thu, 31 Aug 2023 19:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=70366 Viral salads are all the craze these days, much like the La Scala Salad (aka Kardashian Salad) and Jen Aniston…]]>

        Viral salads are all the craze these days, much like the La Scala Salad (aka Kardashian Salad) and Jen Aniston Salad. And this Columbia 1905 salad recipe has so much rich history, it’s no wonder it has taken the internet by storm.

        Columbia restaurant salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

        What is 1905 Salad?

        The 1905 salad was invented by a waiter named Tony Noriega at the Columbia Restaurant (one of the most iconic restaurants in America) in the heart of the Ybor City neighborhood of the Tampa Bay area in Florida. He was working late at the restaurant one night and used some leftovers in the fridge to create what the restaurant now serves tableside (with some minor adjustments made to the original).

        Contrary to its name, it was actually created in the 1940s and was later adapted by Columbia and added to the menu in the 1970s as an answer to the salad bar. The name of the salad, ‘1905’, was created to celebrate the year the restaurant was founded as Florida’s oldest restaurant.

        Since then, the unique flavors of the 1905 salad have been considered a culinary representation of the Cuban and Spanish heritage of Ybor City and the Tampa Bay area. Because of its Cuban/Spanish origin, the salad goes by many names, including the 1905 Columbia Salad, Cuban 1905 Salad, Florida Salad, Tampa Salad, or Tony Salad.

        Ingredients

        The beauty of the 1905 Columbia salad recipe is that it relies on simple, yet delicious, ingredients. Yet there are details in both the dressing and salad that are important to point out. I highly recommend sticking to the below ingredients to make the original 1905 Columbia salad recipe, but I also offer plenty of substitutions to give it your own unique flavor.

        Columbia Restaurant Salad Dressing

        This Columbia 1905 salad dressing has become so popular over the years, that it is now sold as a salad dressing in grocery stores like Publix and even online stores like Amazon. While you can always buy a bottle, making it at home is so easy. Here’s what you will need:

        1905 salad dressing recipe ingredients with text on the image.
        • Garlic: Freshly minced garlic cloves will provide the best flavor. In this case, I would not substitute it with garlic powder.
        • Dried Oregano: I used dried oregano, but you can use 1 sprig of fresh oregano for a stronger, floral flavor.
        • Worcestershire Sauce: This is the secret ingredient that gives the salad dressing that special umami flavor. Pick up a bottle of the popular Lea and Perrins Worcestershire Sauce (affiliate link) for authentic flavor.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: The original recipe calls for extra-virgin Spanish olive oil, but you can use whichever olive oil you have on hand.
        • White Wine Vinegar: White wine vinegar provides a nice bit of acidity.
        • Fresh Lemon Juice: Use freshly squeezed lemon juice, which would be the juice of about 1 lemon.
        • Kosher Salt + Black Pepper

        Salad Ingredients

        • Iceberg Lettuce: We need 7-8 cups of crisp lettuce, which you can get from about one large head of iceberg lettuce. The key is to slice, rinse, and then dry it really well. If you have a salad spinner, this is the time to use it.
        • Tomatoes: Ripe, juicy tomatoes are key, but any kind will do. My favorites are heirloom, beefsteak, tomatoes on the vine, cherry, or Roma tomatoes.
        • Ham Slices: We need about 4-5 slices of deli ham. Slice them into thin, julienne slices (matchstick strips) when you get home.
        • Swiss Cheese: The same goes for the Swiss cheese. We need about 5 slices, also sliced into julienne.
        • Green Olives: Use pitted green olives, roughly chopped, or even pimento-stuffed green Spanish olives if you want to take it up a notch.
        • Pecorino Romano: The original recipe uses Romano cheese, which is Pecorino Romano sold here in the United States. Pick up a box of finely grated cheese or grate a whole block at home.

        Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

        While I highly recommend sticking to the original 1905 salad recipe, I wanted to make sure I provided you with a few substitutions and optional additions. 

        • Salad Greens: A good substitute for iceberg lettuce would be romaine lettuce. Just be sure to slice it as thinly as you can.
        • Celery Stalks: Add some thinly sliced celery stalks for extra crunch.
        • Black Olives: Swap out the green olives for milder black olives instead.
        • Ham Substitutions: If you are not a fan of ham, you can use thinly sliced, deli-style chicken, turkey breast, salami, or pepperoni, or try some Grilled Shrimp instead.
        • Cheese: If you don’t have Pecorino Romano, finely grated Parmesan cheese will also work.
        • Croutons: Whether store-bought or Homemade Croutons, add a handful to the top for some extra crunch.
        • Hard-Boiled Eggs: Slice or dice some hard-boiled eggs for extra protein.
        • Onion: Toss in some thinly sliced red onion or green onions for an extra savory bite.
        • Make it Vegetarian: Omit the ham and use some Baked Tofu instead, or simply add more Swiss and green olives to compensate for the lack of meaty flavor.

        How to Make 1905 Salad Recipe?

        The recipe for the 1905 salad follows the same basic steps as any other salad: First, whip up the salad dressing, prepare the salad ingredients, and then toss them all together. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

        A collage of images showing how to make Columbia restaurant salad recipe.
        1. Make the 1905 Salad Dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the garlic, dried oregano, and Worcestershire sauce. Slowly add the olive oil while whisking constantly to form an emulsion. Stir in vinegar, lemon juice, salt, and pepper, while still whisking until smooth.
        2. Assemble the Salad: In a large salad bowl, combine lettuce, tomatoes, ham, Swiss cheese, and green olives.
        3. Toss: Toss salad ingredients with the dressing. Sprinkle with Romano cheese, taste for seasoning, and add more, if desired. Serve and enjoy!

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        The Columbia Salad can be made ahead and even stored for later if done properly. Here are my best storage tips:

        • Make Ahead: Columbia restaurant actually recommends making the dressing 1-2 days in advance, but I find it lasts up to 3 days if stored in an airtight container or mason jar in the refrigerator.
        • Storage: The dressed salad will only keep fresh for 1 day. Please be aware that as it sits, it releases all of its juices. If you plan to store the salad for longer or know you will have leftovers, refrain from tossing the salad with the dressing until the day you are going to serve. Store the prepared salad ingredients in a large airtight container with a paper towel to absorb excess moisture for 2-3 days.

        What to Serve With the 1905 Salad?

        This is a hearty salad all on its own, so it can be served simply with bread and butter. The Columbia Restaurant serves it with a Cuban sandwich from the menu. Here at home, I love to serve it as a side salad with any of the following:

        1905 Columbia salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

        Expert Tips

        • Authentic flavors: The reason this salad became so famous is because it is so well-balanced. I highly recommend sticking to the original recipe to bring out all those Spanish flavors. This may mean a quick trip to the store, but I promise it is worth it.
        • Take your time when making the dressing: It’s interesting to note, that The Columbia restaurant actually adds the Worcestershire sauce and lemon juice at the end so that you can taste more of the savory, bright components. But I find the ingredients marry together well when mixed into one. The key is to emulsify the dressing so that the olive oil is mixed well with the Worcestershire sauce, vinegar, and lemon juice. To do so, slowly drizzle in the olive oil and give it one more good whisk just before tossing.
        • Assembly: The salad at the Columbia restaurant is prepared tableside for all guests who order it. If you really want to stick to history, serve this salad tableside for all your family members and friends, and for extra flair.
        • Salt: I intentionally included less salt in the salad dressing since this salad contains many salty ingredients, like ham, Swiss, salty green olives, and grated cheese. Be sure to taste test once you mix the dressing with the salad. The exact measurements will be based on your personal preference.
        • Mix at the last minute: Drizzle with the dressing just before serving to keep the iceberg lettuce crisp and crunchy and the rest of the ingredients fresh.
        • Presentation: Each ingredient brings its own color, taste, and texture, so have fun with the presentation, especially if serving this salad to a crowd. For extra bonus points, serve in a chilled salad bowl to keep it super cold.

        FAQs

        Why is it called 1905 salad?

        Although the 1905 salad was technically invented in the 1940s, it is named after the year the Columbia restaurant was founded.

        Who invented the 1905 salad?

        The 1905 salad was invented by waiter Tony Noriega, who pulled leftovers from the fridge one night after work to create this famous salad.

        How many calories are in a 1905 Columbia Salad?

        One serving of the 1905 Columbia Salad is 306 calories. This will vary based on the amount of Romano cheese you add at the end.

        Other Meal-Worthy Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you try this 1905 Salad recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        1905 Salad from Columbia restaurant in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        1905 Salad Recipe

        Be a part of the viral sensation and make the famous 1905 salad right at home! Made with the iconic Columbia Restaurant’s garlic salad dressing, sweet ham, and creamy cheese, it is an easy salad you can make in 15 minutes.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine Cuban
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 306kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Salad Dressing:

        • 4 garlic cloves minced
        • 2 teaspoons dried oregano
        • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire Sauce
        • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons white wine vinegar
        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For The Salad:

        • 1 head iceberg lettuce sliced and rinsed (~7-8 cups)
        • 1 large ripe tomato sliced
        • ½ cup ham slices* julienned – about ¼ lb or 5 slices of ham
        • ½ cup Swiss cheese julienned – 5-6 slices
        • ½ cup green olives pitted and chopped
        • ¼ cup Pecorino Romano grated or grated Parmesan cheese

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing, whisk garlic, dried oregano, and Worcestershire sauce in a bowl. Gradually add the olive oil while whisking constantly to form an emulsion. Stir in vinegar, lemon juice, salt and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
        • To assemble the Columbia restaurant salad, place iceberg lettuce, sliced tomatoes, julienned ham and Swiss cheese, and green olives in a large bowl.
        • Drizzle the salad with the dressing. Give it a toss until combined. Sprinkle it with Romano cheese.
        • Taste for seasoning, add more if necessary, and serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields a large bowl of salad (about 7-8 cups), which is ideal for 6 servings as a side dish.
        • Ham: The original recipe uses baked ham. If you have some on hand, go ahead and use it. Otherwise, deli-style ham slices are a good substitution. You can also use deli-style chicken/turkey breast or even shrimp.
        • A word on salt: I intentionally included less salt in the salad dressing since this salad contains many salty ingredients, like ham, Swiss cheese, salty green olives, and Romano cheese. Be sure to give it a taste right after mixing it and adjust it according to your taste buds.
        • Store: This salad is best on the day it is made. However, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for one day. Please be aware that it gets watery as it sits, so it is best to give it a good mix before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 306kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 756mg | Potassium: 346mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 857IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 173mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/feed/ 2
        Cherry Tomato Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/#comments Tue, 01 Aug 2023 21:11:43 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69426 Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed…]]>

        Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that allows the cherry tomatoes to shine.

        A bowl of cherry tomato salsa with chips on the side.

        Ingredients

        This cherry tomato salsa recipe only uses the most flavorful, simple ingredients to get its signature freshness. To make this tasty mix, you’ll need the following:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top level with text on each ingredient.
        • Cherry tomatoes: I prefer fresh cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes in this recipe due to their bright, tart flavor. With very minimal difference between the two varieties, both types of tomatoes would work here. Additionally, you can make this simple recipe using any other tomato—heirloom, Roma, colorful cherry tomatoes, or beyond.
        • Onion: I use roughly-chopped white onions in my version, but you can also use red onion for a mild salsa. You can also use green onions (or a combination of both!) if you prefer a less intense flavor profile.
        • Fresh Garlic Cloves
        • Jalapeno: Jalapeno is a spicy, garden-fresh ingredient perfect for adding heat and color to this homemade salsa. If you prefer it to be less spicy, be sure to remove the seeds from your jalapeno prior to chopping.
        • Cilantro: Lemony and bright, chopped cilantro leaves is a classic ingredient in this recipe. However, if you’re not a fan of cilantro, you may either omit the ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as parsley, oregano, or mint.
        • Lime juice: Fresh lime juice is best when making your salsa due to its brilliant, citrusy flavor. While it is not traditional, lemon juice can also be used. If you don’t have any limes (or lemons) on hand, you may also use bottled lime juice in this recipe.
        • Seasonings: Only salt and ground black pepper are necessary to give this fresh salsa recipe its rich taste. For a warmer, nuttier profile, you may also add a pinch of ground cumin.
        • Olive oil: You’ll need olive oil only if you are for making roasted cherry tomato salsa. 

        How to Make Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes?

        Making salsa with cherry tomatoes is a great way to add bright tomato flavor to your favorite recipes. These simple instructions will teach you how to make salsa in two ways: by hand and in the food processor.

        Make it by Hand

        Whether it’s your first recipe or your hundredth, preparing fresh cherry tomato salsa—also known as salsa fresca—is an easy way to add light, zesty flavor to your table. Plus, it only takes 10 minutes!

        Person showing how to make homemade cherry tomato salsa in a collage of photos.
        1. Prepare the tomatoes: Place a colander in another bowl and set the two aside. Then, use a sharp knife to cut the cherry tomatoes into smaller pieces and add them to the colander. Let their juices drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients.
        2. Combine the ingredients: Transfer the cut tomatoes to a medium bowl once drained. Add the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
        3. Add the lime: Drizzle the mixture with lime juice, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
        4. Mix and serve: Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. When ready, serve the salsa fresca with chips or on the side of your main dish.

        In the Food Processor or Blender

        When serving a crowd, the last thing you want to do is spend hours in the kitchen prepping your ingredients. With this simple method, you can make salsa from cherry tomatoes with little prep time.

        Person showing how to make grape tomato salsa in a food processor.
        1. Blend the veggies: Add the onion, garlic, and jalapeno to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse the ingredients 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
        2. Add the tomatoes: Place the cherry tomatoes in the food processor, along with the other ingredients, and process the mixture for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred texture.
        3. Drain: Place a colander over a bowl, and pour the mixture into the colander. Use the back of a spatula to remove as much excess liquid as possible.
        4. Add seasonings: Transfer the drained veggies into a medium-sized bowl. Add the lime juice, salt, and pepper, and stir until combined.

        What if I Want to Roast Tomatoes?

        Roasted cherry tomato salsa adds irresistibly smoky, rich undertones to traditional pico de gallo recipes. Below, I’ll show you how to make a delicious roasted salsa that comes together in no time.

        1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F.
        2. Prep the tomatoes: Arrange the cherry tomatoes on a baking sheet, and drizzle them evenly with a tablespoon of olive oil.
        3. Bake the tomatoes: Roast the tomatoes in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process. Cook until the tomatoes slightly burst. For a fire-roasted cherry tomatoes version, turn on the broiler for the last 2-3 minutes of the cooking time.
        4. Cool the tomatoes: Let the roasted tomatoes rest and cool for 15 minutes. Then, transfer them to a cutting board and chop them to your desired size.
        5. Drain the tomatoes: Place the roasted tomatoes in a colander, and set the colander in another bowl. Once the excess liquid drains away, transfer the tomatoes to a medium bowl.
        6. Add the remaining ingredients: Add the chopped onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, salt, and pepper to the chopped tomatoes. Stir until combined.
        7. Taste and serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning, adding more if preferred, then serve.
        A bowl of salsa with cherry tomatoes from the top view.

        How to Store the Leftovers?

        It’s best to serve homemade salsa with cherry tomatoes the day of, as this condiment tends to get watery as it sits. Therefore, I recommend serving it as-is and draining any excess liquid before plating your sauce.

        However, if you need to store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. If necessary, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.

        How to Serve?

        Pico de gallo with cherry tomatoes is one of the most versatile condiments in my recipe book. Zesty and fresh, this salsa makes a delicious pair with everything from tacos to shrimp.

        • Chips: No one can resist a classic—especially one as simple as this! Serve up your salsa alongside your favorite tortilla chips for the ultimate crowd-ready appetizer, snack, or side dish.
        • Grilled or roasted meat and seafood: If you love grilled meats’ succulent, savory taste, these salsa-friendly recipes are for you! Serve your homemade salsa atop a tender fillet of Grilled Sockeye Salmon or marinated Shrimp Kabobs for a five-star meal perfect for the summer months. You can also add a helping of salsa with my Baked Chicken Kabobs if you’re looking for a tender, healthy meal you can make all year round.
        • Tacos: Want to make an authentic, party-ready Mexican menu with your grape tomato salsa? My Beef Brisket Tacos are packed with savory richness, while my Black Bean Quinoa Tacos recipe is a vegan-friendly and oh-so-delicious alternative.
        • Quinoa or burrito bowls: Few weeknight dinners are as hearty or flavor-packed as a traditional burrito bowl. My Mexican Quinoa (and Instant Pot Mexican Quinoa!) load your favorite fresh, Mexican ingredients into every serving. Or, for a meal better than Chipotle, whip up a Homemade Burrito Bowl that will satisfy your cravings and save money.
        • Eggs: My favorite way to serve a hearty, flavor-packed breakfast is with a side of this light homemade salsa recipe. I love adding this iconic salsa recipe to Mexican breakfast staples like Huevos Rancheros and Mexican Breakfast Casserole.
        • Soups and Chilis: Take your soup game to the next level by adding a dollop of this cherry tomato mixture. This salsa pairs beautifully with soups like Mexican Street Corn Soup and Chicken Tomatillo Soup. It also adds a robust tomato finish to hearty chili recipes like my Quinoa Chili and Easy Chicken Chili.
        • Nachos: No nacho recipe is complete without a helping of salsa. This classic salsa recipe makes a great topping for savory fan favorites like Chicken Nachos and Beef Nachos.

        Expert Tips

        This salsa recipe with cherry tomatoes is easy for any chef to prepare in a snap. These pro tips will ensure that your sauce comes out effortlessly delectable regardless of your experience level.

        • Don’t skip on draining: To keep your salsa from becoming too watery, it’s essential to let your chopped tomatoes rest and drain before adding them to your salsa mixture. Also, be sure to add the seasoning and lime (or lemon) juice only after you drain the mixture, which will result in a perfectly seasoned salsa.
        • Let it rest: While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, I highly recommend making your salsa a few hours in advance and letting it sit in the fridge. The resting time allows the flavors to marinate and develop into a restaurant-quality salsa recipe.
        • Adjust the texture: Salsas come in dozens of different textures, from chunky to pureed. Because the fineness of your chopping doesn’t affect the overall taste of your condiment, feel free to chop your ingredients according to your preference. I recommend a small chop or a food processor for a saucier texture. For a chunkier salsa, cut your ingredients into larger pieces.
        • Taste for seasoning: Any salsa—whether it’s a cherry tomato pico de gallo or an heirloom tomato salsa—needs salt to bring out the ingredients’ natural flavors. Don’t skimp on salt and pepper when seasoning your salsa to ensure your recipe is as flavorful, fresh, and complex as possible.

        FAQs

        Can you make salsa out of cherry tomatoes?

        Yes! Cherry tomatoes have a bright, tart flavor that exquisitely balances the flavors of other salsa ingredients. Plus, their size makes them easy to chop to your desired thickness, resulting in a perfectly tailored mixture.

        Do you need to peel cherry tomatoes for salsa?

        When you use cherry tomatoes for salsa, there’s no need to peel your tomatoes before adding them to your blend. Cherry tomatoes have a thin skin, which won’t affect the overall texture of your condiment once mixed.

        Can I freeze cherry tomato salsa?

        Though you technically can freeze this salsa recipe, I don’t recommend it. Freezer salsa with cherry tomatoes may become mushy and watery, and it tends to lose its flavor the longer it remains in storage. However, if you freeze your salsa, place it in an airtight container before storage and thaw it in the refrigerator overnight or until it reaches your desired consistency. I also suggest draining out any excess liquid and tasting for seasoning before serving.

        Can I use this recipe for cherry tomato salsa for canning

        Unfortunately, this salsa recipe won’t work for canning. Canning requires that you boil your ingredients (and jars) before transferring them to mason jars, and this recipe only uses fresh and/or roasted ingredients.

        Other Fresh Tomato Recipes You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Cherry Tomato Salsa recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A bowl of salsa from cherry tomatoes with chips on the side.
        Print

        Cherry Tomato Salsa Recipe

        This Homemade Cherry Tomato Salsa is the ultimate Mexican party food! This easy recipe is wonderful with chips on the side or to serve as a topping with nachos, tacos, soups, stews & more.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Mexican
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 0 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 36kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 cups cherry tomatoes
        • ½ cup onion roughly chopped
        • 2 cloves garlic roughly chopped
        • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped
        • ½ cup cilantro chopped
        • 4 tablespoons lime juice
        • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper

        Instructions

        Make it by Hand:

        • Place a colander in a bowl and set it aside. Cut up the tomatoes into smaller pieces and place them in the colander. Let the juices drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
        • Drain tomatoes and then transfer them to a medium-sized bowl. Add in the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
        • Drizzle it with lime juice and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
        • Stir to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve it with chips on the side.

        Food processor version:

        • Place onion, garlic, and jalapeno in a food processor. Pulse 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
        • Add the cherry tomatoes and process for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred chunkiness.
        • Pour the mixture into a colander set over a bowl. Using the back of a spatula, remove as much liquid as you can.
        • Transfer to a medium bowl; add lime juice and seasoning. Stir to combine.

        Notes

        • Yield: This recipe yields around 2 cups of salsa that should be good for 4 servings as an appetizer. If you need to serve a crowd you can multiply it as many times as you need. The nutritional values below is per serving.
        • Storage of leftovers: To store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. When ready to serve, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.
        • Texture difference: We prefer the method made by hand, but if you are serving this salsa to a large crowd you can use the food processor method. However, please be aware that, while it tastes similar, the version made in the food processor has a more liquidy texture.
        • Roasted Cherry Tomato Salsa: If you prefer to make your salsa with roasted cherry tomatoes, place them on a baking sheet and drizzle them with a tablespoon of olive oil. Roast for 10-12 minutes in a 450-degree F. preheated oven, making sure to flip them halfway through. Let them drain in a colander and follow the rest of the recipe as written.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 36kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 596mg | Potassium: 317mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 728IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/feed/ 2
        Breakfast Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/#comments Wed, 21 Jun 2023 15:29:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68420 This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a…]]>

        This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a healthy, light breakfast, or serve it with my Fruit Yogurt Dip on the side for a tantalizingly creamy dish perfect for a beautiful brunch spread. You can even use your fruit mix to top off or incorporate it into your morning oatmeal (hello, Yogurt Overnight Oats)for a satisfying morning meal.

        Fruit in a large bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need for Fruit Breakfast Salad

        You only need two sets of simple ingredients for this breakfast fruit salad recipe: the fruits and the fruit salad dressing.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text written on each ingredient.

        Breakfast fruits: Wondering what ingredients to include when you make fruit for breakfast? This classic mix of colorful produce will brighten your table with nutritious, brilliant flavors.

        • Pineapple: Pick out a ripe pineapple that is juicy and sweet.
        • Grapes: You can use both red and yellow grapes in this recipe. However, I would recommend getting the seedless variety.
        • Berries: Nearly any berry will make this simple morning dish full of ripe, juicy flavors. My favorite fresh berries include strawberries, blackberries, and blueberries.
        • Oranges
        • Kiwis
        • Banana: I adore the creamy, sweet taste of fresh bananas. However, you can omit this ingredient if you’re not a fan of the fruit or preparing this recipe beforehand.

        Fruit salad dressing:

        • Orange juice and orange zest: Be sure to use fresh orange juice and orange zest when you make fruit dishes for breakfast. Fresh oranges will give your recipe a delectable balance of tartness and sweetness guaranteed to satisfy your cravings.
        • Lime juice and lime zest: Fresh lime juice is the secret ingredient to giving this dish its zesty, bright flavor—and keeping your fruit fresh for longer! If you don’t have any limes, you can substitute this ingredient for lemon juice and zest.
        • Vanilla extract
        • Ground cinnamon
        • Sweetener: Because this dish gets natural sweetness from fruits, adding an extra sweetener is optional. If you want to enhance the sweetness of your fresh fruit breakfast, add a bit of honey (or honey syrup), maple syrup, or agave. You could also use my Honey Lime Dressing as a citrus-sweet alternative to this classic fruit dressing.

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Fresh mint: Amongst all fresh herbs, I think mint is the most flavorful addition to a fruit salad. Adding a few fresh leaves will enliven every bite of your breakfast fruit recipes while adding a garden-green color.
        • Shredded coconut flakes: I love using unsweetened coconut flakes as a healthy, no added sugar topping for this sweet spread. Not only do their sweet, nutty flavors complement this simple mix, but they also add an irresistibly crunchy texture.
        • Spices: To add a warm, gourmet spice to your fruit bowl recipe, you can substitute a sprinkle of cardamom, nutmeg, or poppy seeds in place of cinnamon.

        Variations Based on Season and Dietary Restrictions

        The best fruits for a fruit salad match the time of year. If you want to transform this easy dish into a seasonal treat or satisfy a dietary need, you’ll love this collection of tasty fruits to use.

        • Summer: Looking to fill your morning fruit bowl with a mixture of sunny, summer-ready produce? I recommend making your summer salad with peaches, plums, raspberries, nectarines, cantaloupe, honeydew, papayas, and mango.
        • Fall: Fall produce makes some of my favorite fruit breakfasts. To make an autumn fruit salad, use apples, figs, pears, and pomegranate seeds for a dish perfect for the holiday season.
        • Winter: To make a winter fruit salad perfect for special occasions, I recommend adding tart, warm-colored fruits like Mandarin oranges, blood oranges, tangerines, grapefruit, and bananas.
        • Spring: When jumping into the garden-fresh spring season, you’ll want these fruits in your breakfast spread. Apricots and strawberries are some of the most spring-forward fruits in the produce aisle.
        • Low-sugar fruit salad: If you are in need of a healthy fruit salad recipe that has low quantities of sugar, I recommend using low-sugar fruits (as recommended by Healthline), like raspberries, strawberries, blackberries, kiwis, and grapefruit.
        • Low-calorie fruit salad: Want to cut down on your morning calorie intake? No problem! Some of the lowest-calorie fresh fruits for breakfast include apples, berries, grapefruit, passion fruit, and stone fruits (e.g., peaches, nectarines, and apricots).

        Hot to Make Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

        You don’t need a home garden to make a healthy breakfast. While it takes a bit of time to chop all the fruit, once you have them ready, you can prepare a breakfast or brunch fruit salad in just four simple steps:

        A collage of images showing how to make breakfast or brunch fruit salad recipe.
        1. Add the fruit: Take out a large bowl, and add the fresh strawberries, pineapple, grapes, blueberries, blackberries, cut oranges, and kiwis. Add the banana if you plan to serve this dish immediately. If you’re making this dish ahead, wait to add the banana just before serving.
        2. Make the dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, mix the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon. Either whisk or vigorously shake everything until combined thoroughly. If you are using honey, be sure also to whisk that into the dressing.
        3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the fruit salad and gently toss to combine.
        4. Serve: If using, garnish the fruit salad with fresh mint leaves and serve.

        How To Make Ahead, Meal Prep, and Store?

        It doesn’t matter whether you want a make fruit salad ahead for a crowd or an easy recipe for everyday meal prep. This simple guide will show you how to keep your salad fresh for a few additional days.

        • Make ahead: This recipe is one of the greatest brunch fruit ideas because it’s so easy to make ahead of time. Simply cut up your fruits and place them in a large mixing bowl. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with your prepared dressing.
        • Meal prep: Looking for easy breakfast fruit cup ideas? Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups or mason jars (or Weck Jars (affiliate link) as I did in the photo below), and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
        • Storage: You can store this sugar-free fruit salad in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
        Breakfast fruit placed in glass jars from the top view.

        What to Serve with Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

        Want to serve fruit for a brunch buffet or make a delicious fruit bowl for breakfast? When you make this easy recipe, you’ll discover countless ways to transform seasonal produce into a filling meal. 

        Expert Tips

        It doesn’t matter whether you’re serving this fruit salad for lunch or want to make a kid-friendly fruit salad your children will love. The below tips will ensure your salad is as fresh and flavorful on your first try.

        • Choose fresh fruits: The key to any good fruit breakfast is selecting high-quality fruits. Ensure your produce isn’t bruised or moldy, and try to choose adequately ripe fruit. However, avoid overly ripe fruit, as these ingredients likely won’t hold their shape and become mushy in your salad mixture.
        • Visual interest: To make the best fruit salad for a special event, I recommend using fruits in a variety of colors—red, yellow, green, and beyond! This way, it will look appetizing and add a nice pop of color to your tablescape.
        • Proper cutting: I recommend cutting your fruit into equal bite-sized pieces to ensure your salad is easy to eat. If you’re serving this recipe as a breakfast fruit plate, you can slice your larger fruits, arrange them on a plate, fill the empty spaces with strawberries, and top the spread with blueberries. 
        • Wash and dry your fruit properly: It’s essential to ensure your fruit is clean and safe to eat before incorporating it into your homemade fruit salad. However, remember that some fruits bruise easily, and washing berries requires particular gentleness. Be sure to be equal parts thorough and light when washing your produce.
        • Do not skip on the lime juice or lime zest: Because of its preservational properties, a little lime or lemon juice is a great way to prevent your fruit from browning. Plus, this addition enhances the taste of the salad by balancing its sweet flavors with an irresistible tanginess.
        • Adding banana: Some people think banana has no place as seasonal fruit for summer. However, they add a creamy, mild taste to any fresh fruit salad, and they pack tons of Vitamin C and potassium to fuel you through your day. Still, you can easily omit it if you are not a fan.
        • Dress it right before serving: I recommend dressing the salad right before serving. If you drizzle on the dressing too far in advance, your salad may become overly juicy and soggy.
        • Make it kid-friendly: The below recipe as written, is a great fruit salad for kids due to its bright color, nutritious ingredients, and sweet taste. However, depending on your kids’ age, you may want to cut your fruit into smaller or bite-sized pieces.

        FAQs

        Is it okay to eat a fruit salad for breakfast?

        Yes! Fruit salad makes one of the healthiest options for a quick morning meal due to its high vitamin and mineral content. Plus, depending on which fruits you add, you can kick-start your day with other nutrients, such as potassium, that may help maintain healthy blood pressure, reduce your risk of diabetes, and promote immunity. With that being said, it is important to consume fruit in moderation.

        Is fruit salad a healthy snack?

        Definitely! Doctors recommend that people eat at least 400 grams of fruit per day (or five servings of 80 grams), so eating fruit salad as a snack will help you reach your dietary goals while reducing your risk of disease, aiding weight loss, and enhancing your body’s store of essential nutrients. However, it is always best to consult your doctor and get the best advice for your dietary requirements.

        Should I peel fruits when making fruit salads?

        Peeling your fruit is a personal choice for this breakfast fruit bowl recipe. However, I recommend peeling off any skins that are hard to digest, such as orange, kiwi, and banana peels.

        Can I use frozen fruit?

        Yes, but ensure your fruits are fully thawed (room temperature is best) before adding them to your mixture.

        Other Fruit Breakfast Recipes

        No one can resist a sweet bowl of fruit for breakfast. If you want other ingenious ways to incorporate nutritious fruit into your morning, you’ll love these simple dishes.

        • Yogurt Parfait: If you want a recipe incorporating healthy breakfast fruit with creamy, light Greek yogurt, this dish is precisely what you need.
        • Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal: Pack all the fresh, crisp flavors of the orchard into your morning bowl with this 15-minute recipe.
        • Instant Pot Quinoa Breakfast Bowl: This vegan, gluten-free breakfast recipe comes together in less than 20 minutes and is the perfect make-ahead dish.
        • Peach Galette: Search no more for a healthy dessert. This sophisticated recipe makes for the perfect brunch dessert—especially when served with my fan favorite Honey Vanilla Ice Cream.
        • Christmas Morning Fruit Salad: I switch things up a bit during the holidays and make a salad with the red and green fruit in season for a festive treat.
        • Can’t get enough? Check out all our fruity desserts.

        If you try this Breakfast Fruit Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Breakfast fruit salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Breakfast Fruit Salad Recipe

        Here is a breakfast fruit salad that will help you start the day in a healthy way. Made without the use of any additional sugars, this easy fruit salad can be served by itself or as a side dish served with baked goods, eggs, or oatmeal.
        Course Breakfast, Brunch
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 131kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Fruit Salad

        • 2 cups pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into 1-inch pieces
        • 1 cup grapes rinsed and halved
        • 1 cup strawberries rinsed, hulled, and quartered
        • 1 cup blueberries rinsed
        • 1 cup blackberries rinsed
        • 1 orange peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
        • 2 Kiwis peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
        • 1 banana peeled and sliced – optional

        For The Salad Dressing

        • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 teaspoon orange zest
        • 2 teaspoons lime zest
        • 4 tablespoons lime juice from approximately 2 limes
        • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
        • teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • Handful of fresh mint leaves chopped – Optional

        Instructions

        • Place the pineapple, grapes, strawberries, blueberries, blackberries, cut orange, and kiwi in a large bowl. If you are serving it right away, add the banana, but if you are making it ahead of time, we recommend adding the banana right before serving.
        • To make the fruit salad dressing, combine the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon* in a small bowl or mason jar. Whisk or shake vigorously to incorporate.
        • Drizzle the fruit salad with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
        • If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 8-9 cups of breakfast fruit salad. The nutritional values below are for 1 serving.
        • Sweetener*: As we were working on this recipe, we wanted it to be a healthy no-sugar-added breakfast option. However, if preferred, you can add a tablespoon (or more) of honey (or honey simple syrup) to the dressing. Honey-sweetened fruit salad is slightly sweeter but has a subtle (but welcome) honey flavor.
        • Make ahead: If you want to make it ahead, simply cut up the fruit (except the banana) and prepare the dressing. Store them in separate airtight containers. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with the prepared dressing.
        • Meal prep: Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups, mason, or weck jars, and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
        • Storage: The leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
        • Making it for a crowd? Feel free to multiply the recipe as many times as you need.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 131kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 232IU | Vitamin C: 93mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/feed/ 4
        Red Skin Potato Salad https://foolproofliving.com/red-skin-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-skin-potato-salad/#comments Tue, 20 Jun 2023 16:27:30 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68332 After you make this classic red potato salad recipe, you won’t be able to resist making dozens of other crowd-pleasing…]]>

        After you make this classic red potato salad recipe, you won’t be able to resist making dozens of other crowd-pleasing sides. Whip up a Deviled Egg Potato Salad for a healthy alternative to traditional deviled egg dishes, or prepare a Caper Potato Salad for a gourmet version of this iconic dish. Want to complete your dinner spread? Any of my Summer Salads will enliven your table with crisp, colorful, and garden-fresh flavors.

        Red potato salad with bacon and eggs in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This easy red potato salad recipe uses a handful of simple ingredients to achieve its creamy texture and irresistible taste:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Red potatoes (aka Red Bliss Potatoes): This recipe requires about three pounds of red skin potatoes. Though you can cook your potatoes whole, I recommend cutting them into one-inch cubes to help them cook faster and to eliminate the need to cut your potatoes post-boiling. I also prefer to leave the skin on, though you can remove the skin before cooking if desired.
        • Bacon: Inspired by the fan-favorite German potato salad, we are adding a generous amount of bacon to the savory salad mixture. I use oven-baked turkey bacon for this dish, though you can also prepare it with my Air-Fried Turkey Bacon recipe to reduce cooking time. You can also make your red-skinned potato salad with regular baked bacon if you prefer something other than turkey bacon.
        • Mayonnaise: You can use whatever quality mayo brand you like for your potato side. However, you can also use vegan mayo to accommodate various dietary lifestyles.
        • Apple cider vinegar
        • Dijon mustard: Though I prefer the tangy, sharp taste of Dijon mustard in my homemade red potato salad, grainy mustard will also work in this recipe.
        • Seasonings: You only need Kosher salt and black pepper to season this dish.
        • Fresh dill: Fresh dill gives this recipe its light, garden-fresh overtones. You can also use one tablespoon of dried dill if you don’t have fresh dill on hand.
        • Celery stalks: Bu sure to chop them finely.
        • Scallions: I recommend using the white and green parts of your green onions to give your salad a delectable balance of robust and mild flavors.
        • Hard-boiled eggs: You can prepare your creamy red potato salad with egg or without egg. If you choose to include boiled eggs, I recommend using a process that I think is the best way to cook hard-boiled eggs. Once cooked, cut the eggs into ½-inch cubes and use them to top your side dish.
        • Dill pickles: Adding a few tablespoons of chopped dill pickles gives this dill red potato salad a deliciously pickled flavor. For a milder taste, you may omit this ingredient.

        Substitutions and Variations

        • Potatoes: If you prefer not to use red-skin potatoes, you can use red new potatoes or baby red potatoes. If you use baby red potatoes, be sure that they are of equal size before boiling. You could also use other waxy potatoes that will hold their shape during cooking, such as Yukon Gold or Yellow Finn. Though keep in my that other potatoes, like russet potatoes, will fall apart while boiling.
        • Greek yogurt: For a lighter, tangier version of this potato salad, use ½ cup of Greek yogurt and ½ cup of mayonnaise to make the creamy dressing.
        • Sour cream: Mix ½ cup of mayonnaise with ½ cup of sour cream to make a classic Southern red potato salad. This red skin sour cream potato salad will have a slightly brighter, tarter flavor.
        • Fresh herbs: Don’t want to make red potato salad with dill? You can omit this ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley or chives.
        • Vinegar or lemon juice: If you don’t have any apple cider vinegar in your pantry, you can make a red potato vinegar salad with red wine vinegar or white wine vinegar. You may also use fresh lemon juice to make this recipe without vinegar.
        • Red onion: To make this dish milder, substitute the scallions with Pickled Red Onions for a tangier taste or Roasted Red Onions for a more caramelized flavor.
        • Sweet relish or sweet pickles: You can make your red bliss potato salad less briny by swapping the dill pickles for a sweeter alternative, like sweet relish, dill pickle relish, or sweet pickles. Or you can also use briney black or green olives.
        • Garlic: Recipes for old-fashioned red-skin potato salad generally include one teaspoon of garlic powder for bolder undertones. However, you could also make this version with one fresh garlic clove.

        How to Make Red Skin Potato Salad

        The best part about this recipe is how simple it is. These easy instructions will teach you how to cook red potatoes and prepare a delicious dressing that brings every ingredient to life.

        1. Prepare the potatoes: Place the cubed red-skinned potatoes in a large pot. Fill the pan with enough cold water to cover the potatoes, plus an extra inch of the pot. Cover it with a lid. Transfer the pot to the stove and bring the water to a boil over high heat. Once boiling, reduce the heat to medium so the water maintains a gentle boil.
        Person showing how to make potato salad with red potatoes in a collage of images.
        1. Cook the potatoes: Lightly boil the red-skin potatoes for about 7-8 minutes until fork tender. When done, you should be able to spear the potatoes easily with a sharp knife. The cubes should be tender but not falling apart.
        2. Drain: Remove the pot from the heat and drain it so that only the potatoes remain. Place potatoes in a large mixing bowl and let them cool slightly on the counter.
        3. Cook the bacon: If you are new to cooking baking in the oven, be sure to check out my recipe for Baked Turkey Bacon for step-by-step instructions. However, in a nutshell, these are the steps to cook bacon. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. and line a baking sheet tray with parchment paper or aluminum foil. Add a wire rack atop the lined tray. Place four strips of turkey bacon on top of the rack, ensuring the strips don’t overlap. Transfer the turkey bacon to the preheated oven. Cook for 10 minutes, flip the strips, and cook them for another 5 minutes. Let them cool for five minutes before roughly chopping them into bite-sized pieces.
        4. Prepare the dressing: Take out a small bowl while the potatoes and bacon cook. Add the mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, Kosher salt, and pepper, and whisk the ingredients. Once combined, add the chopped dill and whisk again.
        A collage of images showing how to assemble red skin potato salad.
        1. Assemble the red potato potato salad: Add the chopped celery, scallions, dill pickles, and turkey bacon into the large bowl where you put the potatoes earlier.
        2. Add the dressing: Drizzle the potato mixture with dressing and toss it gently so that it coats all ingredients equally.
        3. Serve: If using, sprinkle the chopped hard-boiled eggs on top of the red potato salad. Serve the dish immediately or cover it with saran wrap and refrigerate until ready to serve.

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        Red-skinned potato salad is a must-have recipe for hassle-free prep time. Prepare it ahead for effortless potluck preparation, or save your leftovers to enjoy days later.

        • Make ahead: You can prepare this delicious recipe one day in advance. However, if you plan to include eggs, I recommend adding them to the mixture just before serving.
        • Storage: Store your leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge, and they will stay fresh for up to 1-2 days. Because the flavors may settle or change during storage, I recommend stirring the mixture before serving and tasting it so that you can adjust its seasoning as necessary.

        What to Serve with Red Potato Salad?

        You’ll have countless pairable meals for any occasion when you make potato salad with red potatoes. This collection has everything from summer cookout menu ideas to weekday sandwiches.

        Person mixing red bliss potato salad in a bowl.

        Expert Tips

        There’s no secret to making a deliciously savory and tender bacon red potato salad. Everyone can whip up this fan-favorite side using my beginner-friendly cooking suggestions.

        • Cooking potatoes: The trick to making the best red potato salad recipe ever is correctly cooking the potatoes. Begin by filling your pan with cold water and letting your potatoes heat up in the pot. Doing so allows the potatoes to cook in gentle heat resulting in more evenly cooked creamy potatoes. Additionally, this soaking process will reduce boiling time and ensure your potatoes have a tender texture.
        • Dress properly: I recommend letting your potatoes reach a lukewarm temperature before adding the additional ingredients. If your potatoes are too hot, they will absorb the added liquid, which may result in a mushy potato salad. However, the temperature at which you add your ingredients is entirely up to your preference.
        • Presentation tips: One of the biggest complaints about potato salad is that it looks bland. My solution is to reserve some of the ingredients used in the recipe and sprinkle them on top when mixed with the dressing. A redskin potato salad topped off with bacon bits, fresh herbs, and bright veggies is a treat for the eye.
        • Let it rest: While optional, I recommend letting your potato salad rest for 30 minutes to an hour before serving. This resting time will allow your ingredients to mix their flavors thoroughly so that every bite tastes perfectly balanced.
        • Eggs: When you make this red potato salad with eggs, it’s up to you how you prefer to mix them. I like adding the eggs as a topping to keep them from getting buried in the mix. However, you could also add them along with your other dressing ingredients so that they appear evenly throughout the potato salad.
        • Serve warm, at room temperature, or cold: As it is with most potato salads, this red potato and egg salad can be served lukewarm, at room temperature, or cold. However, if you are serving it as a part of your summer barbecue menu on a hot day, it is advised to place it above a bowl filled with icy water to maintain its coolness.

        FAQs

        Wondering whether red potatoes are good for potato salad or how to prepare your veggies? This handy guide answers all your questions about this delicious potato salad recipe.

        Can you make potato salad with red potatoes?

        Yes! Not only can you make potato salad with red potatoes, but I also highly recommend it. Red potatoes hold their shape better than other potatoes during the boiling process, and they bring a sweet, buttery flavor to your potato salad.

        How long to boil red potatoes for potato salad?

        The time it takes to cook red potatoes may vary depending on their sizes. However, after cutting them into one-inch cubes and letting your water boil, your potatoes should only need to cook for 7-8 minutes until they are fork-tender. Keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the size of your potato cubes and cooking time. To check for doneness, insert a knife into the center of a potato piece. If it enters and exits easily, your potatoes are ready.

        Do I need to peel the skin of red potatoes when making potato salad?

        Not at all! I prefer to leave the skin on when I make this red potato salad recipe with bacon. Not only does this add color to the potato salad, but it also ensures you keep the nutrients present in the red potato skin. However, you can peel your potatoes first if you’d prefer not to include the skin.

        Are red or white potatoes better for potato salad?

        Whether you use red or white potatoes in your potato salad is up to personal preference. I love making this recipe with red potatoes because of their rich, sweet flavor. However, you can use any potato you prefer as long as they are waxy potatoes that can hold their shape during the boiling process, such as Yukon Gold potatoes.

        Other Potato Recipes You Might Like

        Whether you are a Pioneer Woman’s Potato Salad fan or have always made your cherished family recipe, I hope you try our red skin potato salad recipe. And if you happened to have any leftover potatoes, here are a few other potato recipes you might also like:

        If you try this Red Skin Potato Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Red skinned potato salad with bacon in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Red Skin Potato Salad Recipe

        This Red Potato Salad recipe is packed with creamy potatoes, crispy bacon, crunchy celery, and earthy fresh herbs and then drizzled with a creamy salad dressing. It is the perfect side dish for summer BBQs, picnics, potlucks, and more.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 20 minutes
        Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 364kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 pounds red potatoes cleaned and cut into 1-inch cubes
        • 6 strips turkey bacon* roughly chopped – or regular bacon
        • 1 cup mayonnaise
        • 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
        • 2 tablespoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 2 tablespoons fresh dill chopped
        • 2 stalks celery chopped
        • ¼ cup scallions thinly sliced or red onions
        • 2 hard-boiled eggs cut into ½ inch cubes – optional
        • 3 tablespoons chopped dill pickles – optional

        Instructions

        • To cook the potatoes: Place the cubed potatoes in a large pan and fill them with cold water, making sure that the water covers the potatoes plus an additional inch. Cover the pan.
        • Place the pan on the stove and bring to a boil over high heat. Turn down the heat to medium and let it simmer for 7-8 minutes* or until fork tender (but not falling apart.)
        • Remove from the heat and drain. Transfer it to a large salad bowl and let it cool slightly.
        • To cook the turkey bacon: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet tray with parchment paper or aluminum foil. Place a wire rack on top of the lined tray. Place the strips of turkey bacon on the wire rack, ensuring the strips do not overlap.
        • Bake for 10 minutes, then flip and cook for an additional 5 minutes. Let them cool slightly, and then cut them into bite-sized pieces.
        • While the potatoes and bacon are cooking, make the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk together the mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, Kosher salt, and pepper. Add the chopped dill and give it a good whisk.
        • To assemble the red potato salad: Add chopped celery, scallions, dill pickles (if using), and turkey bacon into the bowl with the boiled potatoes.
        • Drizzle them with the dressing and gently toss them, ensuring that the dressing is distributed throughout.
        • If using, add the hard-boiled eggs on top*. Serve right away or cover with stretch film and refrigerate until ready to serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-7 cups of salad if you cut your potatoes into 1-inch cubes. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Cook time for potatoes: Please keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the size of your potatoes and cooking time. The best time to check doneness is by inserting a sharp knife into a potato cube.  If it comes in and out easily, it should be cooked.
        • Bacon: I used turkey bacon, but regular bacon can be used. If you are new to cooking bacon in the oven, be sure to check out my detailed post on Baked Turkey Bacon.
        • Eggs: If you are using eggs, you can place them on top at the end or chop them up and incorporate them into the salad with the rest of the ingredients.
        • Make ahead instructions: You can prepare this salad one day in advance. However, if you plan to include eggs, I recommend adding them to the mixture just before serving.
        • Storage: Store your leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge, and they will stay fresh for up to 1-2 days. Because the flavors may settle or change during storage, I recommend stirring the mixture before serving and tasting it so that you can adjust its seasoning as necessary.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 364kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 57mg | Sodium: 824mg | Potassium: 861mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 134IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-skin-potato-salad/feed/ 2
        Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shrimp-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shrimp-salad/#comments Thu, 15 Jun 2023 17:48:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2239 A true Barefoot Contessa classic, this roasted shrimp salad is the same one Ina Garten herself sold in stores. Much…]]>

        A true Barefoot Contessa classic, this roasted shrimp salad is the same one Ina Garten herself sold in stores. Much like her Orzo with Shrimp and Feta Cheese, this recipe comes together in no time at all.

        And if you are a serious shrimp lover, be sure to make Shrimp Scampi and BBQ Shrimp Skewers, too.

        Barefoot Contessa's roasted shrimp salad with mayonnaise from the top view.

        Ingredients

        Ina Garten’s shrimp salad is a mix of pantry and fresh ingredients that are easy to find at the grocery store. Here are my best tips when shopping for this roasted shrimp salad recipe:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Shrimp: Buy whole shrimp labeled 16-20 or 21-25 (this is an indication of the size and number of shrimp per pound). You can peel and devein them yourself or purchase deveined shrimp to save yourself some time. If using frozen shrimp, thaw completely by placing the bag in a bowl of cold water for about 30 minutes.
        • Olive oil: Use good olive oil, preferably extra virgin olive oil if you have it on hand.
        • Mayonnaise: When first testing this recipe, we found the original 1 cup mayo Ina Garten used was too much, so I reduced it to ½ cup. As always, taste and adjust based on your desired preference.
        • Orange zest and orange juice: Orange zest and orange juice are the key ingredients that make this recipe so delicious and unforgettable. Lemon zest and lemon juice can be used in its place, but I highly recommend making it with orange.
        • Vinegar: The recipe uses white wine vinegar, but apple cider vinegar, red wine vinegar, or whatever you have on hand will work.
        • Fresh dill: While fresh dill is very classic and delicious, fresh herbs like fresh parsley would be great, too.
        • Capers: Make sure the capers are drained before adding to the salad. Not a fan? Use dill pickles or omit them altogether.
        • Red onion: Raw red onion adds a nice savory crunch. Replace it with Pickled Red Onions or Roasted Red Onions for a mild onion flavor. Or you can also use an equal amount of chopped scallions.

        Optional Add-Ins and Variations

        Although not included in the original recipe, here are some fun and creative add-ins to make this shrimp recipe your own:

        • Seasoning: While the shrimp is seasoned simply with Kosher salt and black pepper, you can add some nice flavor with 1 teaspoon of Old Bay seasoning, blackened seasoning, or a pinch of red pepper flakes for some heat.
        • Savory: One teaspoon of Dijon mustard or Worcestershire sauce mixed into the dressing would add a welcome savory bite.
        • Avocado: Add one cubed ripe avocado to the salad for some extra creaminess.
        • Salad greens: Serve it over a bed of mixed greens or thinly sliced romaine lettuce for some extra crunch.
        • Other veggies: Add additional fresh, crisp vegetables like diced English cucumbers, halved red cherry tomatoes, or diced bell peppers.

        How to Make Barefoot Contessa’s Shrimp Salad?

        This Ina Garten Shrimp Salad recipe is so easy to make and can be ready to serve in just about 1 hour, thanks to the shrimp’s quick cooking time. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

        1. Preheat Oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
        A collage of images showing how to cook the prawns.
        1. Prep Shrimp: Pat the shrimp dry with paper towels. Spread into one single layer on a baking sheet, drizzle with olive oil, and season with salt and pepper. Toss gently to ensure the shrimp is coated with the oil and seasonings.
        2. Roast Shrimp: Roast the shrimp for 6-8 minutes, flipping them halfway through, until pink, pearly, and slightly curled into a ‘C’. Remove from the oven and let it cool for a few minutes. Transfer to a large bowl and set aside.
        A collage of images showing how to mix the roasted shrimp with the mayo dressing.
        1. Make Dressing: While the shrimp is roasting, whisk together the mayonnaise, orange zest, orange juice, and vinegar in a large mixing bowl. Add the dill, capers, and red onion and mix until combined.
        2. Toss: Pour the dressing over the shrimp and toss to combine. Cover with plastic wrap and set aside for 30 minutes before serving.

        How to Make Ahead and Store

        Ina Garten’s shrimp salad is a wonderful make-ahead recipe and keeps well in the refrigerator. To do so, simply:

        • Make Ahead: Make this shrimp salad up to 1 day in advance. Allow to cool to room temperature, then cover and store in the fridge. Remove from the fridge 30 minutes prior to serving.
        • Storage: Leftover shrimp salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. The sauce will sink to the bottom over time, so give it a good stir before serving.

        What to Serve With This Recipe?

        A fabulous Barefoot Contessa shrimp salad can be served in a number of elegant and sophisticated ways. Some of my favorites include:

        Roasted shrimp salad in a bowl with bread and wine on the side.

        Expert Tips

        • Use good quality ingredients. Your favorite brand of mayonnaise and olive oil will make the shrimp salad taste that much better.
        • A note on frozen shrimp: If you are using frozen shrimp, make sure it is fully thawed before cooking. According to Bon Appetit, frozen shrimp is better than fresh shrimp. But as always, shop for shrimp that is easily available to you.
        • Shrimp cooks very quickly. It is easy to overcook shrimp, so pay attention to the cooking time. Because it cooks so fast, I do not recommend using parchment paper, as the hot heat from the sheet pan does a better job of cooking the shrimp evenly.
        • Allow the shrimp to cool slightly before tossing with the sauce. You want warm shrimp, not piping hot. The gentle warmth will better absorb the dressing.
        • Put the sauce in the shrimp. Just as Ina Garten notes on the Food Network, add the sauce to the shrimp rather than adding the shrimp to the sauce. This way, you can moderate the amount of sauce you want tossed with the shrimp.
        • Let it rest before serving. Once Ina’s shrimp salad is prepared, cover it and allow it to rest for 30 minutes at room temperature to allow the flavors to marry together. Or, just as Ina Garten recommends in her cookbook, set it in the fridge for up to 6 hours before serving.

        Other Shrimp Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you try this Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Adapted from Ina Garten’s  Barefoot Contessa, How Easy Is That? cookbook – Roasted Shrimp Salad recipe.

        Ina Garten's roasted shrimp salad recipe in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad Recipe

        Ina Garten’s roasted shrimp salad is a deli-style salad perfect for BBQs, picnics, potlucks, and holidays all year round. Surprisingly delicious, thanks to the addition of orange juice and orange zest, once you try this easy recipe, you will never buy roasted shrimp salad from the store again.
        Course Lunch, Seafood Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 8 minutes
        Resting time 30 minutes
        Total Time 48 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 276kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Roasted Shrimp:

        • 2 lbs shrimp 16-20 or 21-25 peeled and deveined
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For The Dressing:

        • ½ cup mayonnaise
        • 1 tablespoon orange zest from 2 oranges
        • 2 tablespoons orange juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 tablespoon white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
        • ¼ cup chopped fresh dill
        • 2 tablespoons capers drained
        • 2 tablespoons red onion small diced

        Instructions

        • Preheat Oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
        • Prepare Shrimp: Using a sheet of paper towel, pat dry the shrimp on both sides. Transfer onto a sheet pan. Spread the shrimp on a single layer, drizzle with olive oil, and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss together to ensure that the shrimp is evenly coated with oil and seasoning.
        • Roast Shrimp: Roast for 6-8 minutes, flipping them halfway through roasting. Remove from the oven and let it cool for a few minutes. Transfer to a large bowl and set it aside.
        • Make the salad dressing: Meanwhile, make the dressing by whisking together the mayonnaise, orange zest, orange juice, and vinegar in a mixing bowl. Add the dill, capers, and red onion and mix to combine.
        • Toss, rest and serve: Pour the dressing over the shrimp and toss to combine. Cover with stretch film and let it rest at room temperature for 30 minutes before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 4-5 cups of salad, good for approximately 6 (appetizer) servings. The approximate nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Make Ahead: Make it up to 1 day in advance. Allow to cool to room temperature, then cover and store in the fridge. Remove from the fridge 30 minutes prior to serving.
        • Storage: Leftover shrimp salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. The sauce will sink to the bottom over time, so give it a good stir before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 276kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 243mg | Sodium: 556mg | Potassium: 435mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 171IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 106mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shrimp-salad/feed/ 14
        Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-cucumber-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-cucumber-salad/#comments Mon, 29 May 2023 20:06:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=19835 The best thing about this cucumber Greek yogurt salad is that it is easy to make with the most delicious…]]>

        The best thing about this cucumber Greek yogurt salad is that it is easy to make with the most delicious yogurt salad dressing. Plus, it is made with a handful of ingredients you probably already have in your pantry.

        If you are a fan of similar easy Greek yogurt-based recipes, check out our Tzatziki (aka Greek cucumber salad dressing), Greek Yogurt Coleslaw, Pasta with Greek Yogurt Sauce, and Greek Yogurt Chicken Salad recipes.

        Greek cucumber salad recipe with greek yogurt dressing in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need:

        You only need a few basic ingredients and a few pantry staples to make this cucumber yogurt salad. The ingredients list has two parts:

        Ingredients for cucumber yogurt salad recipe from the top view.

        For the Greek yogurt salad dressing, you will need the following:

        • Greek yogurt: I recommend using full-fat plain Greek yogurt for the most creamy Greek cucumber salad. However, low-fat Greek yogurt or plain yogurt would also work.
        • Garlic cloves: Be sure to mince them finely to easily incorporate them into the dressing.
        • Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is the best. 
        • Extra virgin olive oil: A drizzle of olive oil deepens the flavors of this yogurt dill cucumber salad, but it is an optional ingredient.
        • Vinegar: All you need is a splash of red wine vinegar to brighten up the yogurt salad dressing. I used red wine vinegar, but white wine vinegar, rice vinegar, or even apple cider vinegar would also work.
        • Fresh Dill: A small amount of chopped fresh dill is a classic ingredient for any Mediterranean cucumber yogurt salad recipe, and this one is no exception. If you find the flavors of fresh dill too strong, you can use a teaspoon of dried dill instead.
        • Kosher Salt and Pepper

        For The Salad, you will need:

        • Cucumbers: I used English cucumbers (aka seedless cucumbers) as they have fewer seeds than most other types of cucumbers. However, Persian cucumbers (aka Lebanese cucumbers) and garden cucumbers (the most popular type you find in US grocery stores) would all work. Removing and peeling the seeds is optional and depends on the type of cucumber you use. 
        • Onion: A small amount of sliced red onion pairs beautifully with all the other flavors of this creamy cucumber dill salad. However, scallions can be used as a substitute.

        Optional Add-ins and Substitutions:

        • Sour cream: Not a fan of yogurt? Use sour cream instead. I recommend using a lesser amount, about ½ cup. If you are a fan of mayo, you can add a few tablespoons to make it a bit more tangy and flavorful.
        • Fresh herbs: If fresh dill is not your favorite, substitute it with fresh mint and fresh parsley. While you can omit fresh herbs altogether, I love the burst of fresh flavor they bring to this summer salad.
        • Seasoning: Add a teaspoon of my Mediterranean seasoning blend to the creamy yogurt dressing for an even more authentic flavor.
        • Honey: You can add a teaspoon of honey to the tzatziki sauce salad dressing if you want your yogurt cucumber dill salad to taste slightly sweet.
        • Lemon Zest: I find that a small amount of lemon zest helps enhance the flavor of the creamy dressing and make it even more citrusy, but it is optional.
        • Ranch Dressing: If you are a fan of ranch flavors and don’t mind a different flavor profile (with a more American twist), you can use our yogurt ranch dressing instead of the yogurt sauce in the recipe below.

        How To Make Cucumber Greek Yogurt Salad?

        Making cucumber salad with yogurt dressing cannot be easier. If you have 10 minutes, you can make this recipe. Here are the steps:

        A collage of images showing how to make cucumber salad with Greek yogurt.
        1. Make the yogurt dressing: In a small mixing bowl, whisk together Greek yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, olive oil, vinegar, fresh dill (if using), kosher salt, and black pepper until creamy.
        2. Slice the cucumbers: If preferred, peel the cucumbers. Using a mandoline slicer or a sharp knife, slice them in ¼-inch thickness. Transfer to a large bowl along with sliced red onions.
        3. Dress the cucumbers: Drizzle the vegetables with the creamy yogurt dressing and gently toss to ensure all of the cucumbers are evenly coated. 
        4. Taste for seasoning & serve: Give it a taste and add more if necessary. Serve.

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        When it comes to summer cookouts, planning, and meal prepping are key. Thankfully, with just a few steps, you can make this creamy cucumber salad a day ahead and put it together in minutes. Here is how I do it:

        • To Make Ahead: Make the creamy Greek yogurt dressing up to 3 days in advance and store it in a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Slice cucumbers and red onion a day in advance and store them in separate containers. When ready, assemble the salad as directed in the recipe card below.
        • To Store Leftovers: Place the leftover Greek cucumber yogurt salad in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Please be aware that cucumber slices will release their juices as they sit. You can drain the excess liquid or add a few tablespoons of Greek yogurt to thicken the dressing. Regardless of which method you choose, be sure to give it a toss before serving.

        What To Serve It With?

        This easy cucumber salad pairs beautifully with various of main dishes and similar salads. Here are some suggestions for pairing:

        Expert Tips:

        While this creamy cucumber salad with Greek yogurt is pretty straightforward, there are a few things to pay attention to for the best results. Here are a few tips I learned during my recipe testing:

        • Use a mandolin slicer: If you have a mandolin slicer, this is the time to use it, as thinly sliced cucumbers make for a more aesthetically pleasing and delicate salad. Not to mention, it makes the process of making this yogurt and cucumber dish much faster.
        • Salt cucumbers: The cucumbers will inevitably release their juices as they sit. However, if you have the time, you can place the sliced cucumbers in a bowl fitted with a colander and sprinkle them with half a teaspoon of salt. Give them a toss and let the juices drain for 15-30 minutes. Doing so will draw the water out of the cucumbers and ensure that your cucumber yogurt dill salad remains crisp rather than becoming watery. 
        • Chill before serving: This salad can be served right away, but letting it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes to an hour allows all the flavors to blend and intensify, resulting in an even more refreshing yogurt cucumber salad. 
        • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste before serving and add more seasoning if necessary.
        Greek Yogurt Cucumber salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

        FAQs

        Is Greek yogurt and cucumber good for you?

        According to Healthline, Greek yogurt is high in many nutrients and a good source of protein, fat, and carbohydrate source. Conversely, cucumber is a nutritious and low-calorie fruit that is high in water content and provides many essential nutrients and vitamins. So, consuming yogurt and cucumber together, as we do in this healthy cucumber salad, can be good for you.

        How do you keep cucumbers crisp in a salad?

        You can keep cucumbers crisp by salting them for 15-30 minutes before assembling the salad. Place cucumber slices in a colander set in a bowl. They should release their juices as they sit. Drain and use them in your salad.

        How to thicken a cucumber salad?

        You can thicken your cucumber salad by adding and tossing a few tablespoons of extra Greek yogurt into the salad.

        Other Cucumber Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you try this Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Greek yogurt cucumber salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad Recipe

        This Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad is a refreshing and healthy side dish you can make in 10 minutes. Tossed in a tangy, tzatziki-inspired Greek yogurt dressing, it is a lighter and healthier alternative to mayo or sour cream-based cucumber salads.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 76kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1/2 cup plain Greek yogurt full fat
        • 2 cloves garlic ~ 1 1/2 teaspoons, minced
        • cup lemon juice freshly squeezed – from 2 lemons
        • 1 teaspoon extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
        • ¼ cup chopped fresh dill optional
        • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 English cucumber* sliced in 1/4 inch slices (peeling is optional)
        • ¼ cup thinly sliced red onion or scallions – optional

        Instructions

        • To make the yogurt dressing, whisk together yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, olive oil, vinegar, dill (if using), salt, and black pepper.
        • Place cucumber and red onion slices in a large salad bowl.
        • Drizzle the cucumber salad with the Greek yogurt dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This cucumber salad yields approximately 4 cups of salad (with ~ 2/3 cup yogurt dressing). It is ideal for 4 servings if you are serving it as a side dish. If you are serving it to a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe as many times as you need.
        • Cucumber: I used an English cucumber, but yu can also use 4-5 (smaller) Persian cucumbers. 
        • To Make Ahead: Make the yogurt dressing up to 3 days in advance and store it in a jar. Slice cucumbers and red onion a day in advance and store them in separate containers. When ready to serve, place cucumber and onion slices in a bowl, drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine.
        • To Store Leftovers: Place the leftover cucumber salad in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Please be aware that cucumber slices will release their juices as they sit. You can drain the excess liquid or add a few additional tablespoons of Greek yogurt to thicken the dressing. Be sure to toss before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 76kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 609mg | Potassium: 177mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 340IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 92mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-cucumber-salad/feed/ 37
        Honey Lime Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/#respond Thu, 11 May 2023 16:00:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67142 I know it is convenient to buy salad dressing from the store, but once you learn to make your own,…]]>

        I know it is convenient to buy salad dressing from the store, but once you learn to make your own, you will never want to spend money on dressings that are usually made with low-quality ingredients. Plus, most homemade dressings can also be used as a marinade for meat and vegetables, and this honey lime vinaigrette dressing is no exception.

        The good news is that our recipe archives have so many dressings to choose from. For a simple yet satisfying option, try our Lemon Olive Oil Dressing, or indulge in the rich flavors of Balsamic Lemon Vinaigrette for a more elevated taste experience. And if you like spicy food, our Chili Lime Dressing is a must-try!

        Person holding a jar of honey lime vinaigrette in her hand with fresh lime around it.

        Ingredients

        All you need is 5 simple ingredients for this honey lime dressing. And guess what? You probably already have everything in your pantry. Below is what you’ll need:

        Ingredients for lime dressing for salad from the top view.
        • Extra virgin olive oil: Olive oil is the base of this honey-lime vinaigrette. However, a neutral oil like avocado oil can also be used.
        • Fresh lime juice and lime zest: Every dressing needs an acid! For the best lime vinaigrette recipe, be sure to use fresh lime. Keep in mind that it is best to zest the lime before squeezing it.  
        • Honey: Honey is the perfect way to balance the tartness of the lime. However, for a vegan version, you can use maple syrup instead.
        • Kosher Salt: A pinch of salt will bring out these wonderful flavors.

        Optional Add-Ins

        While the basic honey lime dressing recipe has more neutral flavors ideal for sweet fruity salads, adding just a few basic ingredients can easily turn it into a dressing (or sauce) for savory salads, grain bowls, and more. Below are a few add-ins to give your sweet, savory, and spicy dishes a pop of flavor:

        • Garlic: One small fresh garlic clove would be a nice addition to any savory salad. However, in a pinch, garlic powder would also work.
        • Shallot: A small shallot or a quarter cup of thinly sliced red onion adds another layer of flavor.
        • Fresh herbs: Fresh cilantro is a great addition to any Mexican-style dressing; this one is no exception. Add a teaspoon of chopped fresh cilantro to turn this into a delectable honey lime cilantro dressing (just like I did in my Black Bean and Quinoa Salad) to use in any of your favorite Southwest-flavored salads. Or, use a few fresh mint leaves for a refreshing flavor twist when incorporating it into your favorite fruit salad.
        • Spices: Add a small amount of ground cumin and/or chili powder to enhance the depth of flavor and add warmth and complexity to any of your favorite Mexican salads with lime dressing.
        • Balsamic vinegar: Add a splash of balsamic vinegar for an additional layer of flavor! Thanks to balsamic vinegar’s rich, sweet, and tangy taste, balsamic lime dressing is a luxurious version of this basic lime juice salad dressing perfect for your next summer or winter fruit salad.
        • Dijon Mustard: Not only is it a natural emulsifier, but adding a small amount (½ to 1 teaspoon) of Dijon mustard can help balance the sweetness from honey and the acidity of the lime juice in the dressing.

        How To Make Honey Lime Dressing?

        You can make a jar of this simple honey lime dressing with only 5 minutes of hands-on time. Juice, zest, whisk, and pour. Here is how to make lime vinaigrette in just 4 simple steps:

        Two photos side by side showing how to make the recipe.
        1. Combine: Lime zest, lime juice, honey, and salt in a small bowl and whisk together. If you decide to use garlic, shallot, or ground cumin, you can add it here. 
        2. Emulsify until creamy: Slowly pour in the extra virgin olive oil and constantly whisk until emulsified.
        3. Season: Give it a taste and adjust it to your liking.
        4. Pour: Drizzle it over your favorite fresh salad or store it in a mason jar and refrigerate for later.

        How To Make Ahead and Store?

        The best part of this honey lime vinaigrette recipe is that it keeps well in the fridge, so you can make it ahead and refrigerate it until you are ready to use it. 

        To store, pour the lime honey dressing into a mason jar (or an airtight container) and keep it in the fridge for up to one week.

        How To Use Lime Honey Dressing

        Wake up your taste buds with the many ways to use this recipe. Try fruit salad with honey lime dressing or marinade chicken before grilling for some mouth-watering goodness. Here are a few ways to use it:

        • Fruit Salads: This dressing is my favorite way to bring together a brunch side dish like summer fruit salad with strawberries, blueberries, pineapple, red grapes, kiwi, or other tropical fruit you like. 
        • Savory Salads: This honey lime salad dressing is the perfect compliment whether your salad is the main course or the side. Pour it over leafy greens like spring mix, butter lettuce, arugula, or kale for a natural sweetness with a kick of citrus. Mix with nuts, cheese, and beans for a sweet and savory combination. It’s my first choice when making Mexican-inspired salads and the ultimate last step for my Southwest Chicken Salad and Corn and Black Bean Salad.
        • Grain Bowls: Another way to use this flavorful honey and lime juice recipe is for grain bowls. It perfectly soaks into couscous, bulgur, and quinoa mixed in with roasted veggies and proteins. You’ve got to try it on my Southwest Quinoa Bowl or even this Caribbean Jerk Chicken Bowl!
        • Marinades: This recipe has more intent than just honey lime dressing for salad. I also use it for marinating chicken, pork, beef, and seafood. The acid from the lime tenderizes the meat, and the honey will caramelize it when cooked. This dressing is one of my go-to recipes when I make Grilled Mahi Mahi and Grilled Shrimp Skewers. I like playing with the ingredients by adding paprika for the Mahi Mahi Marinade and parsley for the Shrimp Marinade.  
        Person drizzling a watermelon salad with honey lime dressing from the top view.

        Expert Tips 

        Check out some of these tips to nail this delicious salad dressing recipe the first time. Here are a few expert tips for the best results:

        • Use fresh ingredients: As with any recipe that uses minimal ingredients, prioritizing using fresh, high-quality ingredients is crucial to achieving great results. You’ll create the best honey-lime dressing that stands out by squeezing fresh limes and using high-quality olive oil.
        • Seasoning: Salt is an important addition to bring out the citrusy and sweet flavors of lime and honey, so do not skip using it (even if you are using this honey lime sauce in a fruit salad.) Additionally, as it is with any recipe, it is best to give it a taste and adjust the amount of seasoning based on your taste buds and the recipe you are using it in.
        • Change it up according to your recipe: This basic Mexican lime dressing can easily be adapted to complement the flavors of the recipe you are using it in. So, take advantage of the use of optional add-ins and make it your own.
        • Emulsify the dressing: While it is convenient to combine all the ingredients in a mason jar and give it a shake, the secret to making an ultra-creamy honey lime dressing lies in the two-step process we are using here. Slowly pouring olive oil into the lime and honey mixture while constantly mixing it ensures perfect emulsification resulting in a smooth dressing. If you skip this step, the salad dressing will not be as creamy.
        • Use a blender or food processor: If you are making a large quantity of this recipe, you can use a blender or food processor.
        • Let it marinate: For maximum flavor, let it marinate for a minimum of 30 minutes to a few hours. I like to let it sit overnight to allow everything to sink in. 
        • Shake well: Dressings separate with time, so if you decide to make it ahead of time, give it a solid shake before using. 

        Other Salad Dressings You Might Like

        It is no secret that a salad is as delicious as its dressing. If you agree, you will love our collection of salad dressing recipes below:

        If you try this Honey Lime Dressing recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A batch of freshly made honey lime salad dressing in a jar from the top view.
        Print

        Honey Lime Dressing Recipe

        This honey lime dressing recipe is a versatile savory vinaigrette you can make with just a few basic ingredients. Endlessly customizable with a number of optional add-ins, it can be used as a drizzle for fruit or savory salads or as a marinade for meats.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 0 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 161kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 teaspoon lime zest
        • ¼ cup lime juice ~ 2 limes (freshly squeezed)
        • 2 tablespoons honey
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

        Optional Add-Ins:

        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 1 small shallot or ¼ cup thinly sliced red onion
        • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin

        Instructions

        • Whisk together lime zest, lime juice, honey, and salt in a small bowl. If using, add in the garlic, shallot, and ground cumin.
        • Slowly pour in the extra virgin olive oil while whisking constantly until emulsified.
        • Taste for seasoning and add in, if necessary.
        • Use it right away or store it in a mason jar in the refrigerator up to a week.

        Notes

        • Yield: This recipe yields approximately 1/2 cup of honey lime dressing.
        • Storage: You can store the dressing in the fridge for up to 7 days.
        • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste and add more if necessary before using it in your recipe. 
        • If you make it ahead, be sure to give it a good shake before using it.
        • While it is convenient to combine all the ingredients in a mason jar and give it a shake, the secret to making an ultra-creamy honey lime dressing lies in the two-step process we are using here. Slowly pouring olive oil into the lime and honey mixture while constantly mixing it ensures perfect emulsification resulting in a smooth dressing. So, for the most creamy dressing, do not skip this part.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 161kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 50mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 10IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/feed/ 0
        Chickpea Salad with Tuna https://foolproofliving.com/chickpea-tuna-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/chickpea-tuna-salad/#comments Wed, 03 May 2023 16:46:38 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=18721 If you never thought of making your tuna salad with chickpeas, then I have got you covered with an exceptional…]]>

        If you never thought of making your tuna salad with chickpeas, then I have got you covered with an exceptional recipe that you will find yourself making over and over again. Protein-rich tuna and fiber-rich chickpeas flavored with homemade salad dressing is the perfect quick lunch recipe.

        Whether you want to turn it into a Tuna Chickpea Sandwich or keep it light over a bed of greens, there are so many possibilities. If you are a tuna fan, be sure to check out this Tuna Melt Sandwich and Tuna Steak Salad to incorporate more seafood into your life, too.

        Chickpea Tuna Salad in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        I like to think of this garbanzo bean tuna salad as a nice mix of pantry staples and fresh ingredients from the grocery store. The list of ingredients has been broken down into the dressing and the salad for ease.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        To make the salad dressing, you will need:

        • Mayonnaise: I like to use vegan mayo made with avocado oil (affiliate link.) However, feel free to use a brand you like.
        • Extra virgin olive oil
        • Dijon mustard: You can use Dijon mustard, stone ground, or whole grain mustard.
        • Lemon juice: As it is in any other salad recipe, freshly squeezed lemon juice provides the best flavor, and this garbanzo tuna salad is no exception.
        • Red wine vinegar: A splash of vinegar helps with brightening up the flavors. You can also use apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar.
        • Fresh garlic cloves: When making salad dressing, I prefer chopped fresh garlic, but in a pinch, garlic powder would also work.
        • Kosher salt + black pepper

        To assemble the salad, you will need:

        • Chickpeas: I used canned chickpeas as they are convenient. Of course, you can cook your own chickpeas for this recipe. If you used canned beans, make sure to drain and rinse beforehand.
        • Canned tuna: When buying tuna, look for sustainably sourced wild-caught tuna in water. This has exceptional flavor, and the tuna will naturally flake when mixing the salad. Keep in mind if you use tuna packed in olive oil, you will have to adjust the quantity of olive oil in the recipe.
        • Tomatoes: You can use grape, Roma, or cherry tomatoes.
        • Celery stalks
        • Green onions: Alternatively, you can also use a thinly sliced small red onion, or Pickled Red Onions would also work.
        • Yellow bell pepper: I used yellow peppers, but any color of bell peppers would work in this recipe.
        • Cucumber: Persian cucumber has a great crunch and holds up well, but a regular cucumber or English cucumber can also be used.

        Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

        • Mayo substitutes: Not a fan of Mayo? Try an equal amount of Greek yogurt, mashed avocado (or a few tablespoons of Creamy Avocado Dressing), or store-bought pesto. A few tablespoons of this Pesto Salad Dressing could be a wonderful substitution too. If none of those work for you, use my all-purpose Lemon Dressing or Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette instead.
        • Add hard-boiled eggs: Incorporating a few eggs into this recipe is a great way to increase the protein content. The addition of eggs also gives it another layer of texture. When preparing them for the salad, be sure to dice them into bite-sized pieces.
        • Add vegetables: Add a handful of sweet vegetables, like cooked corn or green peas, or make it a Mediterranean chickpea tuna salad with drained and rinsed artichoke hearts.
        • Fresh herbs: Finish it with a sprinkle of fresh dill, fresh parsley, fresh basil, or a combination of all three.
        • Cheese (optional): Adding a small amount of crumbled feta cheese would give it a nice creamy flavor. 
        • Dill pickle relish (optional): The briny flavors of pickled relish, whether it is dill pickles or chopped Kalamata olives, or pickled red cabbage, would brighten up the flavors of the overall salad.
        • Salad greens (optional): Adding a handful of arugula, baby spinach, and spring mix or serving the salad on a bed of lettuce is an easy way to up the nutritional value of this simple salad.

        How to Make Chickpea Tuna Salad?

        This tuna garbanzo bean salad recipe is made in a few easy steps. Simply:

        A collage of images showing how to make Tuna and chickpea salad.
        1. Make the dressing: Whisk mayonnaise, extra virgin olive oil, Dijon mustard, lemon juice, vinegar, garlic, salt, and pepper in a small bowl or measuring cup.
        2. Prepare the salad: Place the chickpeas, tuna, tomatoes, celery, scallions ( or sliced red onion), bell pepper, cucumber, and tomatoes in a large salad bowl.
        3. Toss: Drizzle over the dressing and gently toss to combine. 
        4. Serve: If you have the time, marinate for at least 30 minutes before serving.

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

        This simple chickpea tuna salad is the perfect lunch salad that you can incorporate into your weekly meal plan. I’d like to make it over the weekend as it stores well. Here’s how I like to do it:

        • Make Ahead: Prepare the tuna salad as directed. If it is a part of your weekly meal prep lunches, divide it amongst small single-serve airtight containers and keep them in the fridge until ready to eat. With that being said, I usually do not keep tuna past the 3-day mark to avoid spoilage. 
        • Storage: Leftover tuna salad with garbanzo beans will keep in an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid for 2-3 days. If you are making this salad using greens, keep in mind that greens such as butter lettuce, and spring mix will wilt quicker than more sturdy greens such as arugula or kale.

        What to Serve It With?

        Tuna chickpea salad is wonderful all its own, but it can easily be elevated to the next level by serving it in any of the following ways:

        • Bread: Serve it with crusty bread, like Olive Bread, or turn it into a crostini platter with toasted French baguette, cheese, and fruit. I also love it with soft pita bread or pita chips for scooping.
        • Serve it with Grains: Make it the main dish by serving it with a side dish of cooked Quinoa or Bulgur wheat.
        • Make it a side dish with a bowl of soup: Enjoy it throughout the summer months alongside a bowl of Basil Tomato Soup or Cold Cucumber Soup.
        • Turn it into a Sandwich: Layer it between a few slices of your favorite bread (I like pita bread or brioche) or stuff it into a pita pocket to make Tuna Chickpea Sandwich, along with green leaf lettuce and a tomato slice.
        Tuna chickpea salad placed in small bowls from the top view.

        Expert Tips

        While this recipe requires only a few steps and a handful of pantry ingredients, we wanted to share a few expert tips to help you make the best chickpea tuna salad recipe on your first try:

        • Good quality tuna: Look for a high quality (preferably wild caught), sustainably sourced can of tuna in water. This has exceptional flavor and texture.
        • Rinse chickpeas: Make sure to drain and rinse the can of chickpeas to get rid of preservatives and excess salt (or purchase a can with no salt if watching your salt content). 
        • Mash chickpeas: Alternatively, you can mash the chickpeas with a potato masher for a richer and creamy consistency.
        • Taste the dressing for seasoning. The dressing is not too heavy on the salt, so be sure to taste test first and adjust it to your liking.
        • Let it marinate. I highly recommend marinating the salad for at least 30 minutes before serving, either at room temperature or in the fridge, as this helps the ingredients to marry together.

        FAQs

        Which canned tuna is best for tuna salad?

        I suggest using sustainably sourced, wild-caught tuna packed in water for the best flavor.

        Why is chickpea salad good for you?

        A simple chickpea salad like this one is good for you because it is packed with healthy fats, protein-rich chickpeas and tuna, and fiber-rich vegetables. Not to mention, it is super filling and easy to make.

        Other Lunch Salads You Might Also Like:

        Need more inspiration for creative lunch salads that are also on the healthier side and packed with protein? Here are a few more ideas:

        If you try this Chickpea Salad with Tuna recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Chickpea Salad with tuna in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Chickpea Salad with Tuna Recipe

        This Chickpea Salad with Tuna recipe is the perfect weekday lunch. Made with canned tuna and packed with veggies, this is a quick and easy to make salad recipe that is also meal prep friendly.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 267kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Dressing

        • ¼ cup mayonnaise or Greek Yogurt
        • 1 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 teaspoons Dijon mustard
        • cup freshly squeezed lemon juice
        • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar
        • 4 cloves garlic minced
        • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Salad

        • 1 can chickpeas 15 ounces – drained and rinsed
        • 1 can solid packed Tuna in water 5-ounces – drained
        • 1 cup tomatoes – grape or cherry; approximately 5 ounces – halved
        • 3 tablespoons chopped celery about 1 stalk
        • 2 tablespoons chopped scallions or sliced red onions
        • 1 small yellow bell pepper chopped
        • 2 Persian cucumbers sliced and quartered

        Optional Add Ins:

        • 1 tablespoon dill pickle relish or olives- roughly chopped
        • 1 cup canned artichokes quartered
        • 1 avocado sliced
        • 2 cups salad greens such as arugula or spring mix – loosely packed

        Instructions

        • Prepare the dressing: In a bowl or large measuring cup, whisk mayonnaise, extra virgin olive oil, Dijon mustard, lemon juice, vinegar, garlic, and salt and pepper. Taste for seasoning and add more if needed. Set aside while preparing the salad.
        • Prepare the salad: Place the chickpeas, tuna, tomatoes, celery, scallions, bell pepper, cucumber, and tomatoes.
        • Add the dressing and toss to combine.

        Video

        Notes

        • Make Ahead: Prepare the recipe as written. If it is a part of your weekly meal prep lunches, divide it amongst small single-serve airtight containers and keep them in the fridge until ready to eat. With that being said, I usually do not keep tuna past the 3-day mark to avoid spoilage.
        • Storage: Leftover tuna and chickpea salad will keep in an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid for 2-3 days. If you are making this salad using greens, keep in mind that greens such as butter lettuce, and spring mix will wilt quicker than more sturdy greens such as arugula or kale.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 267kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 18mg | Sodium: 869mg | Potassium: 315mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 391IU | Vitamin C: 49mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/chickpea-tuna-salad/feed/ 40
        Roasted Beet Salad with Goat Cheese and Maple Balsamic Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-beet-goat-cheese-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-beet-goat-cheese-salad/#comments Wed, 08 Feb 2023 16:24:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11948 Beet Salad Ingredients The ingredients for this beet salad are all common pantry or fridge staples, so you likely already…]]>

        A Restaurant-Quality Salad You Can Make At Home

        Aysegul's photo.

        Whenever we go out to eat, I always take a look at the salad section on the menu first. It says a lot about the chef: how they think about flavor, texture, and presentation.

        I first had a version of this beet salad years ago at a restaurant in New York City, and it completely changed how I thought about beets. 

        At first, I thought it was something only a restaurant could pull off, but when I tried to recreate it at home, I realized how naturally the ingredients work together.

        The earthy sweetness of the beets, the tangy creaminess of goat cheese, and the crunch of walnuts are so complementary that it’s hard to get it wrong.

        Since then, I’ve experimented with different dressings and settled on a maple balsamic vinaigrette with a touch of Dijon mustard. It’s the perfect finishing touch, and whenever I make this salad, friends always ask for the recipe.

        Beet Salad Ingredients

        The ingredients for this beet salad are all common pantry or fridge staples, so you likely already have most of them on hand. To make things easy, I broke the ingredients into three sets: one for the beets, another for the dressing, and a final set for the salad itself. 

        You can find the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card; however, I’ve included some notes from my recipe testing below.

        Ingredients for the roasted beet salad with text on each ingredient.

        For the Beets:

        Beets: I chose a combination of classic red beets and golden beets (also known as yellow beets) to add color and variety. However, pink Chioggia beets, with a beautiful pink and white pattern on the inside, would also work beautifully in this recipe.

        Seasonings: A bit of olive oil and salt, and pepper is all you need to roast them in the oven.

        For the Salad:

        Greens: I love the combination of peppery arugula and spring mix, but feel free to use any earthy, leafy green of your choice. Alternatively, you can use one kind, or take it up a notch and add a handful of baby spinach in the mix.

        Shallot: I prefer to use a shallot in this recipe because it has a sweet, mild flavor, but you could also use a red onion for a sharper flavor. 

        Crumbled Goat Cheese: The combination of goat cheese, roasted beets, and walnuts is a classic, but if you’re not a fan, another good option is feta cheese. Still, any type of soft cheese would work. 

        Walnuts: Plain, chopped walnuts provide the best crunch to this salad. If they aren’t your thing, you could also add chopped pecans or pistachios. To take it up a notch, consider toasted pecans or even maple-spiced walnuts. 

        Crisp Apple or Pear: When I first published this recipe in 2023, I didn’t include any fruit. However, I have recently been adding a sliced apple (or a pear would work), and it not only adds a welcome crunch but also pairs beautifully with the earthy flavors of the beets.

        Balsamic dressing ingredients for this salad recipe.

        For the Dressing:

        Maple Syrup: This is my preferred sweetener, but you can also use honey or agave syrup.

        Balsamic Vinegar: A good, aged balsamic vinegar from Modena is ideal, but any brand would work here. In a pinch, red wine vinegar is a good substitute.

        How to Make Beet Salad?

        With just a little bit of prep and some baking time, you can have this stunning, restaurant-quality beetroot salad with goat’s cheese and walnuts on the table and ready to enjoy. 

        Just as we broke the ingredients into three sections, we’re also breaking the instructions into three sections:

        How to Prepare Beets for Salad

        When it comes to cooking the beets, I opted for roasting them in the oven as it is easy and convenient. With that being said, you can cook them in any way you like.

        Boil them if that is easier for you or cook them in the air fryer if you are short on time. 

        If you are with me, below is how I roast them for this salad recipe:

        Step 1 – Preheat the oven: Set your oven to 400°F (204°C).

        A person wrapping beets in foil to prepare for roasting in the oven.

        Step 2 – Prepare the beets for baking: Cut a sheet of aluminum foil into four 8 to 10-inch squares. Place a beet in the center of the square, drizzle it with ½ tablespoon of olive oil, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper to taste. 

        Tightly wrap each beet in foil and arrange them on a baking sheet. If you prefer not to wrap beets in foil, you can first wrap them in parchment paper and then wrap the parchment-wrapped beets in foil.

        Step 3 – Bake: Place the foil-wrapped beets in a single layer on a baking sheet and roast for 25-30 minutes, or until tender. 

        Pro Tip: During my recipe testing, I found medium-sized beets are usually ready around the 28-minute mark. However, keep in mind that the exact timing depends on the size of your beets.

        You can check doneness by inserting a knife into one of the beets. If it slides in and out easily (that’s the sweet spot for a soft but not mushy texture), it should be good to go. 

        A person preparing beets for salad by slicing them and placing in a bowl.

        Step 4 – Let them rest: Remove the beets from the oven, unwrap them, and let them cool for about 10 minutes on the counter. Be very careful, they are very hot at this point.

        Once they’re cool enough to handle, carefully remove the foil and then peel the skins. You can use a paper towel, your fingers, or even a vegetable peeler.  

        Slice them into wedges and set aside.

        How to Make the Dressing

        I tried a few different salad dressing for this beet salad before I landed on this one. While a basic lemon balsamic vinaigrette would work, I wanted one that is a bit sweeter, tangier, and garlickier, similar to the one I had in that restaurant.

        A person shaking salad dressing ingredients in a mason jar.

        Step 1 – Combine the ingredients: Place the maple syrup, Dijon mustard, garlic, balsamic vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper in a mason jar.

        Step 2 – Shake: Tightly secure the lid on the jar and shake to combine the ingredients. Give it a taste and adjust if needed. If it feels too sharp for your taste buds, add a drizzle of maple syrup; if it’s too sweet, a splash of vinegar will help balance it out.

        How to Assemble The Salad

        Once the beets are roasted and the dressing is ready, this beet root salad recipe comes together in minutes:

        A person tossing greens in dressing and adding beets and cheese to the salad.

        Step 1 – Assemble the salad: Add the greens and thinly sliced shallot to a large salad bowl.

        Step 2 – Add the dressing: Drizzle the vinaigrette over the greens and toss gently to combine. I recommend starting with half the dressing, tossing, and then adding more if needed, as you want the leaves lightly coated and not soggy.

        Step 3 – Add the beets and nuts: Toss in the cooked beet wedges and chopped walnuts. 

        Step 4 – Garnish and serve: Add the crumbled goat cheese over the beetroot salad at the very end so it stays creamy and doesn’t melt into the salad. 

        What to Serve With This Beet Salad

        Whenever I want an elegant yet simple salad to serve as a light lunch or a holiday side dish, I make this roasted beet and goat cheese salad. It never disappoints.

        It also pairs beautifully with cozy soups, meaty or vegetarian mains, or even your Thanksgiving spread as a colorful centerpiece. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

        A salad with cheese, nuts, and beets in a bowl from the top view.

        FAQs

        Can I use canned beets instead of fresh?

        Yes, you can, but I find canned beets to lack in flavor compared to freshly cooked beets. Still, it is a good shortcut if you are short on time.

        Why roast beets instead of boiling?

        I find that roasting caramelizes the natural sugars in beets, resulting in a richer and deeper flavor profile.

        Can I make this vegan?

        Yes, you can. Simply omit the goat cheese or use a plant-based feta cheese.

        Can I serve it warm?

        You sure can, and it would be delicious. Though if you go down that route, be sure to add the goat cheese at the last minute so it doesn’t melt.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Salad Recipes You Might Like

        This roasted beet salad is one of my favorite Fall Salad Recipes and one that I make often. That being said, I have many other restaurant-quality salad recipes that you might also like:

        • If you’re craving something cozy and seasonal, my 20-minute Harvest Salad Recipe with apples, kale, and figs deserves a spot on your holiday table. 
        • For something warm and elegant, my Roasted Warm Pear Salad is ready in under 30 minutes. With maple-roasted pears, goat cheese, and crunchy pecans, it’s as beautiful as it is delicious.
        • If you love salads with crunch, my Shredded Brussels Sprout Salad features shaved Brussels sprouts, apples, hazelnuts, and creamy goat cheese. It’s light, crunchy, and easy to make ahead.
        • And if you prefer something quick and refreshing, my Mixed Spring Salad is always a hit, pairing beautifully with nearly any main dish.
        Beet Salad with Goat Cheese and walnuts with utensils on the side.
        Print

        Beet Salad with Goat Cheese Recipe

        This Roasted Beet Salad with Goat Cheese is a restaurant-quality dish that's perfect for any occasion. With roasted beets, crunchy walnuts, tangy goat cheese, and a homemade dressing, this salad is a sure crowd-pleaser. Serve it warm or cold with soup, sides, or your favorite entree.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American Vegetarian
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 50 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 414kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Beets

        • 4 medium size beets any color would work
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • Salt & pepper

        For The Dressing

        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
        • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For The Salad

        • 1 small shallot chopped
        • 6 cups arugula and spring mix 80 gr – arugula + 100 gr spring mix
        • ½ cup walnuts chopped
        • 4 oz. goat cheese crumbled

        Instructions

        To roast beets for salad:

        • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
        • Cut four 8-10-inch square aluminum foils. Place a beet in the middle, drizzle with ½ tablespoon olive oil, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
          Person preparing beets for roasting.
        • Cover it tightly with aluminum foil. Repeat the same process with the rest of the beets.
        • Place covered beets on the prepared baking sheet and bake for 25-30 minutes or until they are easily pierced with the tip of a knife.
        • Unwrap the beets and let them cool for 10 minutes on the kitchen counter. Gently remove the skins and cut them into wedges.
          Person preparing beets for the salad.

        To make the dressing:

        • Place maple syrup, Dijon mustard, garlic, balsamic vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper in a mason jar. Put the lid on and give it a vigorous shake to combine.
          A mason jar with the beet salad dressing.

        To assemble the salad:

        • Place the salad greens and the chopped shallot into a large salad bowl.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing and gently toss to ensure all salad greens are evenly coated with the vinaigrette.
          Person drizzling the salad with the dressing and tossing it.
        • Add in cooked beets and walnuts and toss to combine.
          Showing the assembly stages of the beet salad.
        • Garnish with crumbled goat cheese and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 8 cups of salad, ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Make ahead: You can follow the instructions above to roast the beets and make the dressing ahead of time. For best results, I recommend storing the beets and the dressing in separate airtight containers in the fridge for up to two days before serving. When you’re ready to serve, simply assemble the salad.
        • Store: Store your leftover salad in an airtight container or in a large bowl covered with plastic wrap. It will stay fresh in the fridge for a day or two. I don’t recommend storing it any longer than that, as the greens will wilt and lose their freshness.

        Nutrition

        Serving: 1g | Calories: 414kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 9mg | Sodium: 322mg | Potassium: 734mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 752IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 99mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-beet-goat-cheese-salad/feed/ 42
        Broccoli Cauliflower Salad Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/broccoli-cauliflower-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/broccoli-cauliflower-salad/#comments Mon, 30 Jan 2023 17:45:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=40264 Made with simple ingredients, this Raw Broccoli and Cauliflower Salad recipe requires minimal cooking and can be ready to enjoy…]]>

        Made with simple ingredients, this Raw Broccoli and Cauliflower Salad recipe requires minimal cooking and can be ready to enjoy cold after a quick chill in the refrigerator. It is also a colorful make-ahead meal that tastes better the longer it sits and makes the perfect side dish or low carb lunch.

        Drizzled with an easy-to-make creamy dressing and flavored with crispy bacon pieces, and crunchy sunflower seeds, this broccoli cauliflower salad is just as versatile as my Greek Yogurt Coleslaw and No Mayo Coleslaw. Make a batch, and store it in meal prep containers for an irresistible salad you can enjoy throughout the week.

        Broccoli Cauliflower Salad in a bowl with two spoons on the side top view.

        Ingredients

        The cauliflower broccoli salad ingredients come together in two parts:

        Ingredients for cauliflower and broccoli salad from top view
        • For The Cauliflower Broccoli Salad Dressing: Gather together mayonnaise, whole milk Greek yogurt, honey, red wine vinegar, lemon juice, salt, and pepper.
        Cauliflower salad ingredients are placed in bowls on a white backdrop.
        • For The Broccoli Salad Ingredients: All you need is raw broccoli florets and raw cauliflower florets, red onion, sunflower seeds, raisins, bacon, and shredded Cheddar cheese.

        Substitution Ideas

        What I love the most about this easy salad recipe is that it is easy to make your own with numerous ingredient substitutions. So, do not worry if you are missing an ingredient or two; simply use the ingredients substitutions below to make your own delicious salad:

        • Mayo: I used my favorite light mayonnaise, vegan mayo (affiliate link), (made with avocado oil), but any mayo would work here.
        • Vinegar: Any vinegar would work – raw apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar can be substituted in place of red wine vinegar.
        • Sweetener: In my version of the broccoli cauliflower salad dressing, I used honey as the sweetener, but maple syrup would also work.
        • Seeds: I love the crunch of sunflower seeds. Pumpkin seeds would be a good substitute and keep this recipe nut-free. That being said, sliced almonds or chopped walnuts, or pecans are great if nuts are not an issue.
        • Dried Fruit: Raisins add that special pop of sweetness, but dried cranberries or super tart dried cherries would be exceptional, too.
        • Fresh fruit: You can use fresh fruit, such as an apple or pear, instead of dried fruit in this recipe. I especially love making a broccoli apple salad using this exact recipe and swapping raisins with a thinly sliced apple.
        • Cheese: I used shredded sharp Cheddar cheese, but mozzarella cheese, Colby Jack or Monterey Jack would also work.
        • Bacon: I am currently obsessed with baked turkey bacon, but regular bacon cooked on the stove top can also be used for all bacon lovers! Go for a sugar-free version when shopping for bacon.

        How to Make Broccoli Cauliflower Salad?

        When making this cauliflower broccoli salad recipe, most of the work involves chopping up the raw veggies, but other than that, it is easy and quick. To be efficient, I like to do that while the bacon is cooking in the oven.

        A person is whisking the dressing for broccoli cauliflower salad in a small mixing bowl.
        1. To make the dressing for broccoli cauliflower salad: Place all ingredients in a small bowl and whisk together until thoroughly combined and super creamy.
        Person showing the steps for preparing bacon for this easy salad recipe.
        1. To cook the bacon: Preheat the oven to 400 F degrees. Place each slice on a sheet pan—Bake for 15 minutes. Flip the bacon and cook for another 2 minutes or until it is crispy. Allow them to cool, and cut them into small pieces. If you are new to baking turkey bacon in the oven, be sure to check out my How to cook turkey bacon in the oven post. And if you have an air fryer, you can try cooking turkey bacon in the air fryer as well.
        A person is assembling the salad in a large mixing bowl from the top view in a collage of images.
        1. Assemble the salad: Place fresh broccoli florets, cauliflower florets, red onion, sunflower seeds, raisins, and bacon bits in a large bowl. Drizzle with the salad dressing, cover it with plastic wrap, and let it rest in the fridge for 30 minutes or up to 4 hours.
        2. Serve: Sprinkle with the cheese and serve.

        Variations:

        All it takes is a few simple swaps to have a different broccoli cauliflower recipe any time the craving strikes:

        • Broccoli and Cauliflower Salad without Bacon: Simply omit the bacon, and you have a creamy and colorful vegetarian meal.
        • Cauliflower Salad with Greek Yogurt (no mayo): I like the flavor combo of mayo and Greek yogurt, but feel free to omit the mayo and make the dressing entirely with Greek yogurt instead. If you are a fan of yogurt dressings, be sure to check out my Yogurt Salad Dressing recipe.
        • Amish Broccoli Salad: Some people refer to this salad as Amish Broccoli Cauliflower Salad because Amish cooks and gardeners are known for being avid cultivators of broccoli and cauliflower. Their version is made with sour cream instead of Greek yogurt but is still very similar to this one.
        • Make it a Keto Cauliflower Broccoli Salad: If you are on a keto diet, you can still enjoy this salad with a few ingredient adjustments. Simply swap honey with a keto-friendly sweetener such as Swerve and omit raisins. The rest of the ingredients should be okay to use.

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        What I love the most about this broccoli cauliflower bacon salad recipe is that it stores well, which makes it ideal for weekly meal prep or for when you need a salad you can make a few days in advance. Here is how I do it:

        • To Make ahead: Chop all the veggies, prepare the rest of the salad ingredients, and cook bacon. Store everything in individual airtight containers. Make the simple homemade dressing and keep it in a mason jar. When ready to assemble, place all the salad ingredients in a large mixing bowl and pour the dressing over it. Add the cheese on top, toss it, let it rest in the fridge (if you have the time), and serve.
        • To Store leftover salad: Place the leftovers in an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 4 days.

        Expert Tips:

        Having been making this easy broccoli salad for over 5 years, I learned a thing or two to help you succeed on your first try. Here are a few helpful tips:

        • Cut broccoli & cauliflower into bite-size pieces: I find that it is much easier to eat when the large vegetables are cut into small pieces that are bite-sized. It is a bit of chopping work but totally worth it.
        • Add the cheese at the end. If planning to make it a few days ahead, I recommend assembling the salad without the cheese, as the ingredients tend to get soggy. When ready to serve, sprinkle the cheese, toss, and enjoy!
        • Shred or cube the cheese. Speaking of cheese – I prefer the texture of shredded cheese, but small cubes would work, too.
        • Let it rest for the best results: I think this broccoli cauliflower raisin salad tastes better the longer it sits, so I recommend resting the salad in the fridge for at least 30 minutes before serving. This also allows the broccoli and cauliflower to soften up a bit while sitting in the dressing.
        Person drizzling broccoli cauliflower salad with bacon with dressing.

        FAQs:

        Can you make broccoli cauliflower salad ahead of time?

        You sure can. As a matter of fact, I recommend making it a day in advance. The longer the ingredients have time to soak up the sweet, tangy dressing, the better this salad becomes. Thirty minutes is plenty of time if you’re short on time, but this sweet broccoli cauliflower salad sure tastes better the next day.

        Can you freeze broccoli cauliflower salad?

        I do not recommend freezing this salad.

        How long does broccoli cauliflower salad last?

        As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, this broccoli salad should last up to 4 days.

        How many carbs are in broccoli and cauliflower salad?

        A serving of this salad has 29 grams of carbs.

        Other Veggie Packed Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you made and enjoyed this easy broccoli cauliflower salad recipe, it would be wonderful if you could give it a star rating and share your experience with a few words. Doing so helps the readers who are thinking about making it. And if you have a moment, take a picture and share it with me (using #foolprooeats) on Instagram so that I can share it with everyone.

        Broccoli & cauliflower salad in a bowl with two spoons on the side.
        Print

        Broccoli Cauliflower Salad Recipe

        This Broccoli and Cauliflower Salad recipe is flavored with a lighter yogurt-based salad dressing, cheese and sunflower seeds, and bacon. It is the perfect side dish or a satisfying and healthy lunch. Take it with you to any potlucks, family gatherings, BBQ parties, or picnics.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 17 minutes
        Resting Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 32 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 305kcal

        Ingredients

        For the Salad Dressing:

        • ½ cups mayonnaise
        • ¾ cup whole milk yogurt
        • 2 tablespoons honey
        • 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar white wine vinegar would also work
        • 2 teaspoon lemon juice
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more to taste
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Salad:

        • 4 cups broccoli florets cut into small bite size pieces
        • 4 cups cauliflower florets cut into small bite size pieces
        • ½ cup red onion chopped
        • 1/2 cup sunflower seeds
        • ½ cup raisins
        • 6-8 slices bacon I used turkey bacon but regular bacon would also work
        • 1 cup sharp cheddar cheese shredded or cubed

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing, place all salad dressing ingredients in a bowl and whisk together until fully combined.
        • Preheat the oven to 400 F degrees. To cook the bacon, place each slice on a sheet pan. Bake for 12 minutes. Flip the bacon and cook for another 5 minutes or until it is crispy. Allow them to cool and cut into small pieces.
        • To assemble the salad, place broccoli, cauliflower, red onion, sunflower seeds, raisins, and bacon in a large bowl. Drizzle with the dressing, cover it with plastic wrap, and let it rest in the fridge for 30 minutes or upto 4 hours.
        • Sprinkle with the cheese and serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • How To Store: The salad keeps very well stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days, which makes it a wonderful meal prep recipe for the week. I do not recommend freezing the salad.
        • Cut broccoli & cauliflower into bite-size pieces: I find that it is much easier to eat when the large vegetables are cut into smaller pieces. It is a bit of chopping work but totally worth it.
        • To Make ahead: Chop all the veggies, prepare the rest of the salad ingredients, and cook bacon. Store everything in individual airtight containers. Make the simple homemade dressing and keep it in a mason jar. When ready to assemble, place all the salad ingredients in a large mixing bowl and pour the dressing over it. Add the cheese on top, toss it, let it rest in the fridge (if you have the time), and serve.
        • Add the cheese at the end. If planning to make it a few days ahead, I recommend assembling the salad without the cheese, as the ingredients tend to get soggy. When ready to serve, sprinkle the cheese, toss and enjoy!
        • Shred or cube the cheese. Speaking of cheese – I prefer the texture of shredded cheese, but small cubes would work, too.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 305kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 360mg | Potassium: 638mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 415IU | Vitamin C: 89mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/broccoli-cauliflower-salad/feed/ 16
        Baked Goat Cheese Salad https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese-salad/#comments Thu, 22 Dec 2022 22:13:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=534 Creamy, earthy, and fresh, this warmed goat cheese salad is a restaurant-quality dish that comes together easily. If you can’t…]]>

        Creamy, earthy, and fresh, this warmed goat cheese salad is a restaurant-quality dish that comes together easily. If you can’t get enough goat cheese recipes like this, you’ll adore my other goat cheese-inspired dishes, such as Goat Cheese and Spinach Stuffed Chicken and Goat Cheese Quiche.

        Green salad topped off with warm goat cheese rounds from the top view.

        Ingredients

        To make this recipe for goat cheese salad, you’ll need two sets of ingredients:

        Ingredients for the recipe in small portions from the top view.
        • Goat cheese disks (or balls): For the goat cheese croutons, gather fresh thyme, parsley, panko breadcrumbs, garlic powder, an egg, Dijon mustard, kosher salt, black pepper, and an 8-oz. log of fresh goat cheese.
        • For the Salad and the vinaigrette: For the salad and warm goat cheese salad dressing, gather mixed salad greens, olive oil, red wine vinegar, Dijon mustard, shallot, kosher salt, and black pepper.

        How to Slice Goat Cheese with Dental Floss?

        If you’ve ever tried to cut goat cheese with a knife, you know how difficult it can be. Instead, I recommend using dental floss or kitchen twine to cut perfect, mess-free slices every time. Just be sure to use unflavored dental floss to avoid giving it an unwanted taste. Also, it is best to do this while it is still cold, as goat cheese that is at room temperature will be hard to slice.

        Person showing how to slice a log of goat cheese with dental floss.
        1. Line up dental floss: Slide a piece of dental floss under the goat cheese log and line it up to where you want to make your first slice. Remember that this recipe calls for eight equal pieces of an 8-oz. goat cheese log.
        2. Lift and twist: Holding the ends of the dental floss with either hand, pull the string straight up and cross them in the center to cut through the cheese log.

        How to Make Warm Goat Cheese Salad

        No one can resist baked goat cheese recipes as easy as this one. Equal parts effortless and tasty, this salad recipe comes together in just 30 minutes (plus the resting time.)

        1. Prepare the baking sheet: Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper, and set it aside.
        Dipping station for baked chevre balls with small bowls.
        1. Prep the dipping station: Place the fresh herbs on a small, shallow plate, and mix them until thoroughly combined. Then, combine panko crumbs and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Whisk together the egg, mustard, salt, and black pepper in a separate small bowl. Set all three mixtures aside.
        person making goat cheese medallions dipped in herbs, egg and panko breadcrumbs.
        1. Make the cheese balls: Roll each of your eight goat cheese medallions into a small disk (or ball). Then, roll each one into the herb mixture, evenly coating their exteriors. Then, roll the balls into the egg-mustard mixture and let the excess liquid drip. Finally, roll the balls into the panko mixture. Gently press the bread crumbs into the balls to ensure an even coating.
        2. Freeze the goat cheese: Transfer the breadcrumb-coated goat cheese to the prepared baking sheet, and place it in the freezer for 30 minutes. 
        a collage of images showing how to make baked goat cheese salad.
        1. Mix the salad dressing: In a small mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, red wine vinegar, shallot, salt, and black pepper.
        2. Make the baked chevre: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Once heated, transfer the tray of goat cheese balls from the freezer to the oven, and bake for 8-10 minutes.
        3. Mix the salad: Place the salad greens in a large bowl, drizzle them with the prepared dressing, and toss until evenly mixed.
        4. Serve: Divide the salad among four salad plates. Place two baked goat cheese rounds on top of each salad.

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        Making this recipe ahead of time is the easiest way to make busy weeknights a breeze. With such simple prep and storage, it’s no wonder why warm goat cheese salad is a fan-favorite side.

        • Make ahead: You can make this salad recipe up to one week in advance. Simply roll the goat cheese balls, coat them in the herb, egg, and breadcrumb mixtures, and arrange them on a sheet pan. Then, cover them with plastic wrap and place them in the freezer for about 30 minutes. Once frozen, place goat cheese rounds in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag. Remove as much air as possible, then place the bag back in the freezer. Remove the balls just before serving, and bake them in a 400-degree F. oven for 10-12 minutes.
        • Store: To store your baked goat cheese salad, transfer your leftovers into an airtight container in the fridge. I recommend warming the goat cheese balls (not the salad greens!) just before eating your leftovers. However, you can also enjoy your salad cold.
        Salad placed on two small plates and served with wine on the side.

        Expert Tips

        This restaurant-quality salad is as easy to make as it is delicious to eat. With these foolproof pointers, you can make it without hassle or stress—just like a master chef!

        • Let excess egg drip: Only one egg is necessary to coat all eight of your goat cheese balls—as long as you let the excess egg mixture drip after rolling each ball in it. However, if you need more dipping mixture, you may add another egg.
        • Bake right before serving: I recommend baking your goat cheese balls just before serving them. This way, the insides of your rounds will be creamy and warm. If you wait too long before serving, the goat cheese will solidify and lose its creaminess.
        • Broil until golden brown: To give your goat cheese rounds extra crispiness, broil them for one minute or until golden brown. Just be sure to keep an eye on them so that they don’t burn.

        What Goes Well With Goat Cheese Salad?

        Almost any of my foolproof main dishes would make a delectable pair with this warm goat cheese appetizer. Below are a few of my favorites to serve alongside this five-star side.

        • Roast Beef Tenderloin: Tender beef and toasted goat cheese is a match made in heaven. Serve it as a side salad for a photo-ready spread for any special occasion.
        • Turkey Tenderloin: Pair this goat cheese salad recipe with juicy turkey tenderloin, and you’ll have a mouthwatering menu ready for anything, from a Friendsgiving potluck to a weeknight meal.
        • Cream of Chestnut Soup: If you’d rather have a vegetarian meal, serve it with soup on the side. This French Cuisine-inspired chestnut soup would pair beautifully with this simple chevre salad for a delicious and visually impressive lunch or dinner.

        FAQs

        How long do you bake goat’s cheese for?

        I recommend baking goat’s cheese for 10-12 minutes at 400 degrees F.

        Can you bake goat cheese?

        Yes! Baking goat cheese is a great idea because it is hard enough to hold its shape in the oven when baked on its own. However, you could also mix this traditional cheese with other cheeses, like Parmesan, cheddar cheese, and cream cheese, to make delicious recipes like my Baked Goat Cheese Dip.

        Should I serve this salad warm or cold?

        The best goat cheese for this salad comes straight from the oven, as the cheese balls will be the creamiest at this point. However, you can also serve this salad cold if you prefer your goat cheese to have a firmer texture.

        What is the best cheese for salads?

        Because of their rich and robust flavors, the best cheeses for salads include feta cheese, goat cheese, blue cheese, and Parmesan cheese.

        Other Restaurant Quality Salad Recipes You Might Like:

        If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Baked goat cheese salad on a small plate with a fork on the side.
        Print

        Baked Goat Cheese Salad Recipe

        This Baked Goat Cheese Salad is a French-bistro style salad that is ideal as a light lunch or a side salad with the main dish. Served warm, most of the components of this recipe can be made ahead and then it can be assembled right before serving.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American/French
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 10 minutes
        Resting time 30 minutes
        Total Time 55 minutes
        Servings 4 Servings
        Calories 175kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Baked Goat Cheese Rounds

        • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme chopped
        • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
        • ¾ cup panko breadcrumbs
        • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
        • 1 large egg
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 log goat cheese 8oz. – sliced into 8 pieces

        For The Salad & Salad Dressing

        • 3 tablespoons extra-virgin olive oil
        • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar
        • ½ teaspoon dijon mustard
        • 1 small shallot chopped (about 2 tablespoons)
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 6 cup mixed salad greens 7 oz.

        Instructions

        • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
        • Prep your dipping station: First, place fresh herbs on a small shallow plate and mix to combine. Second, place panko and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Stir to combine. And third, whisk egg, mustard, salt, and pepper in a small bowl and set aside.
        • Divide goat cheese into 8 equal portions. You can use a knife, but I find that it is easier to use dental floss or kitchen twine. To do so, slide a piece of dental floss under the goat cheese log and line it up to where you want to make your first slice. Holding the ends of the dental floss with either hand, pull the string straight up and cross them in the center to cut through the cheese log. Roll each piece into a small disk (or a ball).
        • Roll each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture, ensuring it is coated on all sides. Next, roll them in the egg mixture (allowing the excess liquid to drip), followed by the panko mixture pressing gently to ensure that it is fully coated with the panko breadcrumbs.
        • Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Place in the freezer for 30 minutes.
        • Meanwhile, make the salad dressing by whisking together olive oil, red wine vinegar, shallot, and salt and pepper.
        • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Remove the cheese from the freezer and bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes.
        • To assemble the salad, place salad greens in a salad bowl and drizzle them with the dressing. Give it a big toss.
        • Divide the salad amongst four salad plates and top each plate with two baked goat cheese balls.

        Notes

        • Let excess egg drip: Only one egg is necessary to coat all eight of your goat cheese balls—as long as you let the excess egg mixture drip after rolling each ball in it. However, if you need more dipping mixture, you may add another egg.
        • Bake right before serving: I recommend baking your goat cheese balls just before serving them. This way, the insides of your rounds will be creamy and warm. If you wait too long before serving, the goat cheese will solidify and lose its creaminess.
        • Broil until golden brown: If you want, you can broil them for one minute or until golden brown. Just be sure to keep an eye on them so that they don’t burn.
        • Make ahead: You can make this salad recipe up to one week in advance. Simply roll the goat cheese balls, coat them in the herb, egg, and breadcrumb mixtures, and arrange them on a sheet pan. Then, cover them with plastic wrap and place them in the freezer for about 30 minutes. Once frozen, place goat cheese rounds in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag. Remove as much air as possible, then place the bag back in the freezer. Remove the balls just before serving, and bake them in a 400-degree F. oven for 10-12 minutes.
        • Store: To store the leftovers, transfer them into an airtight container in the fridge. I recommend warming the goat cheese balls (not the salad greens!) just before eating your leftovers. However, you can also enjoy your salad cold.

        Nutrition

        Serving: 1g | Calories: 175kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 574mg | Potassium: 200mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 998IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese-salad/feed/ 3
        La Scala Chopped Salad https://foolproofliving.com/la-scala-chopped-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/la-scala-chopped-salad/#comments Wed, 14 Dec 2022 14:56:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=63002 Leon eventually shared his famous salad recipe with the world, which the Los Angeles Times published in 1989. The LA…]]>

        Leon eventually shared his famous salad recipe with the world, which the Los Angeles Times published in 1989. The LA Times recipe has many renditions today, so you may see it referred to as the “Beverly Hills Salad,” “Hollywood Salad,” the “Kardashian La Scala Salad,” or even the “Kim Kardashian Salad.”

        Whatever you choose to call it, celebrity salad recipes like the La Scala Salad go viral for a reason. They’re flavorful, easy to recreate, and are usually made up of wholesome ingredients. If you love to jump on the celebrity salad recipe bandwagon, you’ll also love the famous Jennifer Aniston Salad and Columbia 1905 salad.

        An Italian salad in a bowl with forks from the top view.

        La Scala Salad Ingredients

        This famous chopped salad has a truly international flavor, with Italian-inspired ingredients like pecorino romano and mozzarella. The La Scala dressing, also known as the “La Scala Leon dressing,” contains French-style ingredients like dry mustard. It may sound fancy, but chances are you already have many of the ingredients on hand. Here’s what you’ll need:

        Ingredients for an Italian chopped salad in bowls from the top view.

        For the salad, you will need:

        • Salad greens: You will need a head of iceberg lettuce and a head of romaine lettuce for all the crunch.
        • Chickpeas: You will need a can of chickpeas (also sold as garbanzo beans)
        • Salami: Italian salami is what the original La Scala salad uses but if you can’t find Italian salami at the store, feel free to use pepperoni, beef salami, or turkey salami instead. If you’re not a fan of salami in a salad, you can also use Baked Turkey Bacon
        • Cheese: This recipe is famous for its generous amount of shredded mozzarella cheese.

        For the La Scala Salad Dressing, you’ll need:

        • Extra virgin olive oil
        • Red wine vinegar
        • Dry mustard (or Dijon mustard): The original La Scala Leon dressing recipe uses dry mustard, which is essentially ground mustard seeds. If you can’t find dry mustard or don’t have any on hand, you can easily substitute two teaspoons of Dijon mustard. 
        • Salt & pepper
        • Pecorino romano cheese (or parmesan cheese): It sounds fancy, but pecorino romano is simply an Italian cheese that’s similar to parmesan. If it’s not available, use shaved parmesan cheese instead. 

        Optional Add-Ins

        While this California chopped salad recipe uses many basic ingredients, a few are more specialized and may be difficult to find at your local grocery store. Thankfully, you can easily substitute without significantly affecting the flavor. The salad is also a great base for add-ins of your choice. Here are some suggestions: 

        • With just a few ingredients, this chickpea salami salad provides a great base for other Italian-inspired additions, which many have used to customize their celebrity chopped salad recipe. I recommend adding a small jar of drained artichoke hearts, fresh tomatoes or sun-dried tomatoes, cherry tomatoes, or roasted red bell peppers. I also love to add a minced clove of garlic to the chopped salad dressing for extra flavor. Feel free to get creative and use what you have on hand. 
        • Make it vegetarian: If you’re one of my vegetarian friends, you can easily transform this salad with salami into a vegetarian recipe by omitting it. In its place, I recommend adding Baked Shiitake Mushrooms for that “meaty” texture. You can also add chopped boiled eggs to add more protein, if you wish.
        • Add pasta: I’ve seen versions of this La Scala salad mixed with cooked pasta and served as a pasta salad, and I tried it myself. It was a fantastic weeknight dinner idea.

        How to Make La Scala Chopped Salad Recipe?

        This La Scala chickpea salad requires a little chopping, as the recipe name suggests, but it’s a breeze to throw together once the prep work is done. Drizzle it with the homemade dressing, and you’ll enjoy a restaurant-quality salad without leaving your home! Here’s how to make it:

        A person showing how to make a salad with homemade dressing from the top view.
        1. Add salad ingredients to a bowl: Add the romaine, iceberg lettuce, chickpeas, salami, and mozzarella to a large bowl and set aside. 
        2. Make the dressing for the chopped salad: In a small bowl, combine the salad dressing ingredients, including the extra virgin olive oil, red wine vinegar, mustard, salt, and black pepper, with a whisk. Taste and add more salt or pepper if needed. Stir in the pecorino romano. Alternatively, you can place all ingredients in a jar, put the lid on and give it a good shake.
        3. Add the dressing and toss: Pour the dressing over the salad and toss well to combine. 
        4. Serve: Garnish the salad with additional cheese and serve. 

        How to Meal Prep & Store Leftovers?

        If you want to make this viral chopped salad super quick and easy to throw together on a busy weekday, you can easily meal-prep it in advance. Leftovers are a breeze to store, too. Here are some tips: 

        • Meal prep: To meal prep this Italian salad with salami and mozzarella, chop up all the ingredients and store them in an airtight container. You can also prep the dressing in advance, but be sure to store it in a separate container (so the salad won’t get soggy). Both will keep for up to 2-3 days in the fridge. 
        • Store: If you have leftovers, store the rest of the salad in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 1-2 days. 

        What to Serve It With?

        Packed with meat, cheese, and chickpeas, this chopped iceberg salad can definitely stand alone as a light lunch or dinner. If you’re craving something a bit more filling, feel free to pair it with your favorite Italian entrees. Here are some of my favorites: 

        Expert Tips

        This salami chickpea salad is easy for even a beginner chef to throw together, so detailed tips aren’t necessary for this recipe. However, I included a few notes below that you may find helpful along the way:

        • Double the dressing: This La Scala Chopped Salad Dressing recipe is so simple and yummy that it likely pairs well with many of your favorite salads. Since you’re already making the dressing, why not double the recipe so you’ll have extra to drizzle on your next salad?
        • Marinate the chickpeas: If you have the time, I recommend marinating the chickpeas in the tangy dressing to give the salad extra flavor. After draining and rinsing the chickpeas, soak them in the dressing for a few minutes while you prep the rest of the ingredients.

        FAQs

        What is La Scala Chopped Salad?

        The La Scala Chopped Salad, also known as the “Beverly Hills Chopped Salad” or the “Kardashian Salad Recipe,” is an Italian salad with salami that was first served at the La Scala Boutique restaurant in Beverly Hills, CA. The simple salad combines salami, mozzarella, chickpeas, iceberg lettuce, and romaine, all topped off with a simple red wine vinaigrette.

        Who invented La Scala Salad recipe?

        Chef Jean Leon, a restaurateur who is the owner of the La Scala restaurant in Beverly Hills, CA, invented the La Scala Salad, also known as the “Kardashian Chopped Salad,” in the ‘50s. This salad was popular among his business and high-profile clients, such as Elizabeth Taylor, Julia Roberts, and JFK, and the restaurant is still a hot spot for celebrities today.

        What is a chopped salad?

        A recipe for chopped salad, as the name suggests, contains ingredients that have been chopped into a uniform size. The salad is usually tossed together in a dressing for an easily consumable meal with well-incorporated ingredients.

        How many calories are in a serving of Lascala’s chopped salad?

        This recipe serves 6 people and a serving is approximately 244 calories.

        Other Famous Restaurant Salad Recipes You Might Like

        Have you ever visited a restaurant and wished you could recreate a meal you had there? From the La Scala Chopped Salad in LA to Neiman Marcus’s Texas Caviar, these yummy restaurant dishes go viral all the time. Well, thanks to the Internet, there are many viral recipes out there that you don’t need a restaurant reservation to enjoy. 

        Since we’re on the topic of salads, here are a few famous salad recipes to try:

        If you try this Famous La Scala Chopped Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A salad with cheese and salami in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        La Scala Chopped Salad Recipe

        The La Scala Chopped Salad is an Italian-inspired salad invented by the owner of the La Scala restaurant in Beverly Hills. This delicious salad, loaded with salami, chickpeas, cheese, and a mustard-based dressing, went viral on social media thanks to some celebrity influence. Serve it as the perfect lunch, light dinner, or starter for an Italian meal.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American/Italian
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 6
        Calories 244kcal

        Ingredients

        For the Salad:

        • 1 head iceberg lettuce chopped
        • 1 head Romaine roughly chopped
        • 1 can chickpeas aka Garbanzo beans, (15 oz) drained and rinsed
        • 1/4 pound Italian salami chopped or julienned
        • 1/4 pound mozzarella cheese shredded

        For the Dressing:

        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar
        • 2 teaspoons Dijon mustard or 1 teaspoon dry mustard
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher Salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1/4 cup grated pecorino romano or Parmesan cheese- plus more as garnish

        Instructions

        • Add salad ingredients to a bowl: Place iceberg lettuce, romaine, chickpeas, Italian salami, and mozzarella cheese in a large salad bowl. Set it aside.
        • Make the dressing: To make the dressing, whisk together olive oil, red wine vinegar, mustard, salt, and pepper in a measuring cup or a small bowl. Stir in the Pecorino romano.
        • Add the dressing and toss: Drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a toss.
        • Serve: Serve with more pecorino romano on top.

        Video

        Notes

        • Meal prep: To prepare this salad ahead of time, chop up all the ingredients and store them in an airtight container. You can also prep the dressing in advance, but be sure to store it in a separate container (so the salad won’t get soggy). Both will keep for up to 2-3 days in the fridge.
        • Store: If you have leftovers, store the rest of the salad in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 1-2 days.
        • To make it vegetarian, swap salami with roasted shiitake mushrooms.
        • Optional add-ins: While this salad is great by itself, you can jazz it up by adding other ingredients, such as a small jar of drained artichoke hearts, fresh tomatoes or sun-dried tomatoes, cherry tomatoes, or roasted red bell peppers. I also love to add a minced clove of garlic to the chopped salad dressing for extra flavor. Feel free to get creative and use what you have on hand. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 244kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 809mg | Potassium: 232mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1004IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 161mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/la-scala-chopped-salad/feed/ 17
        Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-ranch-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-ranch-dip/#respond Wed, 07 Dec 2022 16:43:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=62683 I always keep a tub of Greek yogurt stocked in my fridge, but not only for breakfast! Greek yogurt makes…]]>

        I always keep a tub of Greek yogurt stocked in my fridge, but not only for breakfast! Greek yogurt makes the perfect thick, creamy, and healthy base for countless delicious dips and dressings. No wonder why my Yogurt Salad Dressing is one of the most popular recipes on the blog!

        If you like healthy dip recipes with Greek yogurt, you’ll love my Greek Yogurt Fruit Dip, Blue Cheese Dressing Without Sour Cream, Yogurt Tahini Sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Turkish Aubergine Dip

        A dip with a greek yogurt base served with veggies from the top view.

        Ingredients

        You don’t need a lot of fancy ingredients to make this homemade Greek yogurt ranch dip recipe. In fact, you likely already have the ingredients stocked in your fridge and spice cabinet. We’re using a combination of garlic and onion powder to achieve that classic ranch flavor, and adding a hint of lemon juice ramps up the tang. 

        Ingredients for homemade greek yogurt ranch in bowls from the top view.

        You will need:

        • Greek Yogurt: I like to use plain, full-fat Greek yogurt. However, you can use low-fat or non-fat Greek yogurt to make a guilt-free, low-calorie dip for veggies. Alternatively, you can use plain yogurt for a thinner consistency. I make my Yogurt Dill Sauce with plain yogurt often and it turns out great.
        • Garlic Powder: I prefer garlic powder as it gives it a nice robust garlic flavor. However, if you prefer a more intense garlic taste, you can use one clove of fresh minced garlic.
        • Onion Powder: Onion powder gives it that signature ranch flavor so do not skip it/
        • Kosher salt
        • Chives: Chives add a mild, onion-like flavor that complements this healthy ranch dip, but they can be hard to find at the grocery store. If you can’t find fresh chives, you can use freshly chopped green onions, dried chives, or fresh dill instead.

        Ingredient Substitutions

        If you don’t have all the ingredients, don’t run to the store just yet. This yogurt veggie dip is very forgiving when it comes to substitutions, so feel free to swap similar ingredients to make it your own. Here are a few suggestions: 

        • Dried herbs: Our homemade ranch seasoning with Greek yogurt combines garlic powder, onion powder, and salt. You can stick to this recipe to keep it super basic or throw in some dried herbs (or fresh herbs) to amp up the flavor. I recommend adding ¼ teaspoon each of dried chives, dried dill, and dried parsley per cup of ranch Greek yogurt dip. 
        • Spices: While optional, a pinch of cayenne or a sprinkle of paprika is a nice addition.
        • Vinegar: If preferred, an equal amount of apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar can be used in place of lemon juice.
        • 2-ingredient option: While the homemade ranch seasoning is a healthy, preservative-free, and low-sodium alternative to traditional ranch seasoning, you can still use a premade seasoning mix, such as a Hidden Valley ranch packet, if you’re in a pinch. To make a Hidden Valley ranch dip with Greek yogurt, I recommend using 2 teaspoons of seasoning per cup of yogurt. 
        • Add a drizzle of olive oil: For a special presentation, add a drizzle of olive oil to top off your healthy veggie dip. 

        How to Make Ranch Dip with Greek Yogurt

        You’ll never need to buy ranch dressing from the store once you learn how quick and easy it is to whip it up at home. Plus, this low-fat veggie dip is healthy, inexpensive, and (in my opinion) tastier than any store-bought dip. To make this Greek yogurt dip, simply: 

        A person making ranch yogurt dip in a bowl from the top view.
        1. Add ingredients to a bowl: In a small bowl, add Greek yogurt, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, black pepper, and lemon juice. 
        2. Combine and serve: Use a whisk to mix the ingredients until smooth and fully combined. Garnish your easy Greek yogurt dip with freshly chopped chives or green onions, and serve. 

        How to Serve

        You can serve this homemade ranch dip with Greek yogurt anywhere you’d normally serve ranch dip. It’s the perfect accompaniment to a colorful veggie tray for a healthy snack, but it’s just as delicious when paired with fun, handheld party foods. Feel free to get creative, but here are some serving suggestions: 

        • Serve it with your favorite veggies: Ranch dip and fresh veggies? A match made in heaven! Whip up a large bowl of this vegetable dip as a healthy dip for carrots, cucumbers, celery sticks, and peppers. This recipe also makes the perfect Greek yogurt chip dip for all your favorite potato chips.
        • Make it a part of your cheese board: Serve it as a part of your meat and cheese board, along with pita bread or crackers.
        • Pair it with party foods: From chicken wings to burgers, this low-calorie ranch dip is the ideal accompaniment to all your favorite Game Day Foods. If you’re looking for recipe ideas, these Slow Roasted Chicken Wings are always a hit at parties, and this Spinach Cheese Quesadilla is a true crowd-pleaser. You also can’t go wrong with serving it as a dipping sauce for fries (especially if you have kids). 
        A person dipping a cucumber into a veggie dip from the side view.

        How to Store?

        If you have leftover ranch yogurt dip or wish to make it ahead of time, you can easily store it in an airtight glass or plastic container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. 

        Just make sure to give it a stir before serving, as the ingredients tend to separate as they sit. If your yogurt dip for vegetables appears too watery after stirring, you can add a tablespoon or two of Greek yogurt to return it to a creamy consistency.

        Helpful Tips:

        • Let it rest: While it can be served right after it is made, I almost always make this yogurt vegetable dip a day in advance and store it in the fridge. Allowing it to sit in the fridge helps flavors melt together.
        • Taste for seasoning: I highly recommend giving it a taste before serving and adjusting it according to what I am serving it with. For example, if I am serving this yogurt dip with raw vegetables (like carrots, cucumbers, and cherry tomatoes) are my favorite), I might put a little bit more salt into the mixture. On the contrary, if I am serving it with chips, I might add a little bit less.
        • Turn it into a dressing: You can easily turn this yogurt-based dip into a salad dressing by thinning it with a bit of water. I would start with two tablespoons of water and increase it in small increments until I reached my desired consistency.

        FAQs

        What is the difference between yogurt and Greek yogurt?

        The main difference between regular yogurt and Greek yogurt is its consistency. Greek yogurt is strained to remove the liquid remains of milk (also known as whey), which gives it a thick consistency. Regular yogurt contains whey and has a thinner consistency.

        Can I substitute yogurt for sour cream in ranch dressing?

        Yes, you can. Yogurt is a great substitute for sour cream in Greek yogurt-based dips because it provides a similar creaminess but is lower in calories and total fat. You can make a delicious, homemade Greek ranch dip by combining Greek yogurt with a half teaspoon of onion powder, a tablespoon of garlic powder, and a little sea salt and lemon juice.

        How can I turn this Greek yogurt dip into a salad dressing?

        To turn it into a homemade Greek yogurt ranch dressing, you can add 2 tablespoons of olive oil and 2 tablespoons of lemon juice. If need be, you can thin it out (to make it pourable) by whisking in a few tablespoons of water. Be sure to taste it for seasoning and add more if necessary.

        Other Greek Yogurt Recipes You Might Like

        Greek yogurt is a staple ingredient in many of my recipes because it’s healthy, delicious, and versatile. From sweet to savory recipes, Greek yogurt does it all! If you’re a yogurt fanatic like me, or if you’re trying to finish off that tub of yogurt in your fridge, you need to try these easy recipes:

        If you try this Veggie Dip with Greek Yogurt recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A dip with yogurt and spices in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip Recipe

        This Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip is made with a few simple, healthy ingredients for a "skinny" version of the classic, store-bought ranch dressing. Serve this creamy, zesty dip with veggies for a healthy snack, or bring it to your next Game Day party as a dip for chips, wings, or any of your favorite party foods.
        Course Condiment – Dip
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 2 minutes
        Total Time 2 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 52kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup Plain Greek Yogurt*
        • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
        • ½ teaspoon onion powder
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 tablespoon chives or chopped green onion

        Instructions

        • Add ingredients to a bowl: Place Greek yogurt, garlic powder, onion powder, kosher salt, black pepper, and lemon juice in a bowl.
        • Combine: Whisk until fully combined. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
        • Serve: Transfer into a bowl and garnish with chives (or scallions). Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields one cup of yogurt dip, which is ideal for servings. The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include the vegetables.
        • Yogurt: This healthy Greek yogurt ranch recipe would work with any type of plain Greek yogurt, including full-fat, low-fat, or non-fat varieties. You can also use plain yogurt, but be aware that it will have a thinner consistency. 
        • Storage: You can store leftovers of this yogurt dip in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. Be sure to stir it before serving. If it is too thin, you can stir in a tablespoon of Greek yogurt to thicken it.
        • Make it a salad dressing: You can turn this dip into a yogurt ranch salad dressing by adding 2 tablespoons of olive oil and 2 (additional) tablespoons of lemon juice.  If need be, you can thin it out (to make it pourable) by whisking in a few tablespoons of water. Be sure to taste it for seasoning and adjust as necessary.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 52kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 315mg | Potassium: 33mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 36IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 70mg | Iron: 0.1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-ranch-dip/feed/ 0
        15 Best Fall Salad Recipe Ideas (2025) https://foolproofliving.com/fall-salad-recipes/ https://foolproofliving.com/fall-salad-recipes/#respond Tue, 04 Oct 2022 17:08:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=60555 It is no secret that here in Foolproof Living HQ we love salads. We have already shared our favorite Spring…]]>

        It is no secret that here in Foolproof Living HQ we love salads. We have already shared our favorite Spring Salads and Summer Salads. In today’s post, we are here with the best fall salads that we think you will like.

        Whether you are looking for inspiration for your upcoming Thanksgiving or Christmas menu or are in need of ideas to put the bounty of the season to good use, here are over 15 of our favorite autumn salads we make over and over again.

        Fall Harvest Salad

        Fall Harvest Salad in a bowl with two spoons on the side

        This easy fall salad is one of my ultimate go-to recipes for seasonal flavor. Iconic autumn ingredients—tangy goat cheese, dried figs, toasted pecans, and homemade maple dijon vinaigrette—make for a salad everyone will love. Serve this tasty kale salad as a hearty main meal or a side green salad for Thanksgiving dinner, and you won’t believe how many compliments you get!


        Wild Rice Salad

        Wild Rice Salad being served by a woman from the top view.

        Vegan, nutritious, and brimming with tart pomegranate arils, this colorful salad makes a great addition to any holiday table. It’s no surprise why this recipe is one of my favorite warm fall salads. Zesty orange vinaigrette perfectly balances this dish’s earthy wild rice, nutty pecans, and sweet grapes. Plus, once you check out my foolproof guide on how to cook wild rice, this delicious salad will be one of your go-to easy fall salads. Guaranteed.


        Butternut Squash Salad

        Butternut squash salad with arugula with utensils on the side.

        Out of all my fall salads, this simple recipe is one of the most colorful. Roasted butternut squash cubes make a sweet pair with leafy arugula, and warm apple cider vinaigrette takes this fall-themed salad to the next level. This hearty salad transforms fresh greens into a festive comfort food that’s as eye-catching as it is finger-licking.


        Kale Brussels Sprout Salad

        Kale Brussels Sprout Salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

        If you’re looking for healthy fall salads that will tantalize your tastebuds with seasonal flavor, you’ve come to the right place. Inspired by some of the best fall salads on the internet, this autumn salad will make a delicious addition to your Thanksgiving table and your collection of healthy meals for weeknight dinners. You can even use my guide on how to massage kale to give this simple green salad tender, flavorful leaves.


        Apple Salad

        A bowl of Apple September salad with serving utensils on the side.

        Who can say no to tart apples, fresh baby spinach, and tangy yogurt dressing? Not me! This 15-minute recipe is one of my favorite apple salads because it packs all the flavor of an apple orchard with barely any prep time. It is our favorite salad as soon as the leaves start turning their colors, which is why I also call it my go-to September Salad. Whether you put this on your Thanksgiving or Christmas dinner menu or serve it as a quick sweet-and-savory dinner side, your tastebuds will thank you.


        Shredded Brussel Sprout Salad

        Brussels sprouts salad in a bowl with serving utensils in the bowl.

        This delectable Shaved Brussels sprouts salad is the ultimate fall salad for vegetarians. Tart apples, dried cranberries, and toasted hazelnuts are just a few of this dish’s fall-forward ingredients. This recipe also comes with a zesty autumn salad dressing that brings all its flavors to life. One bite of this autumnal salad, and you’ll want it every day of the week, from September to November.


        Pear Salad

        A bowl of pear salad with spoons on the side.

        Ready in under thirty minutes, this delicious fall salad uses some of the best produce to turn your dinner table into a bountiful harvest. Pure maple syrup infuses roasted pears with warm sweetness, while juicy pomegranate seeds and creamy goat cheese give your leafy greens complex flavor. Top this fall salad recipe with my go-to green salad dressing, like my Lemon Vinaigrette, and you won’t be lost for fall-inspired salads ever again.


        Acorn Squash Salad

        Acorn squash salad in an oval plate.

        If you want Thanksgiving salad recipes that will impress everyone at your dinner table, this feel-good fall salad is just what you need. Spicy pumpkin seeds and sweet cranberries pair perfectly with this autumnal dish’s roasted acorn squash slices (or roasted delicata squash!). Topped with apple cider vinegar dressing and hearty quinoa, this arugula salad recipe is easily one of my most exquisite fall side dishes.


        Ottolenghi Butternut Squash Salad

        Butternut squash bulgur salad from the front view.

        When making fall green salad recipes for a crowd, you want a dish guaranteed to satisfy. This fall vegetable salad, right from Ottolenghi’s cookbook (affiliate link), will make a brilliant addition to any autumn spread, with bold red onion, tangy tahini dressing, and tender butternut squash. New to cooking bulgur? No problem. Learn how to cook bulgur using my foolproof guide, and this delectable family dinner will come together in a snap.


        Butternut Squash Quinoa Salad

        Butternut Squash Quinoa Salad being drizzled with salad dressing.

        No recipe screams “holiday salads” more than this healthy dish. Make this fall harvest quinoa salad ahead of time to cut your meal prep time in half, or serve it fresh for a weeknight meal as nutritious as it is tasty. New to cooking quinoa? No problem. Follow my foolproof method for cooking quinoa and easily up the nutritional value of all your autumn salad recipes with this superfood in a matter of minutes. And if you need more inspiration, be sure to check out all of my Quinoa Salads.


        Original Caesar Salad

        Caesar Salad being drizzled with the caesar salad dressing.

        It’s no wonder why Caesar salad is among my go-to fall salad ideas. Crisp romaine lettuce, sharp Parmesan cheese, and creamy Caesar dressing combine for a classic side that pairs with dozens of main dishes. You can even top this recipe with your choice of protein—from roasted chicken breast to salmon filets—and serve it as a complete meal. Fall lettuce salads don’t get easier than this fan-favorite dish.


        Goat Cheese Salad

        Goat cheese salad from the top view with a cold drink on the side.

        Want a thirty-minute meal that looks like it came straight from a five-star restaurant? Herb-crusted goat cheese balls, red wine vinaigrette, and simple salad greens pack the richest and best flavors into one easy dish. Like my other salads for autumn, you can start this simple fall salad ahead of time, making it a go-to for holiday meal prep. For even more earthy fall flavors, check out my delectable collection of easy goat cheese recipes.


        Broccoli and Cauliflower Salad

        Broccoli Cauliflower salad being mixed by a person.

        If you’re on the hunt for potluck salads for fall, this recipe is just what you need. This tasty crowd-pleaser packs irresistible flavor with ingredients like nutty sunflower seeds, sweet raisins, and savory turkey bacon. Creamy, crunchy, tangy, and more, this hearty dish will be one of your new favorite fall salad ideas.


        Kale and Apple Slaw

        Kale and Apple Slaw in a salad bowl with utensils on the side.

        Few dishes are as flavorful or as easy as this hearty autumn slaw. Tender massaged kale, thinly sliced Honeycrisp apples, and lightly salted sunflower seeds make this simple dish one of the best fall salad recipes for beginner chefs. Top this heartier green recipe with homemade Maple Dijon Vinaigrette, and prepare yourself for a slew of compliments. (Did I mention this recipe comes together in just 15 minutes and you probably already have all of the salad ingredients in your pantry?)


        Chicken Waldorf Salad

        Chicken Waldorf Salad is being served in a bowl by a person from the top view.

        Whether you take this fan-favorite dish to a party potluck, a holiday dinner, or a simple weeknight meal doesn’t matter. This hearty chicken salad is bound to be a hit. Everyone will love this recipe’s succulent roast chicken, earthy walnuts, and sweet grapes. Add a bright flavor to every bite with fresh lemon juice, tangy yogurt, and peppery seasoning, and everyone will be asking for a second helping of this simple dish.


        Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad

        Mediterranean fall sweet potato salad on a plate from the top view.

        This Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad is my go-to roasted sweet potato salad that delivers big on seasonal flavor and an absolutely stunning presentation. We are taking roasted sweet potatoes, crispy roasted chickpeas, and caramelized shallots, adding in salty feta cheese and candied walnuts, and serving it all on a bed of peppery arugula.

        Make-ahead friendly, this easy autumn salad works just as beautifully as a main meal as it does as an unforgettable side dish worthy of your holiday table.


        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Fall harvest salad in a bowl with two spoons on the side.
        Print

        15 Best Fall Salad Recipes: Fall Harvest Salad

        When it comes to autumn salads, options are endless. The variety of fresh fall produce will make it hard to choose between butternut squash salad, apple salad, and Brussels sprouts salad. This fall harvest salad is yet another one of those recipes that is favorited most amongst our readers during the fall season.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 493kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Salad Dressing:

        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
        • 1 small shallot chopped
        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup agave or honey would also work
        • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Salad:

        • 1 large bunch kale washed, stemmed and shredded (6 cups)
        • 1 apple sliced thinly
        • 1 cup dried figs cut into small pieces (or any other dried fruit)
        • ½ cup pomegranate arils
        • 1 cup pecans lightly toasted
        • ½ cup goat feta or blue cheese would also work, crumbled

        Instructions

        • To make the salad dressing: Place all dressing ingredients in a jar, put the lid on and give it a vigorous shake. Set it aside.
        • To make the salad: Drizzle the bottom of a large salad bowl with half of the dressing. Add in the kale and give it a toss.* Make sure that all the kale leaves are coated with the dressing. 
        • Add in the sliced apple, figs, pomegranate arils, and pecans. Drizzle it with the rest of the dressing and give it a gentle toss.
        • Top it off with the cheese and serve immediately.

        Notes

        • Alternatively, you can massage the kale with clean hands to soften the leaves and make sure that the dressing is fully coated on all the leaves.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be kept in an airtight container for up to 2-3 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 493kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 33g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 611mg | Potassium: 636mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 36g | Vitamin A: 1522IU | Vitamin C: 26mg | Calcium: 154mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/fall-salad-recipes/feed/ 0
        Kale Waldorf Salad https://foolproofliving.com/kale-waldorf-chicken-salad-with-cashew-and-avocado-mayo/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-waldorf-chicken-salad-with-cashew-and-avocado-mayo/#comments Thu, 15 Sep 2022 14:29:05 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6054 This kale Waldorf salad recipe is a balanced, texturally appealing, delicious recipe that can be taken one step further with…]]>

        This kale Waldorf salad recipe is a balanced, texturally appealing, delicious recipe that can be taken one step further with baked turkey bacon or even some chicken breasts. And once you master massaged kale, it will become your favorite salad you’ll want to make over and over again.

        A kale Waldorf salad in a bowl with a wooden spoon from the top view.

        Why Should You Try This Recipe?

        This kale Waldorf salad was inspired by Whole Foods and my chicken Waldorf salad recipe. I know you will love it because:

        • Healthy and nutritious: Packed full of dark leafy greens, fruit, nuts, and healthy fats, it’s a hearty salad recipe to keep you full and satisfied.
        • Ready in less than 20 minutes: Most of the work is in the preparation of ingredients. Once that’s out of the way, all you have to do is massage, toss, and enjoy.
        • Super customizable: With plenty of options to swap out one ingredient for another, you can truly make this kale salad your own.

        Ingredients

        The ingredients for this Waldorf kale salad come in three parts – massaged kale, dressing and salad.

        Ingredients for a kale salad in bowls from the top view.
        • Kale: For the massaged kale, gather together kale, olive oil, and kosher salt.
        • Salad Dressing: For the salad dressing ingredients, you will need mayonnaise, plain yogurt, Dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, kosher salt, and black pepper.
        • Salad ingredients: Gather together an apple, red seedless grapes, celery, walnuts, and raisins.

        Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

        • Kale: While there are many types of kale, I love easy-to-find curly kale or Tuscan kale. Both are easy to cut and store ahead of time to save you a step in the kitchen. If you want to use baby kale, there is no need to massage it with the oil beforehand.
        • Mayonnaise: Use an avocado oil mayo or vegan mayo.
        • Yogurt: Feel free to use regular yogurt or Greek yogurt for extra protein. Just make sure it is plain and full-fat for the richest flavor.
        • Vinegar: Apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar both work. Lemon juice is also a great sub.
        • Apple: Any color apple you enjoy works beautifully, like Granny Smith, Gala or Pink Lady.
        • Grapes: Red, green or black seedless grapes would all be delicious.
        • Nuts: Swap out the walnuts for almonds or pecans, or use sunflower seeds or pumpkin seeds for a nut-free recipe.
        • Dried Fruit: Dried fruit like raisins, craisins, or even dried cherries add that extra pop of sweetness. A few tablespoons of raisins go a long way.

        How to Make It?

        This kale version takes the same approach as a classic Waldorf salad with a typical mayonnaise base. And it’s ready in a few easy steps. Here’s how to do it:

        A person massaging kale and making a creamy dressing from the top view.
        1. Massage kale: Place prepped kale in a large bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and kosher salt. Using your fingertips, gently rub kale leaves for 2-3 minutes, turning often to make sure all kale leaves are softened and turn a deeper shade of green.
        2. Make salad dressing: In a small bowl or jar, mix together mayonnaise, plain yogurt, vinegar, salt, and pepper until it reaches a creamy consistency.
        A collage of images showing how to make a kale salad from the top view.
        1. Assemble salad: Into the bowl with the massaged kale, add apple cubes, grapes, celery stalks, walnuts, and raisins. Drizzle with the salad dressing and toss. Serve immediately in your favorite serving dish.

        Serving Suggestions

        Massaged kale Waldorf salad is best served right away for the ultimate crunch and texture notes. I love to serve it as:

        How to Store

        This kale salad with apples and walnuts will keep for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. After the 3-day mark, the fruit and vegetables will become mushy.

        A kale salad with nuts and fruit in a bowl with spoons from the side view.

        Expert Tips

        • Prep ingredients ahead of time. The grapes, celery and walnuts can all be prepped ahead of time. Store the grapes and celery in the fridge and the walnuts on the kitchen counter.
        • Massage kale with fingertips. This breaks down kale’s tough fibers and infuses the leaves with olive oil.
        • Start with half the dressing, toss, then determine if you would like more dressing. The salad dressing will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
        • Change Up The Dressing: While I am a big fan of the classic mayo-yogurt-based dressing of Waldorf Salad, I sometimes change the dressing for a different flavor profile. Other dressings like my Creamy Avocado Dressing and Green Cashew Sauce would also complement this superfood-packed salad recipe.
        • Would you rather make this with homemade mayonnaise? If so, check out this helpful How To Make Mayo tutorial post from The Endless Meal.

        FAQs

        What is the meaning of Waldorf salad?

        Waldorf salad started off as a simple apple-celery-mayo combination that debuted at the Waldorf Astoria Hotel in NYC, from where it got its name.

        Should you blanch kale for a salad?

        No, it is not necessary to blanch kale for salad. But massaging kale with your hands takes it to another level.

        How long will massaged kale salad keep?

        Massaged kale salad will keep for up to 3 days in a sealed container in the refrigerator.

        Can you eat kale raw in a salad?

        Yes, raw kale can be eaten in salad, but it is much more enjoyable to eat when first massaged with your hands.

        Other Salad Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Kale Waldorf Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.


        a bowl of kale apple salad from the top view.
        Print

        Kale Waldorf Salad Recipe

        This quick and easy Kale Waldorf Salad is wholesome, colorful, crunchy, and the perfect balance of sweet and savory with the most delicious tangy dressing. Throw it together for a light lunch or top with your favorite protein source for a healthy dinner.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 453kcal

        Ingredients

        For Massaging Kale:

        • 1 bunch lacinato kale washed, rinsed, and cut or curly kale
        • 2 teaspoons olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

        For The Salad Dressing:

        • cup mayonnaise or vegan mayo
        • ½ cup plain yogurt
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
        • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For The Salad:

        • 1 apple cut into small cubes (I kept the skin on)
        • 1 cup seedless red grapes halved
        • 1/2 cup celery stalks, cut into small pieces 2 medium-size
        • 1 cup walnuts lightly roasted
        • ½ cup dried raisins or cranberries

        Instructions

        • Place rinsed and cut kale in a large bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and kosher salt. Using clean hands, gently rub kale leaves for 2-3 minutes, turning often to make sure all kale leaves are softened.
        • Make the salad dressing by mixing together mayonnaise, plain yogurt, vinegar, salt and pepper in a small bowl or jar.
        • To assemble the salad: Add apple cubes, grapes, celery stalks, walnuts, and raisins into the bowl with massaged kale. Drizzle it with the salad dressing.
        • Give it a toss to make sure everything is combined. Serve immediately.

        Notes

        • Leftovers can be kept for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. After the 3-day mark, the fruit and vegetables will become mushy.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 453kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 14g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 736mg | Potassium: 394mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 1567IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 117mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/kale-waldorf-chicken-salad-with-cashew-and-avocado-mayo/feed/ 10
        How To Massage Kale https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-massage-kale/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-massage-kale/#comments Wed, 24 Aug 2022 22:01:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=58823 Ingredients You’ll Need to Massage Kale To prepare raw kale for massaging, you’ll need three simple ingredients: kale, olive oil,…]]>

        Why You Should Massage Kale for Salad

        Aysegul

        We all know someone who proudly claims they don’t like kale. In my home, that person was my husband. He thought the tough leaves were way too much work to chew. 

        He was right. Unmassaged kale tastes fibrous, stiff, and slightly bitter.

        Then I learned how to massage kale from a local chef, and everything changed. I like to think of it as “pre-chewing” the greens with your hands so your jaw doesn’t have to do all the heavy lifting later.

        Working the leaves with a bit of oil or acid:

        • Softens their texture by breaking down tough woody fibers (aka cellulose) and fibrous texture, turning tough kale into tender, easy-to-chew greens.
        • Helps release bitter compounds that make raw kale taste harsh.
        • Makes digestion easier, since softened leaves are gentler on the stomach.

        The good news is that it takes just a few extra minutes but makes a world of difference, and let me tell you, once you take that first bite from your massaged kale salad, you will never go back. Guaranteed.

        Ingredients You’ll Need to Massage Kale

        To prepare raw kale for massaging, you’ll need three simple ingredients: kale, olive oil, and kosher salt. You can find the exact measurements of the ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few important notes from my testing:

        Ingredients to massage kale: curly kale, olive oil, and kosher salt.

        The best kale for massaged kale salads: I get it; it is confusing because nowadays most well-stocked grocery stores in the US carry various kale varieties, the most popular being Tuscan kale (also known as lacinato kale and dinosaur kale) and curly kale. 

        And it gets even more complicated with so many different types of kale, especially if you are a novice gardener growing your own.

        The good news is that I find the best kale for massaging and using in a salad recipe is curly kale, the most common type you can find in any supermarket.

        A side-by-side comparison of kale varieties: curly kale with wavy edges on the left and Lacinato kale (Tuscan or dinosaur kale) with flat, dark green leaves on the right.

        I also prefer curly kale because it offers more body than the other common kale varieties, giving you more bang for your buck.

        That said, Tuscan kale has a gentler flavor and will also work for this recipe.

        The only other type of kale I do not recommend is baby kale because its tender leaves will not withstand the massaging process.

        For the best results, choose crisp, vibrant leaves. Older or wilted kale (yellow-ish leaves rather than bright green ones) is tougher and won’t tenderize as easily. 

        Olive oil: I always opt for a good-quality extra-virgin olive oil to soften my kale, but this simple recipe would work with any oil you have on hand. My other favorite one is avocado oil.

        Kosher salt: You can also use sea salt. Salt also helps break down the kale’s fibers more quickly, making the leaves soften, so do not skip it.

        How to Massage Kale (Step-by-Step)

        When it comes to massaging kale, you can do it with or without oil. I personally prefer using a small amount of oil, but if you are trying to limit your fat intake, you can totally do it without oil. Here is how I do it:

        Massaging With Oil (or a Salad Dressing):

        Learn how to soften kale and prepare it as a base for the most delicious massaged kale salads in five easy steps:

        Steps to prepare kale: drying leaves with a towel and chopping with a knife.

        Step 1 – Wash the kale: Rinse the large kale leaves under cold running water to remove any dirt or debris. Alternatively, you can fill a bowl with water fitted with a colander, soak the kale in it for a few minutes, and drain.

        Then, place the wet kale leaves on a clean kitchen towel, and use another towel (or paper towels) to dry them as much as possible. 

        And yes, if you have a salad spinner, you can use that too.

        Step 2 – Chop the kale: You can use your hands or a sharp knife to chop the kale into bite-sized pieces. A trick I do is to remove the leaves from their fibrous stems by running the stems through my closed fist. Or, you can slice the kale leaves away from their stems on a cutting board.

        If you’d like a full walkthrough, check out my beginner’s guide to cutting kale for more tips and photos.

        The massage process: drizzling olive oil over chopped kale and rubbing leaves by hand.

        Step 3 – Add a drizzle of olive oil: Add the chopped kale to a large mixing bowl, and drizzle the leaves with olive oil. I also like to add a pinch of salt to season them as I give them a massage.

        Step 4 – Massage the kale: Use your clean hands to massage the kale with olive oil for 1-2 minutes. Make sure to turn the small pieces frequently so they soften evenly.

        Visual Cue: You’ll know you have massaged it enough once the leaves turn darker (more of a vibrant dark green) and the overall volume has reduced by about one-third.

        Step 5 – Enjoy: Once the leaves soften and darken, your massaged kale is ready to be enjoyed.

        Hands massaging kale in a bowl until it softens and turns a vibrant dark green.

        Massaging without Oil:

        Alternatively, if you don’t want to use any oil, you can still soften kale using a simple method. Depending on the flavor profile of your salad recipe, you have two options:

        • Use an alternative fat: If you don’t want to use olive oil, avocado makes a natural, mild substitute. It’s what I use in my Kale Avocado Salad. You may also want to try other earthy options, such as nut or seed butter, unsweetened tahini, or unsweetened peanut butter.
          One small ripe avocado or one tablespoon of your favorite nut or seed butter is all you need. The process is pretty much the same; gently massage your kale with these substitutes until the leaves are softened.
        • Add an acidic ingredient: Acidic ingredients can also help soften raw kale. Simply massage a tablespoon of vinegar (I suggest apple cider vinegar), fresh lemon juice, or citrus juice into your chopped kale.

        Expert Tips for Tender Kale Every Time

        Now that you know how to make kale tender for a salad, here are a few things to keep in mind:

        Add the dressing gradually: Start with a small amount of dressing or oil. You can always add more once the kale softens. If you add too much at the start, the salad will be weighed down and become soggy.

        Don’t over-massage: Avoid over-massaging the raw leaves. All you need is 1-2 minutes of massaging for it to become soft. If you massage them for too long, they might turn mushy and lose their volume.

        Make sure the kale is fully dry: Do your best to ensure it is thoroughly dried before beginning the massaging process. If you’ve ever made a salad dressing, you’ll know water and oil don’t mix. As a result, any leftover moisture on the leaves will act as a barrier, preventing the fat from entering the cell walls and making them tender. Therefore, the drier the leaves are, the better they’ll absorb the oil.

        Kale shrinks as you massage it: Keep in mind that as you massage kale leaves, they will become softer and get smaller in size. When I am massaging kale for salads as a side dish, I use one bunch for 4 servings. If I am serving it as a meal on its own, I usually use 2 bunches of kale.

        Save the kale stems for vegetable stock or chicken stock: Instead of tossing them, add your leftover kale stems to your next batch of stock. They add great depth and help reduce kitchen waste.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        A person massaging kale in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        How to Massage Kale

        Learn How to Massage Kale to prepare it for use in all your favorite salads! This step-by-step guide teaches you how to tenderize this leafy green with just 2 simple ingredients to make it more palatable, tender, and easily digestible.
        Course How To
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 1 bunch
        Calories 126kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 bunch curly kale
        • 3 teaspoons olive oil
        • kosher salt optional

        Instructions

        • Wash and dry the kale: Rinse kale under cold running water until no dirt or debris is left. Place kale leaves on a clean kitchen towel. Using another towel (or paper towels), dry kale leaves as much as you can.*
        • Chop the kale: Remove leaves from kale stems either with your hands or using a knife. Chop kale leaves into small bite size pieces. Save the kale stems for your next chicken or vegetable stock, or discard them.
        • Add oil and salt: Transfer chopped kale into a large salad bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt if using.
        • Massage the kale: Using clean hands, massage (gently rub) kale leaves for 2-3 minutes turning often to make sure all kale leaves are softened, it has turned dark green, and lost about 1/3 of its volume.
        • Serve: Use in your favorite kale salads* or other recipes.

        Notes

        • *Alternatively, you can use a salad spinner to dry the kale leaves.
        • *Want to massage kale without using any oil? Here are two other options to help you soften/tenderize kale for salads:
          • Use an alternative fat: Try adding other fats such as a ripe avocado, nut or seed butter, unsweetened tahini, or unsweetened peanut butter. I would usually use 1 small, ripe avocado and 2 tablespoons of nut butter per kale bunch.
          • Add an acidic ingredient: Acid-based ingredients are fantastic substitutes when you want to prepare kale raw. Simply massage a tablespoon of vinegar (I suggest apple cider vinegar), fresh lemon juice, or citrus juice into your chopped kale.
        • Storage: If you have leftovers or are massaging kale as a part of your meal prep, simply place it in an airtight container in the fridge. It will stay fresh for 3-4 days.
         

        Nutrition

        Calories: 126kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Sodium: 30mg | Potassium: 198mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 5694IU | Vitamin C: 53mg | Calcium: 145mg | Iron: 1mg

        Recipe Ideas To Use Your Massage Kale In Salads:

        Now, at this point, you are probably wondering about ways to use your massaged kale in your daily cooking. So, here are a few of my favorite kale salad recipes to serve throughout the week:

        Variations for massaged kale salads: a crunchy Kale Apple Slaw with sunflower seeds and a creamy Kale Avocado Salad with pine nuts.

        Kale Apple Slaw (pictured in the photo above on the left)

        Serves: 4
        Time commitment: 15 minutes
        Why I love it: Savory, sweet & crunchy all at the same time

        If you have never tried the kale and apple combo, you are in for a treat. This crunchy slaw comes together in minutes with crisp apples, shredded, massaged kale, crunchy sunflower seeds, and a quick, homemade, tangy dressing. 

        Kale Avocado Salad

        Serves: 4
        Time Commitment: 15 minutes
        Why I love it: Vegan recipe, A great side dish with any main dish

        This recipe uses a ripe avocado to massage the kale. It is made with just a few basic ingredients and it stores well, in case you want to make it as a part of your weekly meal prep.

        Recipe ideas for massaged kale: a bowl of Harvest Kale Salad with dried figs and a side of Kale Brussels Sprouts Salad with pomegranate arils.

        Harvest Kale Salad
        Serves: 6
        Time commitment:
        20 minutes
        Why I love it:
        Special occasion worthy, Easy to make

        This is my most popular fall salad recipe, especially on Thanksgiving. This massaged kale salad, mixed with dried figs, apples, toasted nuts, and creamy goat cheese, is not only filling and delicious but also a showstopper.

        Brussels Sprout Kale Salad

        Serves: 6
        Time commitment: 20 minutes
        Why I love it: Make Ahead Friendly, Great for the holiday season

        Massaged kale mixed with the shredded sprouts makes a great green salad. I used a light white-wine vinaigrette and topped it with maple-roasted pecans and juicy pomegranate arils for a bit of color and crunch.

        More ways to use massaged kale: a sweet Kale Waldorf Salad with grapes and a plant protein-packed Kale Quinoa Salad with chickpeas.

        Kale Waldorf Salad

        Serves: 6
        Time commitment:
        20 minutes
        Why I love it:
        Beginner-friendly, visually impressive

        The classic American Waldorf Salad made with massaged kale! Packed with grapes, apples, and walnuts, this spin on the classic is surprisingly delicious.

        Kale Quinoa Salad  

        Serves: 6
        Time commitment: 20 minutes
        Why I love it: High in plant protein, Great for meal prep (it stores well)

        Massaged kale mixed with fluffy quinoa,  creamy avocado, and roasted chickpeas, this is one of my favorite winter lunch recipes. You can serve it on its own or with some baked chicken breast on top for extra protein.

        FAQs

        How long does massaged kale last?

        Massaged kale will keep well for 3 to 4 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. If you’re meal prepping, wait to add the dressing until just before serving for the freshest texture.

        Do I need to cook kale for a salad?

        Though cooking kale for salad is an option, you don’t have to cook kale to use it in a salad. If the raw leaves taste bitter or feel too firm, a quick 1 to 2-minute massage will soften them and make them easier to eat.

        Does massaging kale make it less bitter?

        Yes, massaging the leaves helps break down some of the kale’s natural bitter taste. As the leaves soften, their flavor mellows and becomes noticeably more pleasant.

        Do I need to rinse kale after massaging?

        No, there’s no need to rinse your massaged kale before adding it to your favorite recipes. Simply add the tenderized leaves to a salad bowl and top them with your favorite dressing.

        How long should you massage kale?

        Usually, 1 to 2 minutes is enough. Stop once the leaves darken, soften, and reduce in volume, as over-massaging can make the kale too limp.

        Can you massage kale the night before?

        Absolutely. Massaged kale holds up very well in the refrigerator and stays tender for several days, which makes it ideal for meal prep. Store it in the refrigerator, in a sealed container, for up to 3 to 4 days.

        How do I fix kale that’s too soft?

        If the leaves become too limp, add a handful of fresh, un-massaged kale to the bowl and toss to balance the texture.

        How to Store Massaged Kale

        Unlike other, more delicious salad greens like baby spinach or Romaine, massaged kale does not go limp or soggy. In fact, it often tastes better the next day as the flavors meld.

        Whether you’re making a big batch for salads for your weekly meal prep or massaging just enough for tonight’s dinner, here’s how to keep it fresh and ready to use:

        Make ahead: You can wash, dry, and chop the kale up to a week in advance. Store the dry, prepped leaves in an airtight container lined with a paper towel to absorb any excess moisture. 

        When you’re ready, simply massage the kale with oil, dressing, or your acidic ingredient of choice. I usually do this on Sundays and add it to lunches throughout the week.

        Storing massaged kale: Once the kale is massaged, place it in an airtight container and refrigerate. It usually stays fresh for 3 to 4 days without losing its texture. 

        If you’re new to storing kale and want to learn more about washing, blanching, or freezing it, be sure to check out my guide on how to store kale.

        This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-massage-kale/feed/ 3
        Jennifer Aniston Salad https://foolproofliving.com/jennifer-aniston-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/jennifer-aniston-salad/#comments Fri, 19 Aug 2022 14:40:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=58624 The buzz about the viral recipe eventually caught the attention of Aniston, who spoke out in a recent interview, saying…]]>

        The buzz about the viral recipe eventually caught the attention of Aniston, who spoke out in a recent interview, saying she actually never ate the famous salad on set! The mix-up arose when Aniston shared the salad recipe during an Instagram takeover for the Living Proof brand. 

        A salad with bulgur, veggies, herbs, cheese, and pistachios in a bowl from the top view.

        So while she did eat the “Jennifer Aniston Salad,” it wasn’t the same one she had on set. According to a Los Angeles Times article, Aniston’s fellow co-stars (Lisa Kudrow and Courtney Cox) said the real salad recipe Jennifer Aniston ate on Friends was a “doctored up” Cobb salad, to which she added chickpeas and turkey bacon.

        Regardless of the mix-up, the salad that we initially thought to be “The Jennifer Salad” is still delicious, viral-worthy, and incredibly satisfying. We love cooking with bulgur wheat here on the blog, so we just had to share the recipe! 

        Why is This Recipe Worth the Hype?

        It’s no wonder this legendary salad went viral on social media. It’s fresh, healthy, colorful, and filling- everything you could ever ask for in a salad! Here are some other reasons to give this internet-famous recipe a try:

        • Quick, easy to make, delicious, and filling: In our opinion, a good salad is just as filling as it is nutritious! Thanks to bulgur as a base, this salad will keep you satisfied for hours. It’s also super quick to throw together and, most importantly, incredibly delicious! 
        • Easy to customize (make it your own): While we love Jennifer Aniston’s original combo, feel free to customize this salad and swap out ingredients to make it your own! Play with various veggies, nuts, and herbs to see what combo suits your taste buds. 
        • Perfect for meal prep: This wholesome Jen salad recipe is the perfect salad for meal prep. It keeps in the fridge for up to 5 days, so you can make a big batch on the weekends and enjoy it for lunch all week!

        Ingredients

        This easy salad recipe has three sets of ingredients: hearty bulgur wheat for the base of the salad, a combination of fresh, colorful veggies and herbs, and a simple lemon juice and olive oil dressing. Here’s what you’ll need: 

        Ingredients for bulgur salad in bowls from the top view.
        • Bulgur wheat: Any type of bulgur that you have on hand will work, but I personally like to use medium coarse bulgur. You can pick up Bob’s Red Mill (affiliate link) bulgur from the grocery store or get this brand (affiliate link) online. If you want to learn more about bulgur, check out my Types of Bulgur guide. I also have a How to Cook Bulgur guide that outlines the best way of cooking bulgur for foolproof results. 
        • Salad dressing: For the salad dressing, gather fresh lemon juice, extra virgin olive oil, kosher salt, and ground black pepper. 
        • Salad ingredients: For the salad, you’ll need an English cucumber, a can of chickpeas, red onion, fresh mint, fresh parsley, pistachios, and crumbled feta cheese.

        Substitutions & Variations 

        • Use quinoa instead of bulgur: If you don’t have bulgur on hand or can’t find any at your local grocery store, you can use an equal amount of cooked quinoa (for gluten free option), cooked farro, or another bulgur substitute instead! Either will provide a filling, hearty base for your salad. 
        • Fresh herbs: If mint or flat-leaf parsley don’t suit your taste buds, fresh dill or basil could take their place! 
        • Cucumber: The cucumber in this celebrity salad adds extra color and a nice crunch. You can either use one large English cucumber, Persian cucumbers, or mini cucumbers. 
        • Cheese: Feel free to swap the feta cheese in this recipe for your favorite cheese or whatever you have in the fridge. Mozzarella or shredded cheddar are great options! Keep in mind that feta adds a nice salty flavor to the salad, so you may need to add more salt if using a different type of cheese.
        • Red onion: Are red onions just a bit too sharp for you? Try subbing them for scallions (green onions), or try my Mexican Pickled Onions recipe! 
        • Make it vegan: To make Jennifer Aniston’s salad vegan, simply omit the cheese! 
        • Add an avocado: To add some extra healthy fats to this viral salad and make it even more filling, try adding an avocado.
        • Extra protein: Turn this Jennifer Aniston bulgur salad into an easy, protein-packed weeknight dinner to add to your list of main courses by topping it with my Bone-In Chicken Breast, Baked Turkey Bacon, or these Air Fry Chicken Legs

        How to Make This Recipe

        The Jennifer salad recipe just requires a little bit of chopping, which you can do while the bulgur cooks. All it needs is a gentle toss and a drizzle of dressing, and you’re done! Here are the details:

        A person showing how to cook bulgur from the top view for the Jennifer salad.
        1. Cook the bulgur: Add the bulgur and 2 cups of water (or chicken/veggie broth) to a small saucepan over medium heat. Bring to a boil, cover, and simmer over low heat until all the liquid is absorbed. Let it rest while you prepare the rest of the salad. If you are new to cooking bulgur, be sure to check out our guide on How To Cook Bulgur Wheat.
        2. Make the dressing: Add the lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and pepper to a small bowl or measuring cup. Whisk until combined. 
        A person showing how to assemble a bulgur salad with veggies, herbs, cheese, and pistachios.
        1. Assemble the salad: Place the cooked bulgur (make sure to fluff with a fork before adding), cucumber, chickpeas, red onion, fresh herbs, pistachios, and feta cheese in a large mixing bowl. Drizzle with the dressing, gently toss and taste for seasoning. Add more salt or pepper if desired. 

        How to Store

        This salad stays fresh in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 5 days, making it perfect for meal prep. The grains and veggies soak up the dressing and herby flavors while it sits, so it gets better and better each day!

        A salad with bulgur with spoons in the bowl from the side view.

        FAQs

        What’s in the Jennifer Aniston salad?

        This viral Jen Aniston salad, also known as the Rachel Salad, is made up of bulgur wheat, cucumber, chickpeas, red onion, fresh mint and parsley, pistachios, and feta cheese. The simple salad dressing recipe combines lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and pepper.

        Is Jennifer Aniston salad healthy?

        Yes, Jennifer Aniston’s favorite salad is very healthy! Bulgur wheat, which makes up the base of the salad, has many health benefits, as it’s a great source of plant-based protein, fiber, magnesium, and iron. No wonder everyone wants to partake in the Friends diet!

        How many calories is the Jennifer Aniston salad?

        One serving of the Jen salad recipe contains about 402 calories. You can learn more about the nutrition facts of this salad in the recipe card below.

        What did Jennifer Aniston eat every day on the set of Friends?

        While many believe that Aniston ate the viral “Jennifer Aniston Friends Salad” every single day while working on the set of the show Friends, she actually ate a spruced-up Cobb salad. This Jennifer Aniston Cobb salad recipe included many of the usual Cobb salad ingredients plus her special additions of garbanzo beans and turkey bacon.

        Other Grain-Based Salad Recipes You Might Like

        If you’re looking for more fresh, colorful, flavorful, and filling salads like this viral Bulgur Salad recipe, you’re in for a treat! Browse my other delicious salad recipes using the links below:

        If you try this popular salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Jennifer Aniston Salad recipe in a bowl with spoons from the top view.
        Print

        Jennifer Aniston Salad Recipe

        The Jennifer Aniston Salad is definitely worth the hype! This recipe is so filling, fresh, and delicious, thanks to hearty bulgur (or quinoa), fresh veggies, fragrant herbs, creamy feta cheese, and salty pistachios. Whip up this wholesome salad for a quick weeknight dinner, or meal prep it for flavorful lunches all week!
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 30 minutes
        Servings 4
        Calories 402kcal

        Ingredients

        For the Bulgur Wheat:

        • 1 cup bulgur wheat* or quinoa
        • 2 cups water or vegetable or chicken stock*

        For the Salad Dressing:

        • ¼ cup freshly squeezed lemon juice
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt* more to taste
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For the Salad:

        • 1 English cucumber chopped (about 1 cup)
        • 1 15 oz. can chickpeas, drained and rinsed
        • cup red onion chopped
        • ½ cup fresh mint chopped
        • ½ cup fresh parsley chopped
        • ½ cup pistachios shelled and roughly chopped
        • ½ cup crumbled feta

        Instructions

        • To cook bulgur wheat, place bulgur and 2 cups of water (or chicken or veggie broth) in a small saucepan (with a lid) over medium heat. Bring to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat to low and cook until all the cooking liquid is absorbed. Let it rest while you are working on the rest of the ingredients. Right before adding it to the salad, fluff it with a fork.
        • To make the salad dressing: In a measuring cup (or a small bowl), whisk together lemon juice, olive oil, and salt and pepper.
        • To assemble the salad: In a large salad bowl, place the now-cooked bulgur, cucumber, chickpeas, red onion, fresh herbs, pistachios, and feta cheese. Drizzle with the salad dressing. Give it a gentle toss, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

        Video

        Notes

        • Bulgur or Quinoa: I used medium coarse bulgur, but Bob’s Red Mill’s Red Bulgur or quinoa can also be used in this recipe. If you need a refresher, be sure to check out my guide on How To Cook Quinoa.
        • Salt & Feta cheese: As it is with any salad that uses feta cheese, I recommend tasting the feta cheese before adding a lot of salt to this salad.  
        • Swap water with chicken stock or vegetable broth: One of the easiest ways to make this easy salad even more flavorful is to cook the grain of your choice (whether it is bulgur, quinoa or farro) in vegetable or chicken stock.
        • Storage: Store in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 5 days. 
        • Serving size: This recipe is approximately 1 1/2 (one and a half) cups per serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 402kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 525mg | Potassium: 534mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1098IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 165mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/jennifer-aniston-salad/feed/ 11
        Potato Salad with Capers https://foolproofliving.com/the-ultimate-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/the-ultimate-potato-salad/#comments Tue, 16 Aug 2022 20:18:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3278 Inspired by my deviled egg potato salad and red potato salad, this potato salad recipe with capers is just as…]]>

        Inspired by my deviled egg potato salad and red potato salad, this potato salad recipe with capers is just as tangy and comforting. It comes together in a flash and can be served in a number of ways.

        And if you happen to have extra potatoes on hand, give these muffin tin potatoes or this mashed potato casserole a try.

        potato salad recipe with capers on a plate from the top view

        Why Should You Try This Recipe?

        Nothing says potato salad more to me than a drool-worthy dressing to toss it in. I know you will love it because:

        • Update on classic potato salad. This one comes with a world of fixings, including capers, pickles, onions, and hard-boiled eggs.
        • Serving is versatile. You can serve this summer potato salad recipe warm, room temperature or cold. The choice is yours!
        • Super customizable. With plenty of ingredient swaps and substitutions, you can really make this potato salad your own.

        Ingredients

        This easy potato salad recipe is broken down into three parts – potatoes, dressing and the salad ingredients.

        • Potatoes: You will need Yukon Gold potatoes, kosher salt, and water.
        ingredients for salad dressing for potatoes salad from the top view
        • Salad Dressing: Gather mayonnaise (or veganaise), whole grain Dijon mustard, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and black pepper.
        ingredients for lemon potato salad in bowls from the top view
        • Other potato salad ingredients: Prepare dill pickles, red onion, scallions, capers, hard-boiled eggs, and fresh parsley.

        Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

        • Potatoes: Yellow potatoes, such as Yukon gold, give an extra buttery consistency. But waxy potatoes, such as red potatoes, fingerlings, baby potatoes, or new potatoes, will all work. Just note cooking times will vary.
        • Acid: Replace the lemon juice with white wine vinegar or red wine vinegar instead.
        • Pickles: Feel free to use dill pickles, sweet pickles, bread and butter pickles, garlic pickles or extra briny cornichons.
        • Olives: Up the salty bite a bit more with the addition of sliced green olives or black olives.
        • Onions: I love the mix of sweet red onion and scallions, but chives and spring onions are a great combo too.
        • Vegan: Use veganaise and omit the hard-boiled eggs.
        • Fresh Herbs: Toss in a handful of fresh dill or replace the parsley altogether.

        How to Make

        This homemade potato salad recipe is so easy to make and takes under 30 minutes to put together. Here’s how to do it:

        person showing how to boil potatoes and make dressing for warm potato salad from the top view
        1. Boil Potatoes: In a large pot, cover potatoes with cold water by one inch and liberally salt the water. Set the pot over medium-high heat. Bring the potatoes to a boil, then turn down the heat to medium. Cook until the potatoes are slightly tender when pierced with a sharp knife, 15-20 minutes. Drain the potatoes in a colander. Leave aside to cool slightly.
        2. Make the dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, mustard, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and black pepper until combined.
        showing how to assemble potato salad with lemon from the top view
        1. Make the salad: Once the potatoes are cool enough to handle, cut them into small cubes or thin rounds. Place potatoes in a large bowl, then stir in the pickles, red onion, scallions, capers, eggs, and chopped parsley. Pour the dressing over the mixture and give it a gentle toss. Serve right away or store in the fridge for later.

        What to Serve it With?

        This homemade potato salad is a crowd pleaser and the ultimate summer side dish that goes with just about anything. Some of my favorite pairings include:

        How to Store

        This creamy potato salad will last for days in the fridge. Here’s how to do it:

        • To Store Leftovers: Transfer to an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Make Ahead: If looking to get ahead for a party or BBQ, potato salad will keep well in the fridge, tightly wrapped in plastic wrap, in your serving bowl of choice for 2-3 days. Please note that the potatoes will absorb the dressing over time. If you prefer a looser potato salad come serving time, make an extra batch of dressing.
        a bowl of salad from the top with a spoon on the side

        Expert Tips

        • Cooking time will vary based on the size of the potatoes. Start checking at the 15-minute mark after boiling.
        • Make the dressing and prep the rest of the ingredients while the potatoes boil. This cuts down on prep time.
        • Thoroughly drain the potatoes in a colander. This further allows excess water to drain and evaporate.
        • Toss the potatoes with the dressing while they are still warm. This ensures that the dressing is thoroughly absorbed by the potatoes, making them extra delicious and creamy.
        • New to cooking hard-boiled eggs? My friend Beth’s article on How to Make Hard Boiled Eggs is my go-to guide for perfectly hard-boiled eggs every time.

        FAQs

        What type of potato is best for potato salad?

        Avoid starchy potatoes, like russet potatoes, and stick to buttery, thin-skinned potatoes such as Yukon Gold or Red Potatoes.

        How long will potato salad last?

        Potato salad will last in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.

        Is it better to boil or steam potatoes for potato salad?

        I find it much easier to boil potatoes for potato salad. Steaming potatoes requires much more attention since the water evaporates from the pan during cooking.

        Should you let potatoes cool before making potato salad?

        Potatoes should be cool yet slightly warm to the touch when tossed with the dressing. This way, the potatoes absorb more of all those delicious flavors.

        Why does my potato salad get watery?

        When you boil potatoes, they absorb much of the boiling water. It’s important to leave them to cool slightly and dry out to allow the excess water to evaporate.

        Do you salt the water when boiling potatoes for potato salad?

        Yes, a healthy pinch of salt is key. The general rule of thumb I follow is 1 Tablespoon Kosher salt for every 1 quart of water.

        Is it better to peel potatoes before boiling for potato salad?

        I prefer to leave the skins on entirely, for both texture and color. That being said, if you prefer to peel them, boil the whole, unpeeled potatoes first, then peel them.

        Can you freeze potato salad?

        I do not recommend freezing potato salad. The texture of both the potatoes and dressing will change once thawed from frozen.

        Other BBQ Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you try this Potato Salad with Capers recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        This recipe was originally published in 2014 and was called The Ultimate Potato Salad. In August 2022, it has been updated with new photos and helpful information with no changes made to the originally published recipe.

        potato salad with capers and parsley in a bowl from the top view
        Print

        Potato Salad with Capers Recipe

        This Potato Salad with Capers recipe is what I'd like to call "The Ultimate Potato Salad recipe". Creamy potatoes mixed in with capers, cornichons, onions, and eggs, it offers the perfect balance of creamy, salty, and earthy flavors.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 20 minutes
        Total Time 40 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 340kcal

        Ingredients

        For the potatoes:

        • 2 pounds Yukon Gold potatoes washed thoroughly and unpeeled
        • Kosher Salt

        For the dressing:

        • 3/4 cup mayonnaise or veganese
        • 3 tablespoons whole grain mustard
        • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
        • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed through a garlic press
        • 1/2 teaspoon salt
        • 1/2 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

        For the salad:

        • 1/4 cup dill pickles chopped
        • 1 red onion (a small one – approximately 1/2 cup chopped onions)
        • 5 stalks scallions both green and white parts, chopped
        • 1/2 cup capers drained
        • 2 hard-boiled eggs chopped
        • 1/4 cup Italian parsley chopped

        Instructions

        • Boil Potatoes: In a large pot, cover potatoes with cold water by one inch and liberally salt the water. Bring the potatoes to a boil over medium-high heat, then turn down the heat to medium and continue to cook until potatoes are barely tender when pierced with a knife, 15-20 minutes. Drain the potatoes in a colander and set them aside to cool.
        • Make the dressing: In a small mixing bowl, whisk together the mayonnaise, mustard, lemon juice, garlic, salt and black pepper.
        • Make the salad: Cut the now-cooled potatoes into small cubes. Place them in a large mixing bowl. Add the pickles, red onion, scallions, capers, eggs, and chopped parsley. Pour the dressing over the mixture and give it a gentle stir. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Serve warm, room temperature, or cold.

        Video

        Notes

        • To Store Leftovers place them to an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Make Ahead: If you are looking to get ahead for a party, this salad will keep well in the fridge, tightly wrapped in plastic wrap for 2-3 days. Please note that the potatoes will absorb the dressing over time. If you prefer a looser potato salad come serving time, make an extra batch of dressing.
        • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing this potato salad recipe.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 340kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 1122mg | Potassium: 735mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 421IU | Vitamin C: 38mg | Calcium: 56mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/the-ultimate-potato-salad/feed/ 41
        Thai Steak and Noodle Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thai-grilled-beef-and-herb-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thai-grilled-beef-and-herb-salad/#comments Mon, 15 Aug 2022 16:29:11 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10156 I absolutely adore all of my Asian recipes. Some of the most noteworthy include Thai Butternut Squash Soup, Asian Quinoa…]]>

        I absolutely adore all of my Asian recipes. Some of the most noteworthy include Thai Butternut Squash Soup, Asian Quinoa Salad, and Thai Beef Curry in Slow Cooker. But I must admit, this easy Thai beef noodle salad tops all of my summer salads.

        a close-up of Thai beef noodle salad from the top view

        Why Should You Try This Recipe?

        I can assure you that you are going to fall in love with this Thai beef salad with noodles upon the first bite. I know you’ll love it because:

        • Crunch, crunch and more crunch. The more texture there is in my salad, the more crave-able they become. This has all the crunch, along with some creamy, too.
        • Balanced and flavorful. It has a little bit of everything – sweet, savory, salty, spicy, sour, and that special umami essence you just can’t put your finger on. And the beef is phenomenal here. It is first soaked in a flavor-packed marinade, then quickly cooked on the grill or stovetop. You will be making this beef noodle salad all summer long!
        • Easy to make ahead. The steak, dressing, and noodles can all be made ahead. This means all that’s left to do is some chopping and tossing come serving time.

        Ingredients

        The ingredients for this Asian steak noodle salad are broken down into a few parts – steak marinade, salad dressing, noodles, and salad.

        ingredients for Asian steak noodle salad from the top view

        For the steak marinade, you will need fresh ginger, garlic clove, soy sauce, coconut sugar, fresh lime juice, fish sauce, black pepper, olive oil, toasted sesame oil, NY strip steak, and Kosher salt.

        ingredients for the dressing for beef Thai salad from the top view

        For the Thai dressing, gather together fresh lime juice, hot chili paste, avocado oil, fish sauce, raw sugar, and honey.

        ingredients for steak Thai salad in bowls from the top view

        For the noodles and salad, you will need ramen noodles, toasted sesame oil, large mango, arugula, carrots, scallions, savoy cabbage, tomatoes, avocado, cilantro, basil leaves, mint leaves, salted peanuts, and lime wedges.

        Substitutions and Helpful Ingredient Notes

        • Soy Free: Replace the soy sauce with an equal amount of coconut aminos or tamari.
        • Sugar: Replace the coconut sugar with light brown sugar for the marinade and use regular granulated sugar in place of the cane sugar for the dressing.
        • Steak: Use your favorite cut of steak, such as NY strip steak, sirloin steaks, Filet Mignon, flank steak, or skirt steak. Note cooking times will vary.
        • Hot Chili Paste: My favorite chile paste is Sambal Oelek, easily found in the global/international food section.
        • Noodles: Replace the ramen with thin rice noodles, like vermicelli or lo mein noodles.
        • Fruit: If mango is unavailable, swap it out for pineapple or mandarin oranges.
        • Greens: Go the Houston’s route and swap out the arugula for watercress instead.
        • Cabbage: If you can’t find savoy cabbage (a bit milder and sweeter), regular green cabbage can be substituted.
        • Tomatoes: Replace the tomato with 1 cup cherry tomatoes.
        • Peanut Free: If you or your friends have a slight aversion to peanuts, crunchy and salted almonds are the next best thing. Sesame seeds are a great sub, as well.

        How to Make

        Houston’s Thai steak noodle salad recipe takes some prep work and an overnight marinade, but your patience will be rewarded. Here’s how I like to do it:

        person showing how to marinate steak for Thai beef salad noodles
        1. Prepare marinade: In a small bowl, whisk together the ginger, garlic, soy sauce, sugar, lime juice, fish sauce, black pepper, olive oil, and toasted sesame oil. Pour into an airtight container with a lid or a large resealable plastic bag. Place the steak in the marinade (or a small resealable plastic bag) and give it a gentle toss to ensure all parts of the steak are coated. Seal and let it marinate for 6-12 hours.
        2. Prepare steak: Remove the steak from the marinade and place it onto a large plate lined with paper towels. Pat dry with another paper towel to remove the excess liquid. Discard marinade. Season with salt on both sides.
        3. Grill steak: Preheat a gas grill to 450 degrees Fahrenheit. Grill, flipping the steak a few times during cooking until lightly charred on both sides. Check for doneness by inserting a thermometer (affiliate link) into the thickest part of the steak. Pull it off when it registers 120 degrees Fahrenheit for medium-rare or 130 degrees Fahrenheit for medium, depending on your desired degree. This takes about 9-11 minutes in total. Once off the grill, tent with aluminum foil. Allow it to rest on a cutting board for 10 minutes. Then, slice into 1-inch thick slices or cubes right before serving.
        person showing how to make dressing and noodles for Thai steak salad recipe
        1. Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together lime juice, hot chili paste, avocado oil, fish sauce, sugar, and honey. Give it a taste and add more salt if needed.
        2. Cook noodles: Bring a small pot of water to a boil. Cook noodles for 3 minutes, or according to package directions. Drain and transfer to a large salad bowl. Drizzle with the sesame oil and give it a gentle toss to coat.
        person showing how to make salad for steak noodle salad
        1. Assemble salad: Place the mango, arugula, shredded carrots, scallions, finely shredded savoy cabbage, and tomatoes in the bowl with the noodles. Drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine. Finish with the sliced steak, avocado, fresh cilantro, basil, mint, and peanuts. Gently toss and divide amongst four plates. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

        What to Serve it With?

        This Thai steak salad recipe needs nothing more than some company to share it with. Serve it as:

        How to Store

        This beef Thai salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. After the 2-day mark, the vegetables break down and become mushy.

        Thai beef salad with noodles on a plate from the top view

        Expert Tips

        • Marinate the steak the night before. The steak can sit in the marinade for up to 12 hours without it affecting the texture.
        • Prepare steak, dressing, and noodles up to 2 days in advance. Grill the steak, mix the dressing, and boil the noodles. Store each in their own airtight container in the fridge. This salad (including the meat) can be served at room temperature. However, if you prefer, you can lightly warm up the grilled meat before assembling the salad.
        • Use a stovetop grill pan. Grill the steak on an indoor grill pan or cast-iron skillet instead.

        Other Thai Cuisine Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

        If you try this Thai Steak and Noodle Salad recipe or any other beef recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        This recipe is adapted from Bon Appetit’s Thai Steak Noodle Recipe.

        Houston's Thai Steak Salad in an oval plate from the top view
        Print

        Thai Steak and Noodle Salad Recipe

        This Thai Steak and Noodle Salad is colorful, refreshing, and bursting with all the Asian flavors you love. This Houston's copycat summer salad combines a fresh herb and veggie base with sweet-spicy Thai dressing and perfectly marinated steak. Serve it as a complete meal next time you're craving Thai cuisine!
        Course Salad
        Cuisine Thai Cuisine
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 30 minutes
        Cook Time 20 minutes
        Marinading time 6 hours
        Total Time 6 hours 50 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 981kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Steak Marinade:

        • 1 tablespoon grated fresh ginger from a 1 inch piece ginger
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • ¼ cup soy sauce
        • 3 tablespoons coconut sugar or light brown sugar
        • 2 tablespoons fresh lime juice
        • 1 tablespoon fish sauce
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 1 tablespoon toasted sesame oil
        • 1 pound New York Strip Steak or Filet Mignon Steak – 1 inch thick
        • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

        Salad Dressing:

        • ¼ cup fresh lime juice
        • ¼ cup hot chili paste such as sambal oelek
        • ¼ cup avocado oil or any other tasteless vegetable oil
        • 1 clove of garlic minced
        • 2 tablespoons fish sauce
        • 2 tablespoons cane sugar or granulated sugar
        • 1 tablespoon honey

        For The Noodles:

        • 2 oz. dried ramen noodles seasoning package discarded
        • ½ teaspoon toasted sesame oil

        For The Salad:

        • 1 ripe mango peeled, cut into 1-inch cubes
        • 1 cup arugula washed and rinsed
        • 2 carrots peeled and shredded
        • 2 green onions sliced thinly
        • 2 cups savoy cabbage sliced thinly – or green cabbage
        • 1 cup chopped tomatoes from 1 large tomato
        • 1 ripe avocado cut into cubes
        • ½ cup fresh cilantro roughly chopped
        • ½ cup fresh basil leaves torn
        • ¼ cup fresh mint leaves torn
        • ½ cup salted peanuts roughly chopped
        • Lime wedges for serving on the side

        Instructions

        • To make the marinade: Whisk together ginger, garlic, soy sauce, sugar, lime juice, fish sauce, black pepper, olive oil, and toasted sesame oil in a bowl. Transfer it to an airtight container with a lid or pour it into a resealable plastic bag. Place the steak in the marinade, seal, and let it marinate for at least 6 hours or up to 12 hours.
        • When you are ready to cook the meat, remove it from the marinade onto a large plate lined with paper towels and pat dry to remove the excess liquid. Season lightly with ¼ teaspoon kosher salt.
        • To cook the steak: Preheat a gas grill* to 450 degrees. Grill, turning a few times until lightly charred on both sides and a thermometer inserted in the thickest part of the steak registers 120 degrees F for medium-rare or 130 degrees F for medium. This takes about 9-11 minutes in total. Cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest on a cutting board for 10 minutes. Cut it into 1-inch pieces right before serving the salad.
        • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together lime juice, hot chili paste, avocado oil, garlic, fish sauce, sugar, and honey in a bowl. Give it a taste and add more salt if needed. Set it aside.
        • To cook the noodles: Cook noodles in a small pot of boiling water for 3 minutes. Drain and transfer to a large bowl. Drizzle with sesame oil and give it a toss.
        • To assemble the salad: Place the mango, arugula, shredded carrots, scallions, cabbage, and tomatoes in the bowl with the noodles. Drizzle it with the prepared dressing. Give it a gentle toss to combine.
        • Add sliced steak, avocado, fresh cilantro, basil, mint, and peanuts. Gently toss to combine.
        • Divide amongst four plates and serve with wedges of lime on the side.

        Notes

        • *You can cook the steak on the stovetop in a grill pan or cast-iron skillet.
        • Storing leftovers: This salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. After the 2-day mark, the vegetables break down and become mushy.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 981kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 68g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 39g | Cholesterol: 91mg | Sodium: 2535mg | Potassium: 1558mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 7623IU | Vitamin C: 82mg | Calcium: 168mg | Iron: 5mg

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/thai-grilled-beef-and-herb-salad/feed/ 19
        Thai Quinoa Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thai-quinoa-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thai-quinoa-salad/#comments Mon, 08 Aug 2022 17:15:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=36630 If you have been following me for a while, you know that I am a huge fan of quinoa salads…]]>

        If you have been following me for a while, you know that I am a huge fan of quinoa salads and make them often. I know you like them too because my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad, Avocado Quinoa Salad, Quinoa and Kale Salad, Quinoa Black Bean Avocado Salad, and Butternut Squash Quinoa Salad recipes are some of the most popular recipes on Foolproof Living.

        This Thai Quinoa Salad recipe, packed with good-for-you and colorful veggies and a delicious peanut sauce, is the newest addition to the collection.

        Thai Quinoa Salad in a bowl garnished with peanuts and cilantro with a spoon

        This crunchy Thai Quinoa Salad recipe is made with my all-time favorite creamy vegan Thai salad dressing, Sesame Ginger Dressing, fluffy quinoa, and fresh veggies. In my humble opinion, this hearty salad is addictive, but in a good way. Packed with a ton of everyday vegetables and topped off with roasted nuts (including but not limited to cashews, almonds, and peanuts), it is wholesome, vegan, and gluten-free.

        What is in This Recipe?

        As in most salad recipes, this easy Thai vegan quinoa salad has 2 sets of ingredients; The salad dressing and the salad ingredients.

        Thai-Style Peanut butter dressing with a whisk in a jar
        1. Asian Sesame Ginger Dressing: For the dressing ingredients, you will need creamy peanut butter (or almond butter would also work), maple syrup, rice vinegar, tamari (or soy sauce), sesame oil, fresh garlic, fresh ginger and chili pepper sauce (like Sriracha or sambal oelek). If you need information on making ahead or storing this dressing recipe, be sure to check out my recipe post on how to make sesame ginger dressing.
        Ingredients for Thai Crunch salad on a marble backdrop
        1. Salad Ingredients: In terms of the salad ingredients, you will need 3 cups of cooked quinoa, purple cabbage, carrots, red bell peppers, scallions, cucumbers, edamame, cilantro (optional), and roasted nuts like O Organics Cashews, Peanuts, and Almonds (for extra crunch).

        Substitutions and Helpful Notes For The Ingredients:

        • Red Cabbage: As I mentioned in my No Mayo Coleslaw and Greek Yogurt Coleslaw recipes, the secret to making cabbage salads work is to slice the cabbage as thinly as you can. This Thai cabbage salad is no different. Because doing so allows the cabbage to soften as soon as it is mixed with the salad dressing and turns it into a soft yet still crunchy salad ingredient. If you do not have purple cabbage, you can use green cabbage instead.
        • Green Onion: Scallions are a classic for any salad, but you can also use thinly sliced red onion.
        • Shelled edamame: I consider edamame a staple ingredient for any of my Asian-style salad recipes (i.e. Asian Chicken Salad recipe). However, if you cannot get your hands on it, you can use sugar snap peas instead or omit them altogether.
        • Quinoa: I used 3 cups of cooked tricolor quinoa, but any type of quinoa (tricolor, white, and red quinoa) would work in this recipe. I usually cook quinoa in bulk and freeze it to have it on hand fast.
        • Use almond Butter instead of peanut butter: You can use almond butter and peanut butter interchangeably in this recipe. I love using Open Nature’s almond or peanut butter as it is made with nothing but nuts and a bit of sea salt. Not to mention it is super creamy.
        • Lime Juice: Don’t have rice vinegar? In a pinch, you can use an equal amount of freshly squeezed lime juice or apple cider vinegar instead.

        How To Make?

        1. Cook the quinoa: I believe that the best way to make quinoa taste good is to cook it in the vegetable broth after rinsing it. I cooked my quinoa in a pressure cooker (in my instant pot), but you can cook it in a rice cooker, microwave or on the stovetop as well.
        Person whisking vegan spicy peanut dressing
        1. Make the Thai Peanut dressing: While the quinoa cooks, make the dressing. Place all salad dressing ingredients in a jar (or a small bowl) and give it a whisk until it is creamy.
        2. Assemble the salad: Place the now-cooked quinoa in a large salad bowl and top it off with all the chopped veggies.
        How to make Thai Style Quinoa Salad shown in 4 photos in a collage
        1. Drizzle it with the dressing: Pour the spicy peanut dressing over the salad and give it a gentle toss.
        2. Garnish & Serve: Top it off with chopped O Organics organic roasted almonds and cashews with sea salt (for extra crunch) and chopped fresh cilantro (optional).

        What to serve it with?

        This crunchy Thai quinoa salad is a meal-worthy salad that you can serve by itself. However, I also love to serve it as a vegetable side dish with my Thai Lemongrass Chicken or Orange Ginger Chicken.

        Additionally, if you are serving it during the BBQ season, you can easily pair it with Grilled Mahi Mahi or Grilled Shrimp Skewers for a healthy meal that is guaranteed to impress.

        A bowl crunchy Thai quinoa salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side

        Make Ahead & Storage:

        Can I make it ahead, you ask? You sure can. As a matter of fact, this Asian Quinoa Salad recipe is one of my favorite meal prep lunches. Simply store it in individual airtight containers in the fridge and enjoy it throughout the week.

        If you decide to do so, I highly recommend storing the dressing separately and tossing it with the salad right before serving it.

        And if you end up with leftovers of this quinoa cabbage salad, simply store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. 

        A Few Helpful Tips & Variations:

        • Taste for seasoning: I highly recommend giving a taste to the salad before serving it. I used a minimal amount of tamari sauce in the recipe below to make it work for everyone. However, as someone who is addicted to salt, I use almost double the amount of tamari when I make this salad for us.
        • Turn it into a Thai Chicken Quinoa Salad: If I am serving this for my meat-loving husband, I usually bake split chicken breasts or air fryer chicken legs, cut (or shred) them into cubes, and incorporate them into the salad.

        FAQs

        What is Thai Quinoa Salad?

        Thai Quinoa Salad is an Asian-styled salad made with crunchy vegetables like cabbage, bell peppers, and cucumbers, and drizzled with a spicy peanut sauce that is flavored with ginger, garlic, and sesame oil.

        Is quinoa salad eaten hot or cold?

        One of my favorite things about this Thai quinoa recipe is that it can be served warm, room temperature, or cold. If I am serving it as a main dish, I usually serve it warm. I love that the freshly cooked and still warm quinoa absorbs the dressing right away and makes it incredibly delicious and creamy. However, it makes a great salad when served cold as well, which is why I usually make it a part of my weekly meal prep and store it in individual containers.

        Check Out These Products and More in Shaw’s:

        There you have it friends, a Thai-style crunchy quinoa salad recipe that you can make all year round. I love shopping at our local Shaw’s and appreciate that they have a great collection of organic ingredients that I can use in my everyday cooking. If there is one in your area, be sure to check out their products.

        Vegan quinoa salad garnished with nuts and cilantro served in bowls from the top view

        Other Quinoa Recipes You Might Like:

        If you liked this easy quinoa salad recipe, I suspect that you are like me; a fan of quinoa salads and include it in your weekly meal prep.

        If you try this Thai Quinoa Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Crunch Thai quinoa salad from the top view with a spoon on the side
        Print

        Thai Quinoa Salad Recipe

        This Thai Quinoa Salad recipe is my go-to weekday lunch. It is easy and quick to make, naturally vegan and gluten free. Packed with crunchy veggies like carrots, cabbage, and cucumber and tossed with a peanut butter/almond butter dressing, it is guaranteed to impress.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine Asian Cuisine, Thai
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 30 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 395kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Peanut Butter Dressing:

        • 3 tablespoons Open Nature® almond or peanut butter* (unsweetened/unsalted)
        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
        • 1/4 cup rice vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons tamari or soy sauce
        • 2 teaspoons toasted sesame oil
        • 1 clove of garlic minced
        • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger grated
        • 1 teaspoon chili pepper sauce I used Sriracha – optional
        • 1/4 teaspoon coarse sea salt

        For The Salad:

        • 3 cups cooked quinoa warm or cold
        • 3 small carrots peeled and shredded
        • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
        • 1 red bell pepper chopped
        • 5 stalks of scallions sliced thinly (both green and white parts)
        • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and cut into small pieces
        • 1 cup edamame or sugar snap peas
        • ½ cup fresh cilantro chopped
        • 1 cup roasted and lightly salted nuts chopped ( I used cashews and almonds)

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing: Place all the ingredients in a jar and whisk until emulsified.
        • To make the salad: Place the quinoa, carrots, cabbage, bell pepper, scallions, cucumber, edamame, and cilantro in a large salad bowl.
        • Drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a toss. Garnish with cashews and almonds. Serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Make Ahead: This salad is one of my favorite meal prep lunches because it stores well. Simply make the salad and dressing. Place the salad ingredients in individual meal prep bowls and store them with the dressing on the side. When ready to serve, drizzle it with the dressing and toss.
        • Storage: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge. When ready to serve, give it a mix, give it a taste, and season with salt, if necessary.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 395kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 494mg | Potassium: 770mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 6091IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 95mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/thai-quinoa-salad/feed/ 12
        Yogurt Dill Sauceย  https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-dill-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-dill-sauce/#comments Mon, 25 Jul 2022 14:48:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=56832 Trying to finish off that open tub of yogurt in your fridge? Try my other easy recipes with yogurt, such…]]>

        Trying to finish off that open tub of yogurt in your fridge? Try my other easy recipes with yogurt, such as my Yogurt Mint Sauce, Yogurt Fruit Dip, Yogurt Ranch Dip, Yogurt Sauce for Pasta, and Yogurt Tahini Sauce!

        A bowl of dill yogurt sauce with a whisk in the bowl from the top view

        Why Make This Recipe

        This irresistible homemade dill sauce packs a flavorful punch, especially for how simple and easy it is to make. If you need more convincing, here are some other reasons why you have to give this recipe a try:

        • You only need 5 ingredients: Few ingredients means less prep time and cleanup and more time enjoying this easy yogurt dill sauce. The best part? The ingredients in this recipe are probably already in your fridge!
        • Healthy, light, and creamy: Not only is this creamy sauce incredibly delicious, but it’s a great addition to your collection of healthy recipes! Yogurt makes this an especially healthy sauce because of its high protein content and digestive support. 
        • It rivals store-bought brands: We all love the authentic sauces from our favorite Mediterranean restaurants (the cult-favorite Cava yogurt dill dressing is especially popular), but why buy when you can get the same results at home? You’ll also save money and avoid some of the added sugar and preservatives that are present in a lot of commercial sauces. 

        Ingredients

        This easy dill sauce recipe requires only a handful of flavorful, simple ingredients. You’ll need whole milk (full fat) plain yogurt (I use Greek yogurt), freshly squeezed lemon juice, olive oil, minced garlic, fresh dill, and kosher salt. 

        Greek yogurt dill sauce ingredients

        Substitutions

        • Yogurt: While I personally love the rich, creamy taste that full fat yogurt provides, it’s higher in total fat when compared to other yogurts. You can swap it for nonfat plain Greek yogurt or regular nonfat yogurt for a lower calorie version of this lemon dill yogurt sauce. Or, for an extra creamy yogurt dill dip, try it with Icelandic yogurt! 
        • Garlic: If you don’t have a fresh clove of garlic on hand, you can use garlic powder instead. Just keep in mind that garlic powder yields a milder flavor than a garlic clove.
        • Dill: Fresh dill really takes this dill yogurt dip to the next level and yields a stronger flavor, so try to buy fresh dill if you can. If not, you can substitute with dried dill for a more mild dill flavor. 
        • Parsley: If you’re not a fan of dill, try adding in some fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley (Italian parsley), instead!
        • Lemon: Fresh lemon juice gives this recipe a tangy, acidic kick. Red wine vinegar provides a similar flavor if you don’t have lemons on hand.

        How to Make Greek Dill Sauce

        This simple yogurt dill sauce literally comes together in the blink of an eye. Simply:

        the ingredients for garlic dill yogurt sauce in a bowl from the top view
        1. Combine the ingredients: In a small bowl, whisk together all ingredients until smooth and fully combined. 
        person mixing the ingredients
        1. Season to taste: Give it a taste and add more fresh dill or another half teaspoon of salt or black pepper, if necessary. 

        How to Serve It

        The sky’s the limit when it comes to serving this garlic dill yogurt sauce! Feel free to get creative, but here are some of my favorite serving suggestions:

        How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw

        If you can’t get enough of this Greek dill sauce and find yourself making it in large batches (I know I would), you can always store it to enjoy later! Here are some tips:

        • Storage: You can store this dill and yogurt sauce refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 3 days. The next time you’re ready to serve, give it a quick whisk to combine any ingredients that may have separated. If it’s too watery, add in a few tablespoons of yogurt to thicken it up. Taste for seasoning and add more dill or salt if necessary. 
        • Freeze: Freeze the yogurt dill lemon sauce for up to a month. 
        • Thaw: To serve the sauce from frozen, refrigerate it until thawed (preferably overnight). You’ll likely find that your thawed sauce has separated a bit, which tends to happen when you freeze dairy products, so give it a stir before serving. You can also revive your dill dip with yogurt if it’s too watery (add a few more tablespoons of yogurt). If it’s still not quite smooth, try blending it in a food processor before serving. 

        Variations

        Since this dill sauce with Greek yogurt is so simple, there’s plenty of room to customize it to your liking. Here are some suggestions:

        • Make it vegan: If you’re one of my vegan friends, I got you covered! To make a vegan yogurt dill sauce, simply use vegan yogurt. Plain coconut or almond milk yogurt make a great plant-based substitution.
        • Amp up the flavor and richness: For an extra rich and creamy variation of this Greek dill dip, add in a tablespoon of mayo to turn it into a lemon dill mayonnaise sauce! This version actually tastes more like ranch dressing. If you’re looking for other yogurt-based dressings, try my Yogurt Salad Dressing or my Poppy Seed Greek Yogurt Dressing.

        FAQs

        How is yogurt dill sauce different than tzatziki sauce?

        The difference between a recipe for dill sauce and one for tzatziki sauce comes down to just one vegetable! Cucumber is a star ingredient in creamy Greek tzatziki sauce, but it’s absent in yogurt dill sauce. Traditional tzatziki sauce requires a little more work because you have to slice the cucumber and remove excess water, so yogurt dill sauce is a more simple recipe. 

        Can you freeze creamy dill yogurt sauce?

        Yes, you can freeze dill yogurt sauce! Just make sure to thaw it in the refrigerator (preferably overnight). The sauce will likely separate while thawing, so give it a stir before serving or add in a few more tablespoons of yogurt.

        Is yogurt dill dressing healthy?

        Yogurt garlic dill dressing has several health benefits! Just one cup of yogurt provides about 50% of your daily value of calcium, and it’s also high in protein, B vitamins, and probiotics that support gut health. Yogurt also provides healthy fats that are known to benefit heart health.

        Other Yogurt Recipes You Might Like

        If you’re a fan of this Greek yogurt and dill dip, you’ll probably love my other yogurt recipes! 

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Yogurt Dill Sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Yogurt dill sauce in a bowl with a whisk in the bowl from the top view
        Print

        Yogurt Dill Sauce Recipe

        A quick & easy Yogurt Dill Sauce that is perfect for all your Greek and Mediterranean dishes. Takes 5 minutes to make, this yogurt sauce makes a great drizzle for fish (especially salmon), falafel, and gyro recipe. It can also be served as a dip with vegetables or meze platters.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 1 cup
        Calories 413kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup Whole Milk full fat plain yogurt, I use Greek Yogurt
        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 clove of garlic minced
        • 2 tablespoons fresh dill or more to taste
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
        • 1/8 teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place all ingredients in a bowl and whisk until fully combined.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if you like.

        Notes

        • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days. The next time you’re ready to serve, give it a quick whisk to combine any ingredients that may have separated. If it’s too watery, add in a few tablespoons of yogurt to thicken it up. Taste for seasoning and add more dill or salt if necessary. 
        • Freeze: Freeze the yogurt dill lemon sauce for up to a month. 
        • Thaw: To serve the sauce from frozen, refrigerate it until thawed (preferably overnight). You’ll likely find that your thawed sauce has separated a bit, which tends to happen when you freeze dairy products, so give it a stir before serving. You can also revive your dill dip with yogurt if it’s too watery.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 413kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Cholesterol: 29mg | Sodium: 1258mg | Potassium: 450mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 462IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 313mg | Iron: 0.3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-dill-sauce/feed/ 2
        Black Eyed Pea Salad https://foolproofliving.com/black-eyed-pea-salad-with-peaches-and-pecans-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/black-eyed-pea-salad-with-peaches-and-pecans-2/#comments Thu, 07 Jul 2022 20:14:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6712 If you are in need of inspiration for bean salad recipes, you are in for a treat, because here at…]]>

        If you are in need of inspiration for bean salad recipes, you are in for a treat, because here at FPL headquarters we love beans and use them regularly in our salads. If you are a fan of this cold black eyed pea salad, it is likely that you might also like our Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar) Corn Salad with Black Beans, Quinoa Black Bean Salad, and 5 Bean Salad.

        This festive and healthy salad is extra fun to make on New Year’s Day alongside my other New Year’s Eve recipes, as tradition holds that eating salad with black eyed peas brings good luck and prosperity. But it can also be served as a crowd-pleasing dish for game days, potlucks, picnics, or your next barbecue served as a side dish or dip with tortilla chips. 

        Blackeyed peas salad in a bowl with spoon on the side

        Ingredients

        You’ll need two sets of simple, everyday ingredients for this versatile, year-round black eyed peas salad that is sure to impress! 

        dressing ingredients from the top view
        • For the salad dressing, I am using my lemon balsamic vinegar dressing. For that, you will need balsamic vinegar, extra-virgin olive oil, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, kosher salt, and freshly ground black pepper. 
        recipe ingredients from the top view
        • To make the salad, gather canned black eyed peas (15 ounce cans), cherry tomatoes, English cucumber, celery rib, a red bell pepper, fresh or canned corn, red onion, and fresh herbs (italian parsley or cilantro). 

        Substitutions

        • Onion: Not everyone prefers the flavor of red onion (or has one on hand). Instead, substitute green onions for a more mild flavor with an equally great crunch! Or, for a sweeter flavor, substitute with a Vidalia onion (sweet onion). 
        • Dressing: If you don’t have balsamic vinegar on hand for the black-eyed peas dressing, you can use red wine vinegar instead. 
        • Corn: Fresh corn is great in this salad, but if it is not in season, you can use canned corn or even thawed frozen corn instead. 
        • Hot sauce: For my spice-loving friends, add a dash of hot sauce for a great way to kick up the flavors in this recipe! 
        • Cook your own black eyed peas: While using a can of beans is convenient, you can use dried black eyed peas and cook them yourself. Here is a helpful guide on how to cook black-eyed peas.

        How to Make This Recipe?

        Making this recipe for black eyed peas tomato salad couldn’t be easier. With a quick whisk of the dressing ingredients and a gentle toss of the veggies, you’ll have this vibrant salad on the table in no time! Simply:

        a collage of images showing how to make the recipe
        1. Make the vinaigrette: In a small bowl, combine the balsamic vinegar, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper with a whisk. As you’re whisking, slowly pour in the extra-virgin olive oil and keep whisking until the mixture looks smooth and the ingredients are fully incorporated. Set aside. 
        2. Assemble the salad: Grab a large bowl and add in your salad ingredients: black-eyed peas, fresh tomatoes, cucumber, celery, red peppers, corn, red onion, and chopped fresh parsley or cilantro. 
        3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss it gently until just combined. 
        4. Season: Top with additional chopped fresh parsley or cilantro. Give it a taste and season it with more salt and black pepper, if necessary. 
        5. Rest: If time permits, let the salad rest overnight or at least for a few hours. A marinated black eyed pea salad tastes the best!
        6. Serve: You can serve the salad alone at room temperature or with tortilla chips on the side. 

        How to Make Ahead & Store Leftovers

        • Make ahead: If you know you’re going to be short on time, you can make this recipe in advance. Simply make the salad and cover it with stretch film or store in an airtight container. Keep in the fridge overnight or until you’re ready to serve. 
        • Storage: You can store the leftover salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to four days. Be sure to give it a toss and season it with salt and pepper before serving.

        What Goes Well With This Salad?

        This easy black-eyed pea salad with corn is a year-round favorite and makes the perfect Thanksgiving vegetable side dish, as well as a great addition to New Year’s Day celebrations, summer BBQs, and simple weeknight dinners. Here are some serving suggestions:

        black eyed pea tomato salad garnished with parsley with spoons on the side

        Variations

        Whether you are a Greek food connoisseur or can’t get enough of Mexican cuisine, you can change up this Southern salad to suit whatever flavor your heart desires! There are so many different ways, but here are some suggestions:

        • Make it Mexican: Add jalapeño and cilantro and top with my Chili Lime Vinaigrette. You can even make black eyed pea salad with Rotel. 
        • Give it a Greek/Mediterranean flair: For a Mediterranean black eyed pea salad or a black eyed pea salad Greek version, toss in a cup of crumbled feta cheese and top with chopped fresh mint and fresh dill. 
        • Try an African black eyed pea salad: Layer the salad over a base of basmati rice and substitute the lemon juice for lime juice. 

        FAQs

        Is black-eyed peas good for you?

        Black-eyed peas, which are technically beans, are a great source of plant-based protein. They also provide a high amount of fiber, which helps you feel full throughout the day, stabilize your blood pressure, and improve your heart health.

        Are canned black-eyed peas already cooked?

        Canned black-eyed peas are pre-cooked and are safe to eat from the can. This recipe, in fact, is a canned black-eyed peas salad recipe. Easy peasy!

        Do you rinse canned black-eyed peas?

        It’s best to rinse canned black-eyed peas under cold water before use to remove excess liquid and salt from the can.

        Other Bean Salads You Might Also Like

        Everyone loves this black-eyed pea salad’s Southern versions, such as those made by Pioneer Woman, Delicious Miss Brown, Southern Living, and Hattie B’s, but I hope you give my version a try. In my opinion, it gives those famous ones a run for their money! If you can’t get enough of this blackeyed pea salad, here are some other bean salad recipes you need to try!

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Black-Eyed Pea Salad recipe or any other salad recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Black Eyed Pea Salad in a bowl
        Print

        Black Eyed Pea Salad Recipe

        Here is a wholesome Black Eyed Pea Salad recipe that you can make in 20 minutes. Serve it as a side dish for holiday dinners or summer barbeque gatherings or by itself for a humble yet delicious lunch.
        Course Vegan & Gluten-Free Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour
        Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
        Servings 6 Servings
        Calories 214kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Dressing:

        • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 clove garlic peeled and minced
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
        • 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

        For The Salad:

        • 2 cans black eyed peas drained and rinsed
        • 2 cups cherry tomatoes sliced
        • 1 English cucumber (medium-size ) cut into small pieces (approximately 1 to 1 ½ cups)
        • 1 celery rib sliced thinly
        • 1 large red bell pepper
        • 1 cup corn fresh, canned or thawed from frozen
        • ½ cup red onion finely diced
        • ½ cup Italian Parsley or cilantro chopped

        Instructions

        • To make the vinaigrette, whisk together balsamic vinegar, fresh lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and black pepper in a small bowl. While still whisking, slowly add the extra-virgin olive oil and continue whisking until fully incorporated and smooth. Set it aside.
        • To assemble the salad: Place black-eyed peas, cherry tomatoes, cucumber, celery, bell pepper, corn, and red onion in a bowl.
        • Drizzle the salad with the dressing. Add the parsley. Give it a toss.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more, if necessary. If you have the time, let it rest for at least four hours or preferably overnight.
        • Serve by itself, as a side dish, or with tortilla chips as a dip.

        Video

        Notes

        • Make ahead: This is a terrific make ahead salad that gets better as it sits. I highly recommend making it a day ahead, covering it with stretch fil, and keeping it in the fridge overnight or until you’re ready to serve. 
        • Storage: You can store the leftover salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to four days. Be sure to give it a toss and season it with salt and pepper before serving.
        • Change it up: I used my Lemon Balsamic Vinegar to make this salad, but if you want to change it up, you can also make it with my Chili Lime Dressing.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 214kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 594mg | Potassium: 481mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 1699IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/black-eyed-pea-salad-with-peaches-and-pecans-2/feed/ 39
        40 Best Summer Salads That Are Perfect For Your Next Gathering https://foolproofliving.com/best-summer-salads/ https://foolproofliving.com/best-summer-salads/#comments Wed, 29 Jun 2022 22:38:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=54780 Crisp lettuce and flavorful toppings come together for refreshing summer salad recipes you can enjoy at any meal. Plus, you’ll…]]>

        Crisp lettuce and flavorful toppings come together for refreshing summer salad recipes you can enjoy at any meal. Plus, you’ll find fan-favorite summer salad dressing ideas, like my Lemon Vinaigrette and Lemon Balsamic Dressing, to brighten every bowl.

        A salad image with a text that says The Best Summer Salads that anyone can make

        Summertime Salads for a Crowd

        Say goodbye to party planning stress! These make-ahead salad recipes for a crowd will satisfy guests with minimal prep and maximum flavor. It’s no wonder these fresh party favorites are some of my most popular salad recipes.

        Texas Caviar being served from the front
        1. Texas Caviar: It only takes 30 minutes to prepare this Southern-inspired salad. Plus, it is made with canned beans so no cooking is required. Serving it for a crowd? No problem, double or triple it. Quick, easy, and delicious, I’d say this Cowboy Caviar is one of the best summer salads for a crowd. You can even serve this fresh corn salad as a dip for a mess-free spread.
        2. Pesto Caprese Salad with Pasta: Everyone loves a classic Caprese salad. You can take this Italian signature to the next level by adding top-rate ingredients, like garlicky Pesto Vinaigrette, sweet cherry tomatoes, and freshly picked basil. If you need a good salad recipe to use fresh tomato, I’d say this is one of the best pasta salads out there.
        3. Mexican Corn Pasta Salad: If you’re on the hunt for flavor-packed salads for a summer party, this authentic Mexican street corn salad is just what you need. Made with summer corn, jalapenos, and cotija cheese, this easy pasta salad is going to be the first thing to disappear from your summer buffet.
        Cold summer tomato salad with mozzarella and cucumber
        1. Cucumber Tomato Mozzarella Salad: Drizzled with Lemon Balsamic Dressing and mixed with fresh mozzarella cheese, this recipe is one of my favorite summer brunch salads. This colorful side dish comes together in minutes and can be multiplied as many times as you want, which is why it is great if you are serving a crowd.
        2. 5 Bean Salad: This green bean salad strikes a perfect balance between soft, tender beans and the robust tang of mustard vinaigrette. You can even make this delicious dish ahead of time for a travel-ready potluck.
        3. Homemade Potato Salad: When I think of “summer salads for a crowd,” this classic potato salad from my mom’s cookbook is another favorite. Everyone will adore this simple recipe’s creamy mayo dressing, tangy dill pickles, and sharp red onion.

        Cold Salads for Summer

        Fresh ingredients, crisp veggies, and light dressings make these chilled salad recipes some of my favorites. These simple recipes will keep you cool on hot summer days, from the best summer picnic salads to quick midday meals.

        A bowl of white bean cold summer salad from the top view
        1. Turkish Bean Salad (aka Piyaz): Bring authentic Mediterranean eats to your table with this simple white bean and tomato salad. It takes 10 minutes to prepare and uses stylish ingredients like juicy tomatoes, briny olives, and tangy sumac.
        2. Corn and Black Bean Salad: Your tastebuds will thank you for this Mexican-inspired dish. Packed with red bell peppers, fresh sweet corn, pickled jalapenos, and creamy black beans, this outdoor salad serves as a dip and a meal.
        3. No Mayo Coleslaw: Healthy salads for summer are at your fingertips with this vegan recipe. This dish’s vinegar-based dressing will turn crunchy cabbage into the perfect side dish, topping (for tacos!), or midday snack.
        Yogurt coleslaw is being served as a chilled summer salad
        1. Yogurt Coleslaw: Made with my 5-minute Yogurt Salad Dressing, this recipe is one of my favorite mayo-free summer salad ideas. This colorful side is so delicious that you’ll want to add it to your collection of the best healthy cold salads.
        2. Tabbouleh: This Middle Eastern classic combines delicious bulgur with fresh herbs, like fresh mint, dill, and parsley, for a cold summer salad everyone loves. In just 30 minutes, you can have authentic Turkish cuisine ready to serve.
        3. Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad: From summer picnics to the dinner table, this healthy cucumber salad recipe is a great way to cool down and satisfy your tastebuds. A great alternative to mayo and sugar-laden cucumber salads, this easy recipe is made with my yogurt salad dressing and flavored with fresh dill.

        Summer Luncheon Salads

        Fresh vegetables, creamy cheese, and flavorful grains turn these salads for lunch into a delicious meal. Whether you’re looking for a dish packed with leafy greens, tender quinoa, or crisp peppers, this healthy collection is perfect for you.

        Broccoli salad from the top view
        1. Cauliflower Broccoli Salad: Sunflower seeds, baked turkey bacon, and Greek yogurt dressing? Sounds too good to be true! You won’t have to look for great salads once you have this creamy-crunchy dish in your recipe book.
        2. Lentil Quinoa Salad: If you love the rich flavor of seasoned quinoa and lentils mixed with the freshness of mint, you’ll adore this Mediterranean meal. You’ll feel like you’re vacationing on the Mediterranean coast with summertime salad recipes like this.
        3. Shrimp Spinach Salad: Feta cheese, zesty shrimp, and sweet peas make this recipe one of the best salads to satisfy your seafood cravings during the summer months. Packed with baby spinach leaves and drizzled with a quick red wine vinaigrette, it is a meal-worthy salad that can be made in less than 30 minutes.
        4. Quinoa Salad with Avocado: The perfect lunch salad is only 15 minutes away when you have this Mediterranean recipe on hand. It is made with creamy avocado, quinoa, baby spinach, and my go-to lemon salad dressing, this salad is the ultimate quick healthy lunch recipe when you need one.  Plus, with my foolproof guide on cooking quinoa, you can whip up this ultimate summer salad like a pro.
        Quinoa salad being drizzled with the dressing
        1. Quinoa Feta Salad: This Greek salad bursts with authentic Mediterranean flavors, like creamy feta, fresh lemon juice, and kalamata olives. You don’t have to be a master chef to enjoy delicious salads like this.
        2. Seared Tuna Salad: Out of all the quick salads, this Asian-inspired 20 min recipe takes the cake. Sesame-crusted tuna pairs perfectly with the antioxidant-rich black rice, but you can serve it with quinoa or just by itself with crackers on the side. Either way, this seafood salad is a must-try when you can get your hands on fresh tuna.
        3. Summer Garden Salad: No one can say “no” to this light summer salad from Weelicious. Tasty ingredients, like roasted beets, sundried tomatoes, and Persian cucumber, make this salad as stunning as it is delicious. 

        Meal Worthy Dinner Salads

        There’s no reason why summer salad recipes can’t be filling, too. Turn your fresh veggies into a complete meal with this yummy collection of main dish summer salads.

        Waldorf salad in a bowl
        1. Chicken Waldorf Salad: Everyone will want a bowl of this dish’s tangy dressing, tender chicken, and tart apples. Topped with crisp veggies and chopped walnuts, this salad will be your new dinner special.
        2. Southwest Avocado Chicken Salad: One of my most beautiful salads, this Southern-inspired dish comes with a Creamy Avocado Salad Dressing that tastes out-of-this-world good. A great way to use leftover chicken breasts, it even has fresh cilantro and cheddar cheese for top Southwestern flavors!
        3. Shrimp and Corn Salad: When making warm weather salads with meat, try adding some surf to your turf. This yummy seafood salad uses grilled corn, cherry tomatoes, marinated grilled shrimp, and butter lettuce to please everyone at the dinner table.
        Greek Yogurt Chicken Salad in a bowl
        1. Chicken Salad with Greek Yogurt: For a good salad that fills you up, chicken is just what you need. Top a sandwich with this creamy, make-ahead dish, or eat it straight from the bowl. Either way, you won’t be able to get enough.
        2. Thai Beef Salad: Among all these recipes, this grilled steak dish packs some of the meatiest flavors. Meat lovers and Asian foodies will fall head over heels for this dish’s Thai marinade, pickled onions, and English cucumber.
        3. Jen Aniston Salad: Also known as the “Friends” salad, the social media viral Jennifer Aniston Salad is a wonderful meal-worthy chickpea salad recipe that you can make with cooked quinoa or cooked bulgur wheat. Packed with chickpeas, cucumbers, red onion, and pistachios, it is a great vegetarian salad that doubles as a weeknight dinner.
        4. Grilled Flank Steak Salad: Marinated flank steak, grilled to perfection, served on top of crisp romaine, grilled corn, and ripe avocados. This is what I call a summer dinner that is guaranteed to impress.

        Green Salad Recipes with Summer Produce

        These healthy bowls are just what you need for summer salad recipes. Packed with vibrant greens and crisp veggies, each bite will bring your tastebuds to life with a garden-fresh flavor.

        person drizzling a summer green salad with dressing
        1. Spring Mix Salad: It’s no secret why this summer mix salad is one of my favorite trending salads. Crisp, nutritious, and bursting with summer-fresh flavors, this green summer side salad pairs with almost any main course.
        2. Butter Lettuce Salad: Refreshing salad ideas are a cinch to make when you have butter lettuce on hand. This easy meal contains tasty ingredients—like crisp radish, asparagus, and toasted almonds—to fill your salad bowl with all the goodness you need.
        3. Kale and Quinoa Salad: This superfood-packed recipe proves that salads without pasta can be just as filling as those with pasta. Chickpeas, avocado, broccoli, and pomegranate are just a few ingredients in this summer-ready dish.
        A fun summer salad made with kale and avocado served in a bowl
        1. Avocado Kale Salad: Avocado lemon dressing makes a lip-licking pair with the leafy kale of this hearty summer salad. Top this dish with roasted pine nuts, and voila! A salad fit for a five-star restaurant.
        2. Arugula White Bean Salad: Made with almond-parmesan pesto, this arugula salad is the nuttiest of my hearty summer salads. This delicious dish’s warm beans and robust garlic will satisfy your mouth and stomach.
        3. Summer Lettuce Salad: Looking for light summer salads that pack major flavor? This grilled romaine salad combines the smoky flavor of the grill with a bright ranch dressing sure to please.

        Classic Salads To Cool You Off

        It doesn’t matter if you’re feeding your neighbor or a food critic: These sophisticated salads will impress anyone who takes a bite. Elegant, innovative, and always tasty, these brunch-ready classics are the best summer salad recipes for a first-rate meal.

        Caesar salad in a bowl from the top view
        1. Original Caesar Salad: Out of all my romaine lettuce salads, this recipe is a must-have summer classic. No one can resist the creamy Caesar dressing, nutty Parmesan cheese, and garlic croutons of this restaurant-style side.
        2. Mexican Corn Salad: Once you taste this summer corn salad’s spicy tang, you won’t be able to put your fork down. Crumbly cotija cheese and smoky chili powder are a match made in heaven that pairs perfectly with any grilled main dish.
        3. Nicoise Salad with Salmon: Want to impress your guests with unusual summer salad recipes? This elegant seafood salad is a spin-off of the famous French niçoise salad made with tuna. My version here is made with salmon, but it is just as delicious. Make a batch of this delicious salmon salad to bring the taste of France to your table with salty capers, tangy Dijon mustard, hard-boiled eggs, and mild potatoes.
        classic summertime salad made with shrimp, red onion, and orzo from the top view
        1. Shrimp Orzo Salad: This Mediterranean classic explodes with fresh, seaside flavor. Nothing pairs better than the succulent shrimp, bright lemon, and tender orzo of this herby dish. This Barefoot Contessa recipe is one of the most popular summer salad recipes on the blog.

        Sweet Salads for Summer

        Who says you can’t satisfy a sweet tooth and eat healthily? These fruity sweet summer salad recipes brim with luscious fruits, creamy dressings, and crisp veggies. This sweet combination will have you licking your lips all season long.

        1. Mango and Avocado Salad: If you love sweet-and-spicy dishes, this unique summer salad recipe will be your new favorite. Fruity mango, spicy jalapeno, and zippy Chili Lime Vinaigrette make a delectable flavor combination.
        peach avocado salad recipe in a bowl
        1. Peach Avocado Salad: Made with creamy avocado and juicy peaches, this delicious recipe is my go-to August salad. This peach salad is equal parts tart and luscious, making it one of the best salads to satisfy your cravings.
        2. Blueberry Salad: Sweet blueberries, salty feta, and baby spinach make this refreshing salad one of the most colorful creations you’ll whip up this summer. Getting seasonal produce at the farmer’s market has never been so fun!
        watermelon avocado salad from the top
        1. Watermelon and Avocado Salad: Watermelon salad is one of my recipe book’s most refreshing summer salads. Not only does this simple recipe only take 20 minutes to make, but it also uses fresh lime juice to bring its summer flavors to life.
        2. Strawberry Salad with Poppyseed: This refreshing salad pairs ripe berries and earthy goat cheese for a spread that tastes straight out of a charcuterie board. Topped with my Poppyseed Dressing, this summertime salad will have you asking for seconds.

        Quick and Easy Summertime Salads

        Need a super quick and easy salad for your next BBQ party? Below are a few of our easy salad recipes that are ready in less than 15 minutes and made with just a few basic ingredients.

        Watermelon cucumber salad in a bowl from the top view.
        1. Watermelon Cucumber Salad: This is possibly the easiest light and refreshing fruit salad you can make in less than 15 minutes. Sweet cubed watermelon mixed in with crunchy cucumbers and savory feta cheese and then drizzled with honey lime dressing, this salad is a summertime classic.
        2. Burrata Caprese: The classic Italian Caprese made with burrata cheese instead of mozzarella. Ready in 10 minutes, it is the best way to use summer tomatoes and garden fresh basil.
        3. La Scala Salad: Social media viral La Scala salad, also known as Kardashian Salad, sounds fancy, but it is actually easy to make. Made with a combination of iceberg lettuce and romaine, this simple salad is packed with chickpeas, Italian salami, and mozzarella cheese.
        4. Red Cabbage Slaw: This vibrant, vinegar-based slaw is everything you want in a summer side dish: crisp, colorful, and full of tangy flavor. Whether you’re serving tacos, grilled meats, or pulled pork sandwiches, this red cabbage salad adds the perfect pop of freshness to your summer spread.
        5. Turkish Shepherd Salad: If you’re looking for a quick and easy summer salad that’s fuss-free, this iconic Turkish tomato and cucumber salad is well worth the 15 minutes it takes to prepare.

        You Might Also Like:

        If you try any of these summer salad recipes, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        tomato cucumber mozzarella salad in a bowl with two spoons on the side
        Print

        20 Best Summer Salad Recipes

        I think the best summer salads are those that are made with seasonal ingredients such as sweet corn, juicy tomatoes, and fresh herbs. Top it with your favorite cheese and avocados for a delicious and visually impressive summer salad that is guaranteed to impress. Here is one of the most popular summer salad recipe, Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 337kcal

        Ingredients

        For the dressing:

        • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 clove garlic peeled and minced
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt or 1/2 teaspoon sea salt, more if needed at the end
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

        For the salad:

        • 4-5 Persian cucumbers sliced ¼-inch thick slices (skin on)
        • 2 cups colorful cherry tomatoes cut into quarters
        • 8 ounces fresh mozzarella cheese cut into small cubes
        • handful fresh basil leaves or Italian parsley leaves (optional)

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing: Place balsamic vinegar, fresh lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper in a small bowl. Give it a whisk. While still whisking, slowly add in the extra-virgin olive oil and continue whisking until fully incorporated and smooth. Set it aside.
        • To assemble the salad: Place cucumber slices, tomatoes, and mozzarella cheese in a bowl. Drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a toss.
        • Garnish with fresh basil or Italian parsley.
        • Taste for seasoning and add in some more salt and crushed black pepper, if necessary. Serve.

        Notes

        • Make Ahead: Prepare the salad and the tangy balsamic vinaigrette and store them in separate containers. Storing them separately will keep your veggies—especially the tomatoes—from getting soggy.
        • Storage: This Chopped Caprese Cucumber Salad will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 2 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 337kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 45mg | Sodium: 367mg | Potassium: 419mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1427IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 313mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/best-summer-salads/feed/ 3